The URL can be used to link to this page

Specifications F �� f • • I • • • f • F o F j f � x US 4 ' . - � r ' t 5 .. igard ';. Tua latin: School District 69.60 Sandh rg oad Tigai d, Oregon 97223 { - k June 27 2004 • 't •••"•"'gi''g' •••• c�rc htec ts • • SST NO. 1 PROJECT MANUAL FOR: TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL PHASE II TENANT IMPROVEMENT PACKAGE- MUSIC for (OWNER) Tigard - Tualatin School District 6960 Sandburg Road Tigard, Oregon 97223 (ARCHITECT) Dull Olson Weekes Architects, Inc. 319 SW Washington St., No. 200 Portland, OR 97204 PH: 226 -695.0 / FAX: 273- 9192 ''°U c 2282 ref SO , ► 0 OF ®� May 28, 2004 1 . TABLE OF CONTENTS I Table of Contents I DIVISION 0 - BIDDING REQUIREMENTS Not Used. I DIVISION 1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS Not Used. • 1 DIVISION 2 - SITEWORK I Section 02072 Minor Demolition for Remodeling 3 DIVISION 3 - CONCRETE . I Not Used. DIVISION 4 - MASONRY I Not Used. . DIVISION 5 - METALS Section 05500 Metal Fabrications 5 p DIVISION 6 - WOOD & PLASTIC Section 06200 Finish Carpentry 4 I 06410 Custom Casework 8 DIVISION 7 - THERMAL & MOISTURE PROTECTION 1 Section 07213 Batt and Blanket Insulation 2 07270 Firestopping 6 07900 Joint Sealants 6 I DIVISION 8 - DOORS & WINDOWS Section 08000 Door and Relite Schedule 3 08110 Metal Doors and Frames 4 08210 Wood Doors 5 08305 Access Doors 2 I 08380 Acoustical Door Assemblies 4 08700 Door Hardware 6 08800 Glazing 6 III DIVISION 9 - FINISHES I Section 09001 Interior Finish Legend 2 09100 Metal Support Systems 4 09120 Ceiling Suspension System 3 09260 Gypsum Board Systems 4 I 09511 Suspended Acoustical Ceilings 4 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J TOC -1 Printed 7/27/04 L I TABLE OF CONTENTS I 09650 Resilient Flooring 4 I 09900 Painting 09950 Wall Coverings 3 DIVISION 10 - SPECIALTIES . L Section 10100 Visual Display Boards 4 10120 Tacksurfaces 3 10522 Fire Protection Specialties 3 DIVISION 11 - EQUIPMENT II Section 11130 Audio — Visual Equipment 2 DIVISION 12 - FURNISHINGS • 1 Section 12370 Heavy Duty Specialty Shelving 2 . 12381 Music Specialty Casework 4 I 125.12 Horizontal Louver Blinds 3 • , DIVISION 13. - SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION • I Not Used. DIVISION 14 - CONVEYING SYSTEMS • pi Not Used. • DIVISION 15 - MECHANICAL Section 15050 Basic Mechanical Materials and M ethods 9 15060 Pipes and Pipe Fittings 6 15090 Supports and Anchors 4 15100 _Valves 2 15240 Mechanical Sound and Vibration Control 2 1 15250 Mechanical Insulation 3 15300 . Fire Protection 4 15400 Plumbing 3 15500 Heating, Ventilation and Air Conditioning 2 15750 Heat Transfer 1 15850 Air Handling 2 15880 Air Distribution 5 1 15900 Controls 29 15990 Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing 6 I DIVISION 16 ELECTRICAL Section 16050 Basic Electrical Materials and Methods . 8 16110 Conduits, Raceways and Fittings 4 16120 Conductors 3 16130 Boxes 2 16140 Wiring Devices 2 I 16170 Circuits and Motor Disconnects . 2 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J TOC -2 Printed 7/27/04 T OF CONTENTS • TABLE O CO 16190 Supporting Devices 3 16195 Electrical Identification 2 16450 Grounding 2 16500 Lighting Fixtures and Lamps 3 16723 Fire Alarm and Detection System 3 16730 Intercom and Paging System 3 16735 GPS Wireless Clock System 4 16740 Data, Telephone, and CATV Systems 1 16900 Lighting Controls 5 END OF TABLE OF CONTENTS • • I' I I I . I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL TI PACKAGE - MUSIC • JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J TOC -3 Printed 7 /27/04 I • SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and I Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. . • 1.02 WORK INCLUDED I A. Remove designated, building equipment and fixtures. I B. Saw -cut and remove portions of concrete floor slab for utilities work. C. Remove designated partitions and components. 1 D. Remove designated finish materials as required for new finishes. E. Temporary partitions to protect existing building. II F. Cap and identify utilities. • 1.03 RELATED WORK I A.,. Section 01010 - Summary. of Work: Precautions concerning asbestos and related work by District. . _ .. . . _ PI . B. Section 01300 - Submittals: Project record documents. C. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities: Fences and Barricades. I , D: Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities: Protection of existing buildings. , E. Section 01500 - Temporary Facilities: Cleaning during construction. • I F. Division 15 - Mechanical: Coordination of demolition work. ' : I G. Division 16 - Electrical: Coordination of demolition work. 1.04 SUBMITTALS I A. Submit demolition and removal procedures and schedule under provisions of Section 01300. B. Permits and notices authorizing demolition. I C. Certificates of severance of utility services. D. Permit for transport and disposal of debris. I E. Submit record drawings under provisions of Section 01300. 1 I I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE -MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 02072 -1 Printed 7/26/04 • • SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING 1.05 EXISTING CONDITIONS A. Conduct demolition to minimize interference with adjacent building areas. Maintain protected egress and access at all times. B. Provide, erect, and maintain temporary barriers and security devices. I C. Ai-range and pay for disconnecting, removing, and capping utility services within areas of • • demolition. Disconnect and stub off. PART 2 PRODUCTS • Not Used. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.01 PREPARATION A. Provide bracing and shoring as needed. • B. Erect and maintain weatherproof closures for exterior openings. C.. Erect and maintain temporary partitions to prevent spread of dust; fumes and smoke, to other parts of the existing building. D. Protect existing items which are not indicated to be altered. E. Mark location of disconnected utilities. Identify utility, indicate capping locations and distance from finish floor on Project Record Documents. F. The Owner will within seven days . notice from Contractor transfer any undesignated and . freestanding furnishings and equipment out of the Work area. 11 3.02 EXECUTION A. Noise Control: Maintain a reasonable degree of quietness throughout progress of the Work so as to not disturb classes in session in adjoining rooms or buildings or annoy residents of the neighborhood. Rotary machines and tools must operate below OSHA noise and fume standards. Concrete sawing and jackhammering shall be performed after regular school hours up to 9:00 p.m. B. Demolish in an orderly and careful manner. Provide temporary structural support where walls are to be removed. ,r C. Except where noted otherwise, immediately remove demolished materials from site.. D. Items requiring demolition and removal include, but are not limited to, the following: 1. Interior walls. 2. Doors and Frames. 3. Gypsum board ceilings. 4. Casework and lockers. 5. Flooring Finishes. (Materials containing asbestos to be removed by District.). 6. Selected mechanical equipment and ductwork. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE -MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 02072 -2 1 Printed 7/26/04 • . SECTION 02072 MINOR DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING • 7. Electrical equipment. 1 E. Remove materials to be re- installed or retained in manner to prevent damage. Store and protect under provisions of Section 01600. F. Demolition Drawings are diagrammatic and are intended to assist the Contractor in establishing the general scope of work. Include all demolition work required to complete the project whether or not specifically shown on demolition Drawings. 1 ' G. Remove and promptly properly dispose of contaminated, infested, or dangerous materials . encountered. I H. The Contractor shall employ a demolition foreman knowledgeable in identification of asbestos . containing materials and shall instruct workmen at the Site to be on the look -out for materials that may contain asbestos fibers and to not disturb or attempt to remove such materials. ,' I. The Contractor shall carefully demolish walls; ceilings, etc., which contain concealed space • to allow visual inspection for any material which may be suspect of containing asbestos fibers prior to total scheduled demolition. • J. Should the Contractor discover any material which he suspects of containing asbestos fibers, the I Contractor shall stop working immediately and shall not carry on any activities in that area that could disturb such materials. The School District will evaluate the circumstances and instruct the - - Contractor on how and when to proceed with the Work. - P ' - K . The Contractor shall . take every precaution possible to prevent the spread of asbestos fibers throughout the Work under this Contract. The Contractor shall not break up and attempt to remove or actually remove from the Work area any material suspected of containing asbestos . fibers (i.e., pipe insulation, sprayed -on fireproofing). L. Asbestos' fibers carried around the Work area or into the existing structure due to the Contractor's carelessness or failure to follow the procedures specified herein shall, at the Contractor's expense, I be cleaned up in accordance with E.P.A. requirements. M. Do not burn or bury materials on site. 1 N. Remove demolished materials from site as work progresses. Upon completion of work, leave areas of work in clean condition. END OF SECTION .1 • I I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE -MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 02072 -3 Printed 7/26/04 I SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS I PART 1 GENERAL • 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and, general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1.- General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES I A. Shop fabricated ferrous metal items. I 1.03 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Installation of Stainless Steel Cornerguards. I B., Section 06410 — Custom Casework: Installation of countertop support brackets. 1.04 REFERENCES :, A. ASTM A307 - Low- Carbon Steel Externally and Interimally Threaded Fasteners. 1 B. ASTM A386 - Zinc Coating for Assembled Steel Products. C. AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code. - - . D. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC). 1.05 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data:, 1. Submit product data on shop prime paint. • I 2. Submit product data on anchors and inserts required to anchor metal fabrications. B. Shop Drawings: s: g • 1. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. • I 2. Submit complete details and instructions for fabrication and installation of custom shop • fabricated items. 3. Indicate metal materials, dimensions, connections to building structural system and shop finish. 4. Prepare shop drawings from field measurements where possible. 5. Allow for field trimming where taking field measurements will delay work. III C. Indicate welded connections using standard AWS welding symbols. Indicate net weld lengths. D. Weld Inspection Reports: 1. Comply with requirements in Section 01400, Quality Control. 1' 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE I . A. Welder Qualifications: Use welders certified by American Welding Society for structural welding. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC iv JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 05500 -1 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Substitute Manufacturers - listed below: 1. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date. • 2. Comply with requirements in Section 01600. • 2.02 MATERIALS I _ A. Steel Framing Materials: 1. Steel Plates, Shapes, and Bars: ASTM A 36 and UBC Standard 22 -1. B. Slotted Channel: 1. Standard Size: 1 -5/8 by 1 -5/8 inches by 12 gage (0.015 inch thick) steel by 10 and 20 feet long. 2. '/2 diameter threaded steel suspension rods. 3. Miscellaneous clips and brackets for connection of slotted channels to structure and to adjacent channels. 4. Acceptable Channels: P -1000 by Unistrut, A -1200 by Superstrut. C. Fastener Materials: 1. Standard Bolts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. _ 2. High Strength Bolts: ASTM A 325 X. 3. Steel Welding Electrodes: AWS A5.1, E60XX or AWS A5.1 or"A5.5, E70XX. ` - 4. Concrete Anchors: Kwik -Bolt II or Sleeve Anchor by Hilti, Red Head Wedge Anchors by Phillips, Trubolt or Dynabolt by ITW Ramset, Rawl -Bolt or Rawl -Stud by Rawlplug, Parabolt by Emhart Industries, Inc. 5. Epoxy Adhesive for Drilled Anchors: Concresive Epoxy Cartridge by Master Builders, Inc. or HV by Hilti Fastening Systems. 6. Machine Screws: Steel, FS FF -S -92. 7. Plain Washers: Round steel FS FF -W -92. 8. Lock Washers: Helical spring, FS FF -W -84. D. Prime Paint: 1. Prime Paint for Interior Steel: SSPC paint specification No. 15, Type 1. Maximum 3.5 lbs /gal emissions. • E. Mill Finish Aluminum 1. Angles and Channel: ASTM B221 extruded, depth required for span. • 2. Sheets and Flat bars: ASTM B221 extruded, 1/4 inch or as required for span. 3. Finish: Mill finish. F. • Miscellaneous Steel: _ 1. Stainless Steel: ASTM A167 Type 304 and 304L, 16 gage, 2B finish. 2. Sheet Stock: Cold Rolled Mild Steel, 18 gage or as indicated on drawings. 2.03 SHOP FABRICATION. PROCESS A. Fabrication Requirements: 1. Fabricate items to dimensions required by field measurements. 2. Comply with shop drawings and referenced standards. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 05500 -2 Printed 7/26/2004 • SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 1 3. Use welds for shop connections and use bolts for field connections, except where indicated otherwise on Drawings. 4. Preassemble items in shop to greatest extent practicable to minimize field splicing and assembly. 5. Disassemble units only as required for shipping and handling. 6. Mark assembled components for field assembly and coordinated installation. 7. . Use materials of size and thickness indicated or, if not indicated, as required to produce • strength and durability in finished product for use intended. 8. . Work to dimensions shown or accepted on shop drawings, using proven details of fabrication and support. 9. Use type of materials indicated and specified for various components of work. . 1 10. Stainless Steel: Cuts for special shapes to be made with laser or sheared. B. Welded Steel Connections: (All connections unless noted.) 1. Form exposed connections with flush hairline joints. . 2. Comply with AWS Structural Welding Code D1.1. 3. Fabricate assemblies with welded joints using shielded metal -arc process (SMAW). 4: Comply with UBC Section 2205.10. 5. Provide 1/4 inch minimum fillet welds and full penetration butt welds for all connections unless noted otherwise. 6. Grind shop welded connections flush and smooth with adjacent finished surface. Ease exposed edges to small uniform radius. E. C. -_ Bolted Connections:. ,; - ._ - -_ .- - -- _- 1. Provide anchor bolts for connecting to other work: _- _ p 2. Drill and tap steel as required to receive bolted connections. - - 3. Make bolt holes 1/16 inch larger than nominal bolt diameter. • D. 'Primed Shop Finish Custom Fabricated Components: 1. After shop weld inspection, clean steel to be primed to remove rust, loose mill scale, slag, spatter, and flux deposits. . 2. Prepare interior steel per SSPC SP1, solvent cleaning. . 3. Prepare exterior steel per SSPC SP6, commercial blast. • 4. Shop prime interior steel with one coat of shop primer in accordance with SSPC paint specification #15, type 1. 5. Apply primer to exposed steel and the initial 2 inches of embedded steel surfaces. 6. Apply primer at primer manufacturer's recommended dry film thickness. 7. Apply two coats of primer to areas inaccessible after erection, changing color of second coat. I 8. Do not prime members or portions of members to be embedded in concrete or grout, and surfaces to be field welded, unless indicated otherwise on Drawings. • 2.04 SHOP FABRICATED COMPONENTS A. Fabrication of Stainless Steel Corner Guards: 1. Size: As shown on drawings. Al 2. Shop form corner guards to suit wall application. 3. Bevel top and side edges, grind smooth. 4. Provide adhesive suitable for permanent installation. Some corner guards shall be applied a over wall finish. ill B. Fabrication of Countertop support brackets: I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 05500 -3 Printed 7/26/2004 - SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 1. Fabricate brackets of 1 '/2 by 1 '/2 by 1/8 inch tubular steel horizontal and vertical with diagonal brace. Provide welded end caps on exposed ends of brackets, weld and grind smooth. 2. Locate as shown on drawings. If no brackets are shown on drawings then provide brackets at 48 inches on center maximum under unsupported countertops. In corner applications provide two at each unsupported corner, one support bracket perpendicular to wall surface at each wall surface. Verify with cabinetmaker quantity as defined under Section 06410 — Custom. Casework. . SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL • A. Shop Weld Inspections: 1. Comply with requirements in Section 01400, Quality Control. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE A. Field Fabrication: 1. Perform required cutting, drilling, and fitting. 2. Fit components to form tight hairline joints. 3. Apply prime paint to damaged galvanized and prime painted steel surfaces. 4. Grind shop welded connections flush and smooth with adjacent finished.surface. Ease _ exposed edges to small uniform radius: =. - 5. Install bolted connections as detailed on shop drawings. B. Installation Requirements: 1. Comply with AISC Manual of Steel Construction and UBC Standard 22 -1. 2. Set work accurately in location, alignment and elevation, measured from established lines and levels. 3. Align members to tolerance of one in 300 and within 1/4 inch from design dimension. 4. Anchor fabrications to substrates with threaded fasteners. 3.02 COMPLETION A. Adjusting Defective Work: , 1. Replace damaged and defective members. 2. Adjust alignment when members are installed more than 1/4 inch from design dimension. 3. Remove pits, bumps, and irregular weld grinds from exposed surfaces. 4. Touch up damaged shop primer on exposed steel after installation. 5. Clean field welds, bolted connections, and abraded areas per SSPC SP3 power tool cleaning, and apply same type primer paint as used in shop. B. Final Cleaning: 1. Remove dirt and oil from metal items scheduled for field finishing. C. Metal Protection: 1. Apply protecting material to face of metal in areas of potential galvanic activity between contacting dissimilar metal materials. 2. Maintain factory applied cover to protect abrasive stair nosings until substantial completion. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 05500 -4 Printed 7/26/2004 I SECTION 05500 METAL FABRICATIONS 3.03 S CHEDULE I A. Provide and install items listed in Schedule and/or shown on Drawings with anchorage and attachments necessary for installation. B. Mechanical and Electrical Support Frames: 1. Primed at interior. I C. Comerguards — Stainless Steel Panels: Stainless Steel #2B. D. Brackets - Counter supports: Primed. I END OF SECTION I I PI . I 1 I • I I 1 .1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC i JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 05500 -5 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY I PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Finish carpentry items,- other than shop prefabricated casework. I B. Standing and Running Trim. C. Hardware and attachment accessories. I D. Fiberboard Wainscot. E. Mounting of salvaged (Owner - furnished) countertops and new projection screens. 1 1.03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Supply of stainless steel cornerguards to this Section. IA. _. - - - Supply . B. - Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Su 1 of hardware and attachment accessories to this Section. - PI C. Section 10522 - Fire Extinguishers, Cabinets and Accessories: Installation of fire extinguisher cabinets. I D. Section 11130 — Audio/Visual Equipment: Installation of projection screens. . 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS I • A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Installation of blocking for finish carpentry items. B. Section 06410 - Custom Casework: Shop fabricated custom cabinetwork. I C. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant used at the junction of different materials. 1 D. Section 09900 - Painting: Painting and finishing of finish carpentry items. • 1.05 REFERENCES I A. AWI - Quality Standards. • B. FS MMM -A -130 - Adhesive, Contact. • I, C. . NEMA LD -3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. 1 D. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. UL - Underwriters Laboratories. E. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) Manual. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06200 -1 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 06200 • FINISH CARPENTRY 1 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel/smoke requirements. • B. • Conform to UL requirements to achieve fire resistance assembly rating indicated. I 1.07 FIELD SAMPLES A. Provide field samples under Section 01300. B. Fiberboard Wainscot in module per details and with field- applied finishes completed. C. Locate where directed. 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. B. Deliver samples to painting sub - contractor for finishing of field samples prior submittal to Architect. 1. Submit two samples of each type of hardwood material of adequate size to show wood grain. Minimum 18 inches long. - - . - 2... Submit two samples of fiberboard wainscot minimum 24- inches square. 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Store materials in ventilated, interior locations under constant minimum temperatures of 60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 55 percent. PART 2 PRODUCTS - 2.01 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Hardwood Lumber: PS 20; custom grade in accordance with AWI; Select Golden Oak; mixed grain. 2.02 SHEET MATERIALS A. Medium Density Fiberboard (MDF): Per AWI custom, premium grade board; sanded faces, 42 pound density per cubic foot with moisture content of 6.5 percent or less, 9/16 inch thick. Type • IND -L -2, Raw. At exit corridors provide fire treated particle board meeting requirements of Class II fire rating. 2.03 ADHESIVE A. Contact Adhesives: FS MMM -A -130 as recommended by manufacturer for type of application. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06200 -2 1 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 06200 FINISH CARPENTRY 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Nails: Size and type to suit application, plain finish. B. . Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Blind Fasteners, Lags, and Screws: Size and type to suit application; plain finish. ' C. Lumber for Shimming and Blocking: Softwood lumber of Douglas fir species. • D. Primer: Alkyd primer sealer type. • E. Wood Filler: Solvent oil base, tinted to match surface fmish color. F. Joint Sealants: As specified under Section 07900 — Joint Sealants. 2.05 LUMBER SELECTION A. Selection of lumber pieces: 1. Carefully select all members. Select individual pieces so that obvious defects are not on exposed surfaces and will not interfere with proper nailing or making connections. 2. Lumber may be rejected by the Architect, whether or not is has been installed, for excessive warp, twist, bow, crook, mildew, fungus, or mold, as well as for improper • _ - _ _ cutting and fitting.. _ . _ • — - - _ .3. Finger jointing of trim will not be acceptable and rejected by the Architect. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION • A. Insure proper backing is in place to accept the work. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Before installation, prime paint surfaces with paint on items or assemblies to be in contact with cementitious materials. B. Medium- density Fiberboard: ease all edges; route reveal pattern into material as shown on drawings. 3.03 INSTALLATION ' A. Install work in accordance with AWI Custom quality standard. B. Set and secure materials . and components in place, plumb and level. 1 C. Install trim with finish nails, blind nail when possible. D. Place sealant at the intersection of dissimilar materials. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL = TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 . TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06200 -3 Printed 7/26/2004 . SECTION 06200 - FINISH CARPENTRY r E. Attach wainscot panels with approved adhesive, unless specified or detailed otherwise. Do not face nail appearance grade materials. 3.04 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation from True Position: 1/1.6 inch. • B. Maximum Offset from True Alignment with Abutting Materials: 1/32 inch. I END OF SECTION • • r I '1 • I I r ,r I 02054 . TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06200 -4 1 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK r PART 1' GENERAL • 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Specially fabricated plastic laminate fmished cabinet units. B. Prepare for utilities. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry. B. Section 07900 — Joint Sealants: Sealants used in conjunction with dissimilar materials. C. Section 15440 - Plumbing Fixtures and Trim. 1.04 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS I A. . Section 05500 — Metal Fabrications: Supply-of countertop support brackets. -_ 1.05 REFERENCES • A. FS MMM -A -130 - Adhesive, Contact. B.. NEMA LD3 - High Pressure Decorative Laminates. C. PS 20 - American Softwood Lumber Standard. D. PS 58 - Basic Hardboard. E. AWI - Section 400 Custom Grade. F. , WIC - Woodwork Institute of California. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Conform to AWI "Custom" grade and WIC "Manual of Millwork" for all work unless specified otherwise herein. B. Subcontractor Qualification: Subcontractor shall have been producing work, to quality specified herein, for 5 years minimum and have proper equipment to produce work in accordance with AWI standards. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 01300. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JUNE 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410-1 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 06410 i CUSTOM CASEWORK I B. Include materials, component profiles, fastening methods, assembly methods, joint details and • accessory listings. • C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. • D. • _Exposed Hardware: Submit one sample of each type and finish. I E. Re- submit all shop drawings after field dimensions have been verified. Indicated on shop drawings dimensions which have been verified in the field. • I 1.08 MOCKUP A. Provide full size base cabinet and upper cabinet in specified finish with hardware installed. I ' B. Units will be examined to ascertain quality and conformity to standards. • C. Units will establish a minimum standard of quality for this work. 1 • D. Approved units may be used as part of the Work. ' 1 1.09 FIELD MEASUREMENTS A. Verify all measurements on shop drawings in the field. Update shop drawings and re- submit to I • Architect. Indicate- verified dimensions on shop drawings. PART 2 PRODUCTS . 1111 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. The following manufacturers are approved subject to conformance with specifications: 1. Kriegsco Manufacturing — (503) 981 -9083. • 2. Westmark Products, Inc. — (253) 531 -3470. 3. Lemon's Millwork — (541) 926 -1463 4. ISEC Cabinets - (425) 489 -1441 • 5. Advance Cabinet Designs, Inc. — (541) 465 -3394. 6. Legend Custom Woodworking, Inc. - (503) 669 -1000. 7. Burt-Sher, Inc. — (503) 681-8446 • 8. Pacific Cabinets, Inc. — (208) 962 -5546 9. Ashland Glass and Millwork — (541) 664 -5557. 10. Specialty Enterprises — (503) 835 -6048. 11. Ritter Cabinet, Manufacturing, Inc. — (360) 352 -3636. - 12. TMI Systems Design Corporation (800) 456 -6716. 1 • B. Substitutions under provisions of Section 01600. Substitution requests shall be accompanied by a mock -up of a typical cabinet produced by the manufacturer showing quality of workmanship • normally produced by it. Mock -up shall include a door and drawer combination with related hardware, counter top, and base meeting quality of cabinets specified herein. • II 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JUNE 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -2 ' Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK 2.02 LUMBER MATERIALS A. Hardwood Lumber: Custom grade in accordance with AWI; Clear, Select White Maple. Moisture content between 6 to 8 percent for stained finish. 2.03 SHEET MATERIALS A. Wood Particleboard: Per AWI standard, Premium Grade board of balanced construction; sanded faces, 45 lb. density per cubic foot with moisture content of 8% or less. B. Hardwood Plywood (for exposed shelving): Seven ply premium grade plywood, exterior, Maple veneer. C. Polyester Laminated Plywood: Medium density overlay plywood, 1/2" thickness unless noted wi D. S se. Plywood: PS 1; APA Veneer grade A -D; exterior, 3/4 inch thickness. 2.04 ACCEPTABLE LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS A. Formica. B. Wilsonart. C. Nevamar. D. Pionite: E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.05 ACCEPTABLE CHEMICAL RESISTANT PLASTIC LAMINATE MANUFACTURERS 1 A. WilsonArt - International — "Chem -surf' B. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.06 LAMINATE MATERIALS A. Exposed portions of casework include all surfaces visible when doors and drawers are closed, and the exposed interior surfaces of open cases including top and bottom of shelves. B. Semi- exposed portions of casework include those members behind opaque doors, such as shelves, division, interior faces of ends, case back, drawer sides, backs and bottoms, and the back face of doors. C. Concealed portions of casework include sleepers, web frames, dust panels, and other surfaces not usually visible after installation. D. Exposed Surfaces: Plastic Laminate, NEMA Standard No. LD 1 -64 Type 1 General Purpose Grade, thickness .050 inch for countertops, shelving, back and side splashes, provide metal laminate at reveals indicated on drawings. Furnish Type 2 Vertical Grade 0.030 inch thickness, for 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JUNE 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -3 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK • exposed face frames and ends and exposed faces of hinged doors and drawers for all casework; solid color and pattern as selected by Architect. E. Semi- Exposed Surfaces: Thermostat polyester or melamine resin - impregnated web, pressure bonded and thermally fused to substrate; meeting the American Laminators Association (ALA) performance standards for thermoset decorative panels - ALA 1988. Color as selected by Architect from manufacturer's stock colors for all interior surfaces including shelves, backs, sides, ends, bottoms, drawer sides and drawer bottoms. • F. Concealed Surfaces: Laminate backing sheet, LD -3 BK20 Backing grade, undecorated plastic laminate. • 2.07 ACCESSORIES A. Adhesive: FS MMM -A -130. Type recommended by laminate manufacturer to suit application. B. PVC Edge Facing: 3mm thick, impact resistant PVC, machine applied with hot -melt adhesive, machine trimmed with corners rounded, color as selected by Architect. Acceptable manufacturer Woodtape — 800 - 426 -6362. C. PVC Edge Banding: Solid band, 0.020 mm thickness, smooth finish, of width to match sheet thickness, pressure and heat melt adhesive applied, color to match plastic laminate. • D. Fasteners: Size and type to suit application. _ 111 . . E. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins, and Screws: Of size and type to suit application; black fmish in . exposed locations. F. Cabinet Sink Supports: All metal supports, similar to Hamilton Industries' Model "52L752" or approved; size as required. 2.10 HARDWARE A. Provide manufacturer's standard, BI3MA 626 finish over solid brass construction, unless otherwise specified. B. Five- Knuckle Hinges: Manufacturer's standard minimum 21/4 inch high by 0.095 inch thick steel 111 fixed pin pivot hinge, powder coated in standard color. Rockford Process RPC 454 with hospital tips. C. Magnetic Catches: Aluminum, 592 by Epco. D. Drawer Front Adjusters: Blum #295.100. V 1 E. Pulls: Ives #38 solid brass 4" wire pulls with dull chrome 626 (26D) finish, mounted with 2 screws fastened from back. F. Adjustable Shelf Supports at Semi- exposed shelving: Blum #3 shelf support for line bored application. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE. - MUSIC JUNE 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -4 1 Printed 07/26/04 • • SECTION 06410 ' CUSTOM CASEWORK • G. Adjustable Shelf Supports at exposed shelving: Knape & Vogt 256NP shelf support with 255 standard. H. Coat Hooks: Ives wardrobe hook #572 for wall mount or #580 for under shelf mounting. Dull chrome fmish. I. Locks: Olympus Lock 100DR and 200DW masterkeyed as directed by Architect. J. Elbow Catches: Steel, cadmium plated. Use on left -hand door of double door cases where locks are indicated. Ives No. 2. K. Drawer Slides: 1. Standard Drawer Slides: Steel ball bearings, full extension, progressive action, nylon rollers with recommended load rating of 100 lbs. minimum per pair. 2. File Drawer Slides: Steel ball bearings full extension, progressive action with load capacity of 150 pounds minimum per par. 3. Manufacturers: Accuride, Grass,'Blum L. Clothes Rods: Knape & Vogt KV -2 18" - 30" extension closet rod. Bright nickel plated. Provide shelf mid support for spans over 4 feet, 1195 by Knape & Vogt. M. . Cable Gromets: 1. Large Wire Access Grommets: a) _ ABS plastic, two piece assembly, 3 inch diameter hole, color as selected by Architect, XG Series by Doug Mochett and Company. - b) Quantity: As shown on drawings. N. Paper Slot Cover for Computer Desks: Plastiglide Co., 5/8" x 17 1 /7" paper slot cover, made of I high- impact ABS Plastic. O. Castors for mobile casework: Jarvis and Jarvis, 5 inch diameter, 200 pound capacity #5- 305 -452 swivel caster or 5- 345 -452 rigid caster as shown on drawings. P. Articulated Keyboard Arm: 1. 25 inch wide adjustable articulated tray with non -skid pads and integrated dual mousing surface on either side of platform; full length gel wrist rest; tilting and swivel tray option. 2. Quantity: As shown on drawings. Q. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.11 FABRICATION A. Conform to AWI Section 400, Custom Grade with plastic laminate faces. B. Cabinet Bodies: 1. Fabricate wood casework to dimensions, profiles, and details shown. Provide reveal overlay construction. 2. Assemble units in shop in as large components as possible to minimize field cutting and jointing. Allow for easy handling and passage through building openings. Mortise and tenon, glue and screw joints for maximum strength using precision jigs and clamps to insure square corners and plumb vertical surfaces. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE MUSIC JUNE 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -5 Printed 07/26/04 • • SECTION 06410 1 CUSTOM CASEWORK 3. Construct cabinets without integral base. Provide, separate structural base as specified below. 4. Edge band exposed edges of plywood and particleboard panels, shelving, and door fronts. 5: Provide minimum ''/ inch thick cabinet back. • C. Drawers: 1. Fronts: One piece 3/4" thick, particleboard or plywood with 3mm PVC edge facing on all four sides. 2. Sides and front: 1/2" thick polyester laminated plywood with "Lock Shoulder" joint and glued to drawer front. Edge band top edges. 3. Back: 1/2" thick polyester laminated plywood let into sides. Edge band top edge. 4. Bottoms: 1/4" thick tempered hardboard set into 1/4" deep grooves at front, back and both sides. 5. Drawer reinforcement: Reinforce drawer bottoms in excess of 400 sq. in. in area with 1" • x 3" wood strip running front to back centered on drawer. 6. Fabricate drawers full depth of cabinet. I 7. Mount drawers on metal drawer guides. 8. Drawer depth to be a maximum total of 1 1/2 inches less than drawer front. D. Semi- Exposed Shelving: 1. 3/4" thick less than 32 inches wide; 1" thick 32 inches wide or wider. Edge band shelving. Set fixed shelving into 1/4" deep grooves in end panels and divider partitions. 2. Provide "Line bored" multi hole shelf support holes. 3.- Allow 1/16" clearance at each end of loose shelving (1/8" overall) for ease of moving _ _ . . • -shelves: _ - - 4. Wrap front and top of music storage cabinets with carpet as indicated on Drawings. 5. At acrylic shelving ease edges and polish ends and exposed edges. Bend plastic as shown on drawings. - E. Cabinet Doors: 3/4" thick particleboard with 3mm PVC edge facing on all edges. 1 F. Base Construction: Construct cabinet bases of /4" marine grade plywood, glued and screwed, provide reinforcing blocks as required for maximum strength. Recess base for toe space as I indicated. Set base on floor where casework is to be installed, level top surface and scribe bottom surface to floor line leaving a height of 4" between floor and bottom of new casework supported thereon. I G. Countertops: Plywood or particleboard top over wood framing. Particleboard is not allowed in sink cabinets. Cover with plastic laminate including front edge. Provide butt joints between top and backsplash. Provide flush hairline joints at all locations. Scribe countertops or backsplashes to abutting wall surface for hairline joint. H. Filler Panels: Provide 3/4" filler panels covered with matching plastic laminate to fill in all voids between cabinets and walls. - • I. Backsplash/Chase Panels - Provide 3/4 inch Backsplash/Chase Panels covered with matching plastic laminate to enclose chase between upper wall cabinets and base cabinet. Panel to extend to the entire length of base cabinet and will return to all exposed ends. Coordinate with plumbing and electrical installation of pipes, drains, electrical outlets etc. J. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of plastic laminate finished surfaces. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JUNE 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -6 Printed 07/26/04 • SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK K. Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent with manufactured sizes. Make corners and joints hairline. Locate counter butt joints minimum 2 feet from sink cut -outs. • L. Closet Shelving: Fixed or adjustable shelving as indicated on drawings.. Finish exposed and semi- . • exposed surfaces with Low Pressure laminate; finish bottom, vertical and top edges with 3mm ' PVC edge facing. Install mid - support bracket for shelves over 48 inches long M. Exposed Shelving: 1 inch thick adjustable shelving as indicated on drawings. Finish exposed vertical edges with 3mm PVC edge facing. At shelving for surface mounted wall standards and brackets provide a maximum shelf length of 64 inches or in sizes as indicated on drawings IN Cable Trays: 4 inch wide by 3 inch high with fixed, finished ends mounted to metal support . . brackets. Fabricate from 3 /4 inch particleboard.with plastic laminate finish. . PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify adequacy of backing and support framing. 3.02 APPLICATION I A ` Finish for Exposed Hardwood: - - - = 1." Apply finish materials in accordance with the recommendations of the "Painting and • Decorating Contractors of America Manual" (PDCA). PI 2. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Apply each coat to uniform finish. 4. Sand, as required, between coats to achieve required finish. 3.03 INSTALLATION OF CASEWORK A. Prior to installation of casework locks turn all casework locks over to supplier of materials for Section 08700 — Door Hardware for installation of cylinders in casework locks. Cylinders to be installed in locks under the work defined by Section 08700 — Door Hardware. After installation of cylinders, casework locks are to be installed in casework as a part of the work of this Section. B. Install plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions. Shim as required, using concealed shims. Install to a tolerance of 1/8" in 8' -0" for plumb and level with 1/32" maximum offsets in flush adjoining surfaces, and 1/16" maximum offsets in revealed adjoining surfaces. Where casework abuts other finished work, scribe and cut for accurate fit. Before making cutouts, drill pilot holes at corners. • C. Adjust . casework and hardware so that doors and drawers operate smoothly without warp or binding. Lubricate operating hardware as recommended by manufacturer. l D. Provide cutouts for plumbing fixtures, inserts, appliances, outlet boxes, and other fixtures and fittings. Verify locations of cutouts from on -site dimensions. Seal contact surfaces of cut edges. .� 3.04 INSTALLATION OF COUNTERTOPS A. Abut top and edge surfaces in one true plane, with internal supports placed to prevent deflection. Provide flush hairline joints in top units using clamping devices. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC • 111 JUNE 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -7 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 06410 CUSTOM CASEWORK • B. Provide holes and cutouts as required for mechanical and electrical service. • C. Mechanically fasten backsplash to countertops set in sealant. - D. Cap exposed plastic laminate counter edges with material of same finish and pattern. I E. Scribe backsplash with walls as recommended. by WIC. Caulk where backsplash abuts different surface refer to Section 07900 - Joint Sealants. F. After installation, carefully dress joints smooth, remove any surface scratches, clean and polish entire surface. • G. Fasten countertop support brackets at locations shown on drawings, or at 48 inches on center maximum under unsupported countertops. In corner applications provide two at each unsupported . corner, one support bracket perpendicular to each wall surface. I 3.05 ANCHORAGE A. Secure cabinets, shelving, and countertops to grounds, furring and solid blocking with counter sunk fasteners and blind nailing. Anchor wall mounted cabinets with concealed continuous cleats screwed to solid framing or blocking. 3.06 CLEANING AND PROTECTION _ A. Repair or remove and replace defective Work as directed upon completion of installation. • B. Clean casework shelving, counters, hardware fittings and fixtures. C. Provide the protection of materials and installed casework from damage until acceptance of the I Work by the Architect. D. Cover casework with 4 mil polyethylene film, for protection against soiling and deterioration during construction work. • E. Do not permit use of casework for storage of construction equipment or as scaffolding surface for • construction operations. END OF SECTION • • • I r I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JUNE 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 06410 -8 , Printed 07/26/04 - • SECTION 07213 BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES • A. Sound batt insulation for selectedinterior walls. 1.03 REFERENCES 1 A. FS HH -I -521 - Insulation Blankets, Thermal (Mineral Fiber, for Ambient Temperatures). I B. FS HH -I -1252 - Insulation Thermal, Reflective (Aluminum Foil). C. FS HH- I -1030A - Insulation Loose (glass or mineral). D. ASTM C553 — Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation (Industrial Type). • E. ASTM C612 — Mineral Fiber Block and Board Insulation. 1.04 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Materials of this Section shall provide sound attenuation at interior elements: - • 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data and manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Owens - Corning Fiberglass. • . B. Manville. • C. Certainteed 1 D. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Glass or Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation: 1. Concealed Applications: a. FS HH -I -521; preformed glass or mineral fiber batt; Type I - without membrane ' for sound insulation and insulation under acoustical ceilings. I • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07213-1 Printed 7/26/04 • SECTION 07213 BATT AND BLANKET INSULATION 2.03 INSULATION VALUES A. Sound and Acoustic Batts: Batts to completely fill wall cavity - see wall types on drawings. I 2.04 ACCESSORIES A. Tape: Bright aluminum, self adhering type mesh reinforced 2 inches wide. . • I B. Nails, Staples and Steel Wire: Electroplated; type and size to suit application. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 'PREPARATION , A. Verify adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive installation. B. Verify mechanical and electrical services within walls have been installed and tested. 3.02 INSTALLATION I A. Install sound batt insulation with tight fit between studs in locations as noted on Drawings - see wall types for insulation thickness. Sound batts must completely fill wall cavity. Secure batts • above finished wall spaces and attic areas, where no gypsum board is specified, with steel wire run - - horizontally at a maximum spacing of 24 inches on center. Staple wire in place -at each stud. : END OF SECTION I . I t I 1 1 I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC . . JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07213 -2 ' Printed 7/26/04 SECTION 07270 i FIRESTOPPING PART 1 GENERAL I • 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I. A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 • SECTION INCLUDES I A. Applications of firestop systems include: . 1. Penetrations for passage of duct, cable, cable tray, conduit, piping electrical busways and I raceways through fire rated vertical barriers (walls and partitions), horizontal beams (floor /ceiling assemblies) and vertical service shaft walls and partitions. 2. . Gaps between tops of walls and ceiling or roof assemblies. 3. Openings and penetrations in fire rated partitions or walls containing fire doors. • 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS • I I. A. Divisions 5 and 9: Firestopping of penetrations. B. Division 15: Mechanical. . C. Division 16: Electrical. 1.04 REFERENCES A. . . American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): 1. ASTM E 84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 2. ASTM E 119 - Method for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 1 3. ASTM E 814 - Test Method of Fire Tests of Through - Penetration Firestops. B. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) Building Materials Directory: I 1. UL 1479 Fire Tests of Through- Penetrations Firestops. 2. UL 2079 Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint systems. 3. UL Fire Resistance Directory: a. Fills, Voids or Cavity Materials (XHHW) b. Firestop Devices (XHJI) C. Basic/National Building Code. . I D. Uniform Building Code, with current Oregon Amendments. • I E. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) NFPA 101 Life Safety Code. 2. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code. 1 1.05 . SYSTEM DESCRIPTION • A. Performance Requirements: Provide firestop systems which have been manufactured and installed I to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure. I . 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -1 Printed 7/26/04 ' SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING 1.06 SUBMITTALS A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 1300. B. Product Data: 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section. 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements. • 3. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles and product components. Include UL Systems or other independent laboratory system classification number on shop drawings. 4. Certification from sealant manufacturers that their products are suitable for the use indicated and comply with specification requirements. C. Installation Instructions: Submit manufacturer's standard details, surface preparation, and installation instructions for firestopping assemblies. , D. Submit written documention of qualifications listed below. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Applicator Qualifications: 1. Applicator shall have 3 years experience in the application of firestopping materials in I similar projects.. _ _ - __ - 2. Submit written documentation of applicator's qualifications, including reference projects of similar scope and complexity, with current phone contacts of architects and owners for verification. 3. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation. B. Single source responsibility for firestopping materials: 1. Obtain firestop materials from single manufacturer for each different product required. 2. Manufacturer shall instruct applicator in procedures for each material. I C. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Firestop System installation must meet requirements fo ASTM E -814, UL 1479 or UL 2079 tested assemblies that provide a fire rating equal to that of construction being penetrated. 2. Proposed firestop materials and methods shall conform to applicable governing codes having local jurisdiction. 3. For those firestop applications that exist for which no UL tested system is available through any manufacturer, a manufacturer's engineering judgement derived from similar independently tested system designs will be submitted to local authorities having jurisdiction for their review and approval prior to installation. Manufacturer's engineer judgement drawings must follow requirements set forth by the International Firestop Council. • 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -2 Printed 7/26/04 1 SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING • I • 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I A. Packing and Shipping: 1. Deliver firestopping materials in original unopened packages bearing the name of the manufacturer. 2. Deliver firestopping materials with Underwriters Laboratories; Inc. Labels for fire hazard and fire resistance classifications and with legible application instructions. ' B. Storage and Protection: . 1. Keep firestopping materials dry. 2. Keep material off the ground, under cover, and away from damp surfaces. I C. Before handling, read product data sheets and material safety sheets. Do not use damaged or expired materials. I • 1.09 WARRANTY • A. Deliver to the Architect signed copies of the following written warranties against material failure: 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering fu materials. 2. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship. PART 2 PRODUCTS - 2.01 - MANUFACTURERS -- - - - = ' - A. Tremco, Inc. (Basis for specification) B. Bio Fireshield. C. RectorSeal Metacaulk. I D. Nelson Firestop. • E. Firestop Systems, Inc. F. Substitute Manufacturers: 1. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date. • 2. Comply with requirements in Section 01600. 1 2.02 COMPONENTS A. High Performance Intumescent Acrylic Sealant: 1. One part, graphite- based. 2. Water- based, paintable 3. Testing: ASTM E814 and UL 1479. I 4. Product: TREMstop IA • B. Flexible Acrylic Sealant: I 1. 2. Single component. Gunnable or sprayable to suit application. 3. Water- based, paintable. 4.. Movement Capability: +/- 33 percent. I I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -3 Printed 7/26/04 SECTION 07270 1 FIRESTOPPING • I 5. Fire rating: Up to 3 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E84, ASTM E814, UL 1479, UL 2079. 6. Product: TREMstop Acrylic or TREMstop - SP. C. Fire Resistant Silicone Sealant: 1. Single component. 2. Gunnable or Self- Leveling to suit application. 3. . Neutral cure process. 4. Movement Capability: +/- 50 percent. 111 5. Fire rating: Up to 4 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E84, ASTM E814, ASTM E119, . UL 1479. 6. Product: Fyre -Sil. Or Fyre -Sil S/L. I D. Flexible Intumescent Wrap Strips: 1. Graphite -based intumescent. . 2. Flexible fiberglass webbing laminate. I 3. Expansion rate: 12:1. 4. Testing: ASTM E814, UL 1479. 5. Product: TREMstop WS E. Pre - manufactured Intumescent Firestop Collar: 1. Graphite -based intumescent. 2. Sized for pipes 1 '/2 to 12 inch diameter. 3. Tested for PVC, ABS,.FRPP and CPVC piping systems. _ , - - - - 4. - Fire rating: Up to 3 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479. - -- 5. . Product: TREMstop D. • . ii F. Pre - manufactured Cast -in -place Intumescent Device: 1. Prefabricated device using Flexible intumescent Wrap Strips, includes cold smoke seal • neoprene gasket. I 2. Sized for pipes 1 '/2 to 12 inch diameter. • 3. Standard heights: 4, 6 and 8 inch. 4. Tested for PVC, ABS and CPVC piping systems. I 5. Fire rating: Up to 3 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479. 6. Product: Fyre -Can. G. Pre - manufactured Intumescent Device for walls: 1.. Prefabricated device using Flexible intumescent Wrap Strips. 2. Sized for pipes 1 V. to 12 inch diameter. 3. Standard lengths: 8 and 12 inch. 4. Tested for PVC, ABS and CPVC piping systems. . 5. Fire rating: Up to 2 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479. 6. Product: Fyre -Can Sleeve. • H. Durable Intumescent Firestop Pillows: I 1. Moisture resistant fiberglass bag with intumescent material. 2. Fire rating: Up to 2 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479. 3. Product: TREMstop PS. I. Trowelable Firestop Mortar: 1. Hydraulic, fire resistant cementitious compound. 2. Asbestos Free 3. Fire rating: Up to 3 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479. 4. Product: TREMstop M I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -4 Printed 7/26/04 1 SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING 1 J. Fire Resistant Ceramic -Based Sealant: I 1. Single component, non -sag, ceramic based sealant. 2. Testing: ASTM E84, ASTM E814, UL 1479. 3. Product: Fyre - Shield. I K. Flexible Metal Restricting Collar for Wrap Strips: 1. Prefabricated device using Flexible intumescent Wrap Strips. 2. Sized for pipes 1 V2 to 12 inch diameter. . 3. Tested for PVC, ABS, FRPP and CPVC piping systems. 4. Fire rating: Up to 3 hour "F" rating, tested to ASTM E814, UL 1479. 5. Testing: ASTM E814, UL 1479. I 6. Product: TREMstop MCR. L. Multi- Component Polyurethane Sealant: 1. Non sag, multi- component, polyurethane sealant. I 2. Movement Capability: +/- 50 percent. 3. . Product: Dymeric 511 or Vulkem 922. I M. . Ceramic Fiber Insulation: 1. Pure ceramic fibers. 2. . Contains no binder or organic materials. Contains no corrosion- promoting agents. 3. Resists fungus and mildew. it 4. Density: 6 to 8 pounds per cubic foot. IN - 5... Melting Point: 3,200 degrees Fahrenheit. - - - _, _ _ -. _ _ 6. Product: Cerablanket F.S. . - - p . 2.03 ACCESSORIES 1 A. Provide other materials, not specifically described, but required, for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the sealant manufacturer as compatible. 2:04 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL • I A. Obtain firestop system products from a single manufacturer. B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Upon Owner's request, provide manufacturer's field services II consisting of product use recommendations and periodic site visits for inspection product - installation in accordance with manfuacturer's instructions. I C. Testing: Comply with requirements of UL Fire Resistance Directory: Fill, Void or Cavity Materials (XHHW) and Firestop Devices (XHJI) 1 . PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION I A. Site Verification of Conditions: 1. Verify substrate conditions, which have been previously installed under other sections, I 2. are acceptable for product installation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Examine areas and conditions under which work is to be performed and identify conditions detrimental to proper and timely completion. 3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 1 I 02054 JULY 04 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -5 Printed 7/26/04 • SECTION 07270 FIRESTOPPING i 3.02 PREPARATION A. Surface Preparation: Prepare surface to receive firestop system products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions for surface preparation. 1. Verify that penetrations and joints are properly sized. 2. Comply with manufacturer's instructions relative . to temperature and humidity conditions, before, during and after installation of firestopping materials. 3.03 INSTALLATION A. Regulatory Requirements: Install firestop materials in accordance with published "Through- Penetration Firestop Systems" in Underwriter Laboratorie's Fire Resistance Directory or the publication of another approved independent laboratory. 1 B. Manufacturer's Instructions: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installation of firestopping materials. 1. Seal all holes or voids made by penetrations to ensure an air and water resistant seal. 2. Seal all joints to ensure an air and water resistant seal, capable to withstand compression and extension due to thermal, wind or seismic joint movement. 3. Consult with mechanical engineer, project manager prior to installation of UL firestop systems that might hamper the performance of fire dampers as it pertains lo duct work. 3.04 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. • .- Examine sealed penetration and joint areas to ensure proper installation before concealing or enclosing areas. B. Keep areas of work accessible until inspection by applicable code authorities. C. Perform under this section patching and repairing of firestopping caused by cutting or penetrating of existing firestop system already installed by other trades. 3.05 COMPLETION A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Examine penetration firestopping assemblies. 2. Add additional firestopping materials where required for tight seal. B. Cleaning: 1. Remove excess firestopping insulation materials. 2. Remove excess firestopping mortar and caulk from exposed surfaces. END OF SECTION • i 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC • JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07270 -6 Printed 7 /26/04 I SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS I PART 1 GENERAL 1:01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES I A. Preparing sealant substrate surfaces. B. Sealant and backing. • 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Sealant used at junction of different materials. • B. Section 06410 -. Custom Casework: Sealants used in conjunction with countertops. C. Section 07270 - Firestopping: Sealants used in conjunction with firestopping. D. Section 08110 - .Steel Doors & Frames: Sealants used in conjunction with door frames - - _ - .. - E. . Section 08800. - Glazing: Sealants used in conjunction with glazing methods. - - - . - • F. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Sealants used in conjunction with dissimilar materials and preparation for painting. 1 G. Division 15 - Mechanical: Sealants used in conjunction with louvers and duct penetration. 1.04 SUBMITTALS • I A. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01300. • B. Product data: ' 1. Materials list of items proposed to be provided under this Section; 2. Manufacturer's specifications and other data needed to prove compliance with the specified requirements; 3. Shop Drawings or catalog illustrations in sufficient detail to show installation and interface of the work of this Section with the work of adjacent trades; 4. Manufacturer's current recommended installation procedures which, when approved by the Architect, will become the basis for accepting or rejecting actual installation procedures used on the Work. 5. Written documentation of applicator's qualifications, including reference projects of similar scope and complexity, with current phone contacts of architects and owners for I. 6. verification. Certification from sealant manufacturers that their products are suitable for the use indicated and comply with specification requirements. 7. Report from sealant applicator summarizing results of preconstruction field adhesion testing. . I . I 02054 JULY 04 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07900 -1 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 07900 ' JOINT SEALANTS 1 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Use adequate numbers of skilled workmen thoroughly trained and experienced in the necessary ' crafts and completely familiar with the specified requirements and methods needed for proper performance of the work of this Section. B. Applicator qualifications: 1. Applicator shall have at least three years experience in installing materials of types specified and shall have successfully completed at least three projects of similar scope 111 and complexity. 2. Applicator shall designate a single individual as project foreman who shall be on site at all times during installation. C. Perform work in accord with ASTM C -.1193 guidelines except where more stringent requirements are indicated or specified. D. Preconstruction compatibility and adhesion testing: 1. Submit to joint sealant manufacturer samples of actual materials that will contact or affect their joint sealants in the Work for compatibility and adhesion testing. • 2. This testing will not be required where sealant manufacturer is able to furnish data acceptable to Architect based on previous testing for adhesion and compatibility to materials matching those of the Work. E. Preconstruction field adhesion testing: _ _ _ 1. - Injobsite field samples prior_ to general installation, conduct field -tests for of - joint sealants to actual joint substrates using proposed joint preparation methods recommended by manufacturer. 2. Conduct tests for each type of sealant and substrate. 3. Locate field -test joints where inconspicuous or as approved by Architect. 4. Include areas typical of those requiring removal of existing sealants and utilize methods I proposed for sealant removal that have been pre- approved by Architect. 5. Test method: Use manufacturer's standard field adhesion test methods and methods proposed for joint preparation to verify proper priming and joint preparation techniques required to obtain optimum adhesion of joint sealants to joint substrate. 6. Evaluate and report results of field adhesion testing. 7. Do not use joint preparation methods or sealants that produce less than satisfactory adhesion to joint substrates during testing. 8. Standard of acceptance: Joints installed during preconstruction field adhesion testing that are accepted by Architect shall be retained as standard of acceptability and incorporated into Work of that area during general installation. ' 9. At least one such standard of minimum 5 feet in length shall be established for each type of sealant and substrate. • F. Schedule applications of waterproofmg,.water repellents and preservative finishes after sealant I installation unless sealant manufacturer approves otherwise in writing. Ensure that installed sealant is allowed to cure sufficiently prior to subsequent applications. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver the materials to the job site in the manufacturer's unopened containers with all labels intact and legible at time of use. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOLDISTRICT 23J 07900 -2 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 07900 - JOINT SEALANTS • I B. Store materials in accord with manufacturer's recommendations with proper precautions to ensure I fitness of material when installed. C. Comply with pertinent provisions of Section 01600. I 1.07 SUBSTRATE CONDITIONS • . A. General: . I 1. 2. Provide joints properly dimensioned to receive the approved sealant system. Provide joint surfaces that are clean, dry, sound and free of voids, deformations, protrusions and contaminants which may inhibit application or performance of the joint • sealant. , Il 3. Where expansion joints having preformed joint fillers are scheduled to be sealed, provide a reservoir to accept the sealant such as by a molded breakaway joint cap or a removable • block out. , I 1.08 WARRANTY A. Deliver to the Architect signed copies of the following written warranties against adhesive and cohesive failure of the sealant and against infiltration of water and air through the sealed joint for a • period of 3 years from date of completion. 1. Manufacturer's standard warranty covering sealant materials; I 2. Applicator's standard warranty covering workmanship. p• PART 2 PRODUCTS • . 2.01 GENERAL, A. Acceptable manufacturer: • 1. TremcoNulkem by Mameco International, Inc., Cleveland, OH 1- 800 - 321 - 6412. 2. Sika I 3. Precora B. Provide all sealants from one manufacturer to insure compatibility. I C. Compatibility: 1. Provide joint sealants, joint fillers and accessory joint materials that are compatible with • one another and with joint substrates under project conditions. I _ 2. Install joint sealants, joint fillers and related joint materials that are nonstaining to visible joint surfaces and surrounding substrate surfaces. D. Provide colors selected by Architect from manufacturer's standard color range. 2.02 ELASTOMERIC SEALANTS. A. Sealant Type A: 1. For interior joints in vertical surfaces and non - traffic horizontal surfaces such as, but not limited to: a. Control and expansion joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior walls. b. Perimeter joints on exposed interior surfaces of exterior openings. . c. Perimeter joints between interior wall surfaces and frames of interior doors, windows, storefronts, louvers, elevator entrances and similar openings. I I o2os4 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07900 -3 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS 1 d. Trim or finish joints subject to movement. • e. Between laps in fabrications of sheet metal. f. Other joints as indicated. • 2. i Provide single- component or multi- component, non -sag polyurethane sealant having plus- or -minus 25 percent joint movement capability that is suitable for continuous immersion in water; comply with ASTM C920, Type S or M, Grade NS, Class 25. 1 B. Sealant Type B: 1. For exterior and interior joints in vertical surfaces and non - traffic horizontal surfaces requiring a virtually odor free sealant. 2. Provide single- component, no vapor, low - modulus, 100 percent solids polyurethane sealant that is suitable for continuous immersion in water; comply with ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, Class 25. 3. Provide sealant comperable to Vulkem 921; Mameco International, Inc. C. Sealant Type C: 1. For applications around interior doors and windows, casework and backsplashes. 2. Water Based Acrylic Latex Sealant: ASTM C834. Single component, fast setting with minimal shrinkage. D. Sealant Type D: 1. For applications in concealed spaces, such as under continuous metal track and concrete floor. 2. Acoustical Tape Sealant: Medium density Polyvinyl chloride Foam Tape Sealants: 440 i - II Tape by Tremco. • 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Joint cleaner: Cleaner as recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates indicated. • B. Joint primer: As recommended by sealant manufacturer for substrates, conditions and exposures indicated. C. Bond breaker: Polyethylene tape or other adhesive faced tape as recommended by sealant manufacturer to prevent sealant contact where it would be detrimental to sealant performance. D. Joint backer: Polyethylene, closed cell, foam rod or other compatible non - waxing, non - extruding, i non- staining resilient material in dimension 25 percent to 50 percent wider than joint width as recommended by sealant manufacturer for conditions and exposures. indicated. • E. Masking tape: Non - staining, non - absorbent tape product compatible with joint sealants and adjacent joint surfaces that is suitable for masking. 2.04 OTHER MATERIALS A. Provide other materials, not specifically described but required for a complete and proper installation, as selected by the Contractor and approved by the sealant manufacturer as compatible, subject to the approval of the Architect. 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07900 -4 Printed 07/26/04 1 • SECTION 07900 JOINT SEALANTS 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 SURFACE CONDITIONS ' A. Coordinate as required with other trades to assure proper and adequate provision in the work of those trades for interface with the work of this Section. B. Applicator shall examine the areas and conditions under which work of this Section will be I performed. 1. Verify conformance with manufacturer's requirements; 2. Report unsatisfactory conditions in writing to the Architect; . I 3. Do not proceed until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected. • 3.02 PREPARATION ' A. Prepare surfaces to receive sealants in accord with sealant manufacturer's instructions and recommendations except where more stringent requirements are indicated. I B. Thoroughly clean joint surfaces using cleaners approved by sealant manufacturer whether primers are required or not. 1.. Remove all traces of previous sealant and joint backer by mechanical methods, such as by cutting, grinding and wire brushing, in manner not damaging to surrounding surfaces. I . Remove paints from joint surfaces except for permanent, protective coatings tested and approved for sealant adhesion and compatibility by sealant manufacturer. .- -3. - Remove wax, oil, grease, dirt filiri residues, temporary protective coatings and other P . residues by wiping with cleaner recommended for that purpose. Use clean, white, lint - free cloths and change cloths frequently. 4 . Remove dust by blowing clean with oil -free, compressed air. I C. Provide joint backer material uniformly to depth required by sealant manufacturer for proper joint design using a blunt instrument. . 1. Fit securely by compressing backer material 25 percent to 50 percent so no displacement I 2. occurs during tooling. Avoid stretching or twisting joint backer. D. Provide bond - breaker where indicated or recommended by sealant manufacturer, adhering strictly to the manufacturers installation requirements. • E. Prime joint substrates where required. - I 1. Use and apply primer according to sealant manufacturers recommendations. 2. Confine primers to sealant bond surfaces; do not allow spillage or migration onto adjoining surfaces. .' F. Taping: • 1. Use masking tape where required to prevent sealant or primer contact with adjoining surfaces that would be permanently stained or otherwise damaged by such contact or the cleaning methods required for removal. 2. Apply tape so as not to shift readily and remove tape immediately after tooling without . disturbing joint seal. I I I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07900 -5 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 07900 • JOINT SEALANTS 3.03 INSTALLATION • A. Provide the approved sealant system where shown on the Drawings, and in strict accord with the manufacturer's recommendations as approved by the Architect. B. Install sealants immediately after joint preparation. C. Mix and apply multi- component sealants in accord with manufacturer's printed instructions. D. Install sealants to fill joints completely from the back, without voids or entrapped air, using proven .. techniques, proper nozzles and sufficient. force that result in sealants directly contacting and fully wetting joint surfaces. E. Install sealants to uniform cross - sectional shapes with depths relative to joint widths that allow optimum sealant movement capability as recommended by sealant manufacturer. F. Tool sealants in manner that forces sealant against back of joint, ensures firm, full contact at joint interfaces and leaves a finish that is smooth, uniform and free of ridges, wrinkles, sags, air pockets and embedded impurities. 1. Dry tooling is preferred;- tooling liquids that are non - staining, non - damaging to adjacent surfaces and approved by sealant manufacturer may be used if necessary when care is taken to ensure that the liquid does not contact joint surfaces before the sealant. 2. Provide concave tooled joints unless otherwise indicated to provide flush tooling or recessed tooling. _ _ _ _ 3. • Provide recessed tooled joints where the outer face of substrate is irregular. • G. Remove sealant from adjacent surfaces in accord with sealant and substrate manufacturer recommendations as work progresses. - • H. Seal bottoms of hollow metal frames to floor at resilient flooring. ' I. Seal edges of wainscot(s) to door jambs. J. Protect joint sealants from contact with contaminating substances and from damages. Cut out, remove and replace contaminated or damaged sealants, immediately, so that they are without contamination or damage at time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION • • • 1 i i 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 07900 -6 Printed 07/26/04 • = = — —= we NE N . = Ilr N. i =— E I. N. EN IN. SECTION 08000 DOOR AND RELITE SCHEDULE S DOOR & RELITE SCHEDULE. - TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL DOOR DR./REL. FRAME DETAILS REMARKS NO. SIZE TYPE MATERIAL FINISH GLASS TYPE MATERIAL FINISH HEAD JAMB SILL >- a . CO E E7 0 a U i' a '- O x �-'-� Q w v� Q y q z OO ¢ w F C W W w w a ¢ ¢ cG c. o w a . ., U � w' o ' 0 5, w. 0 3 0 o o op a H H 51 CD a Q-4 ¢ ,, n° a x LQ N O c - -- Ca ¢ O z Q U H H w Q U v E ¢ a . x x x � Ca c6 z z ' w rx , a ¢ v x n' n w `0-) w 3 E" 2 U ,, E w a €z ¢ w z¢ 0 0 W. W < ¢ w L1 uu.�� z n z ' p.) i w H ¢ � v, 3 x v � c9 O ¢ �U � 'EL'-� U w z :a Z �' 2 O O � , _ a. 2 � , d REFER TO SHEET A2.23 5/ 11/ 118A 3' -6" 7' -0" 1 3/4" •D X X X '1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - X 90 8 2/ 8/ 119A 3' -6" 7' -0" 1 3/4" A X X 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - .X 90 10 4/ 10/ 120A 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" D X X X 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - 9 16/ 22/ 28/ 120B X 5 X X A9.01 A9.01 A9.01 3/ 9/ 121A 3' -6" 7' -0" 1 3/4" C X X X 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - 9 1/ 7/ I21B 3' -6" 7' -0" 1 3/4" C X X X ' 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - • 7 1/ 7/ 122A 3' -0" 7' -0" 13/4" A X X "1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - 11 3/ 9/ 122B 3' -6" 7' -0" 1.3/4" D X X X , 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - X 90 12 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION 1 REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08000 -1 SECTION 08000 DOOR AND RELITE SCHEDULE DOOR & RELITE SCHEDULE - TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL DOOR DR./REL. FRAME DETAILS REMARKS NO. SIZE TYPE MATERIAL FINISH GLASS TYPE MATERIAL . FINISH HEAD JAMB SILL >- a c cn w a P w z F w Cb O I- v . Q :1 � O w 0 x U cC a - C7 . q Z'- F-' a a F. C4 p g • a ' 0 Q w v� C7 F• �y w �, Q ¢ a p H . E w � U w c� w y a O �" x �� a a . d w — o a �, ¢ °n Q o F Q F= o Q ¢" °n Q F m W W p U F Gl U w 4 H U L, t- .. W = U U H U a z Ww a rn' ¢¢ c7 w x Q d w 2 F: F- w w q Q C7 U W H Q W a ¢ z w vS w� - d ¢ c np w W , Q , w w w O 8 a E' 3 a w a d w W O U OU H w Z a Q x F n Q d U a c H U w a d d. a z �� -_ 3/ 9/ 122C 3' -0" 7' -0" 1 3/4" A X X 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - X 90 13 ' 4/ 10/ 123A 3' -6" 7' -0" 1 3/4" D X X X 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - X 20 14 4/ 10/ 124A 3' -6" 7' -0" 1 3/4" D X X X 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - X 20 14 4/ 10/ 126A 3' -6" 7' -0" 1 3/4" D X X X 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - X 20 15 4/ 10/ 126B 3' -6" 7' -0" 1 3/4" D X X X 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - X 20 15 4/ 10/ 130A 3' -6" 7' -0" 1 3/4" D X X X 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - X 20 15 4/ 10/ 130B 3' -6" 7' -0" 1 3/4" D X X X 1 X X A9.01 A9.01 - X 20 15 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08000 -2 .._.._MI .. IMO - -a- U........_.._.. OM a s . — — • a a all a r a a a a • a SECTION 08000 DOOR AND RELITE SCHEDULE NOTES, SEE REMARKS COLUMN: 1. DOOR TO SWING 110 DEGREES. 2. DOOR TO SWING 180 DEGREES. 3. KNURL OUTSIDE LEVER (KOL). 4. EXISTING ROOF ACCESS DOOR TO BE RELOCATED. GENERAL NOTES: 1. CONTRACTOR TO FIELD VERIFY ALL WALL THICKNESSES PRIOR TO FRAME INSTALLATION AND FABRICATION. 2. * INDICATES SIMILAR DETAIL. 3. ALL DOOR SWINGS ARE 90 DEGREE UNLESS OTHERWISE NOTED. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL JUL 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08000 -1 1 SECTION 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES I PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS - , A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. • 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES I A. ' Rated and non -rated steel door frames and relites. I 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and methods of installation. B. Section 08000 - Door Schedule. ' C. Section 08210 - Wood Doors. I D. Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Door hardware for swinging doors and manufacturer's templates for door fabrication. I E. Section 08800 - Glazing: Door, window and relite glass and glazing sealants. ' F. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of doors, frames and vision panels: 1.04 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: 1. Submit product information on doors and frames under provisions of Section 01300. 2. . Indicate door core, frame profile, frame corner detail, hardware preparations, and details of glazing, and door edges. 3. Indicate factory prime finish. 4. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions for "S" labeled doors: A copy shall be sent to the Architect and a copy shall be kept at the jobsite. I B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings of door and frame work under provisions of Section 01300. 2. Include door schedule which indicates door, frame, and glazed opening size, and door I 3. core materials. , Indicate profile and anchorage of glazing stops. 4. Indicate door and frame assembly fire rating and sound rating. • • 5. Indicate any conflicts between specifications, templates, door and frame fabrication. 6. Details shall be submitted for all frames, clearly showing throat size coordinated with frame profiles and project wall types. Details shall be furnished at minimum scale of 3" = 1' -0" for review. Incomplete or incorrectly drawn submittals will not be reviewed and I will be returned for resubmittal. C. Test Reports: Submit copies of manufacturer's test reports for fire rated, "S" labeled doors. i . I I 02054 JULY 04 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J • 08110 -1 Printed 07 /26/04 • • • SECTION 08110 • METAL DOORS AND FRAMES I D. Templates: Submit letter to Architect certifying that Hardware Templates, from supplier of Door Hardware — Section 08700, have been received and reviewed prior to fabrication of doors and frames. 1.05 REFERENCES A. DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, • Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. . B. ADAAG - Americans with Disabilities Act Accessibility Guidelines. C. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. D. UBC Standard 7 -2 Positive Pressure Fire Test Method. E. SDI -100 - Standard Steel Doors and Frames. • F. SDI -105 - Recommended Erection Instructions for Steel Frames. G. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. H. UL 10C - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. . _ I. - ASTM A52 — General Requirements' for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip - _ .. • _ . Process. J. ASTM A526 - General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot Dip Process, Commercial Quality. K. ASTM A642 — Steel Sheet, Zinc- Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Drawing Quality, ' Special Killed. L. ASTM E283 Air Infiltration. M. ANSI 224.1 - Modified Epoxy L06 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' • A. Conform to requirements of SDI -100. B. Fire rated door and frame construction to conform to UL 10B and UL 10C. C. Installed frame and door assembly to conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated in Schedule. I D. "S" Labeled doors: Conform to UBC Standard 7 -2. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated frames. - 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08110 -2 Printed 07/26/04 - 1 j . SECTION 08110 METAL DOORS AND FRAMES I PART 2 PRODUCTS ,' 2.01 MANUFACTURERS • ' A.. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Amweld 2. Ceco 3. , Curries I 4. Deansteel 5. Flemming 6. Republic I 7. Steelcraft 8. Stiles Hollow Metal • B. Substitute Manufacturers: I 1. Comply with requirements in Section 01600, Material and Equipment. 2.02 FRAME FABRICATION 1 • A. Fabrication of Standard Interior Door, Side Lite, and Relite Frames: 1. Industry Standard: ANSI/SDI.100. 2. Frame Metal: 16 gage steel, 14 gage at frames with door leafs 48" and over in width. 3. Frame Corners: Welded. 4. . Frame, Dimensions: 2 inch face, -5/8 inch integral. stop single rabbet with frame depth as .. shown - on drawings:; - _ . Pli . 5. Finish: - . . a. Primer: ANSI A224.1 1987, Gray epoxy ester. b. Application Rate: 2 mils, dry film thickness. 6. Fire Label: Furnish frames with fire label as indicated in door schedule and on Drawings. I . 7. Glass stops: Prepare window frame to receive glass stops on secured side of interior frames. . 2.03 HARDWARE PREPARATION . A. Hardware Preparation: 1. Prepare doors and frames to receive door hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling, and tapping. 2. Reinforce door frames with 3/16 inch by full width by 11 inch long steel plate reinforcing welded to frame at hinge pockets, removable mullion heads, and closers. I 3. Reinforce doors with 3/16 inch solid stock steel plate reinforcing welded to door at closer, lock, exit device, pull handle, holder, and stop mounting locations, extending 2 inches beyond hardware in each direction. Refer to manufacturer's template for recommended reinforcing locations. 4. Prepare non -sound rated single interior door frames to receive three silencers on strike jambs. Silencers provided by hardware supplier under Section 08700. 5. Prepare non -sound rated interior door frames for pairs of doors to receive four equally I . ,- spaced silencers on head. Silencers provided by hardware supplier under Section 08700. 6. Prepare fire rated doors and frames to meet requirements of NFPA 252, with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Warnock- Hersey International, and CABO NER Report I for fire rating indicated on Door Schedule. 7. Furnish frames with 8 jamb anchors and 2 floor anchors, weld floor anchors to frame. 8. Prepare doors to receive hardware in compliance with ANSI A 115 and ADAAG guidelines. 1 . I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08110 -3 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 08110 I METAL DOORS AND FRAMES I • 2.04 DOOR ACCESSORIES I A. Metal Vision Lites: 1. Size and Location: As indicated on Drawings. - I 2. Finish: Custom Factory Baked Finish. . 3. Standard Vision and Fire Rated lite glazing frames: Square edged, 18 gage steel frame, mitered corners. Fasteners through bolted and countersunk flat head at exterior face and tamper resistant screws at interior face. 4. Manufacturers: Metal frames: Anemostat FGS 75 or Manufacturer's standard which is equivalent to Anemostat brand specified. Fire Rated metal frames: Anemostat FGS 75 or Manufacturer's standard meeting the above criteria for interior doors, FGS -DBL at exterior doors by Anemostat. 5. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date. Comply with requirements in Section 01600, Material and Equipment. • I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION I A. Installation of Door and Relite Frames: 1. Install steel frames and anchor frames to wall'and floor in accordance with manufacturer's I - instructions. . 2. - . Apply 1/16 inch thick bituminous coating on inside of frame at all exterior door and - : . window frames. - 3. Attach jamb anchors to adjacent walls as indicated in manufacturer's standard details. ill 4. Cover hardware openings in frames to prevent cement grout from entering the hardware . recess. 5. Install frames to plus or minus 1/16 inch for squareness, alignment, twist, and plumbness. I 6. Install glazing as scheduled. 7. Seal joints of dissimilar materials with sealant as specified under Section 07900. B. Installation of Fire Rated Assemblies: I 1. Install fire rated frame assemblies in accordance with NFPA Standard No. 80. 2. Comply with fire rating requirements indicated .on door schedule. 3. Install glazing as scheduled. I 3.02 COMPLETION • A. Adjusting Defective Work: I 1. Adjust clearances and hardware placement for smooth door operation. • B. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean door, hardware, and frame surfaces prior to Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION I I • I • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08110 -4 Printed 07/26/04 I SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS I . • PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES I A. Solid core flush wood doors, rated and non - rated, shop finished. 1.03 , RELATED SECTIONS • A. Section 08000 - Door Schedule. 1 B. Section 08110— Metal Doors and Frames: Steel door frames. • C. Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Door hardware and Installation. 11 . D. Section 08800 - Glazing: Door light glass and glazing sealants. 1.04 SUBMITTALS I A. Product Data: _ _ - - _ 1. • Submit manufacturer's product information including selected materials and finishes for NI . ' - wood doors. . B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings to indicate door elevations and location and size of glass lites. I 2. Indicate details of glazing stops. 3. Indicate any conflicts between specifications, templates and door fabrication. I C. Product Samples: . 1. Submit three 6 by 6 inch minimum size sample of shop finished face veneer with door edge for Architects Review. 2. Submit 1 sample, to painting subcontractor, for each door color as defined under Sections I 09000 — Interior Finish Schedule and 09900 — Painting. D. Test Reports: I 1. Submit copies of manufacturer's test reports for fire rated and sound rated doors. E. Certificates: I 1. Submit certificate or letter from manufacturer, certifying that flush wood doors meet or exceed current AWI and NWWDA Standards. 2. Submit test results from an independent testing laboratory to indicate that flush wood doors have successfully passed the 500,000 cycle slam test. I 3. Submit test results from an independent testing laboratory to indicate that flush wood solid core doors meet or exceed current ANSI Standards for impact resistance. 4. Submit test results that product meets UBC 7 -2 for "S" labeled doors. 5. Submit certification from manufacturer that specified hardware, supplied under Section • 08700 — Door Hardware, complies with manufacturer's tested assembly for "S" labeled • doors. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08210 -1 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 08210 • WOOD DOORS • I F. Templates: Submit letter to Architect certifying that Hardware Templates, from supplier of Door Hardware — Section 08700, have been received and reviewed prior to fabrication of doors and frames. 1.05 REFERENCES • A. ANSI/NWWDA I.S.1 - Industry Standard For Wood Flush Doors (Includes Standards I.S.1.1 through I.I.S.1.7). • B. AWI - Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute. • C. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. D. UL 10C — Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. • E. UBC Standard 7 -2 —Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Regulatory Requirements: ' 1. Furnish fire rated doors with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or Warnock- Hersey International Listing. • 2. Fire Door Construction: Conform to UL 10B and UL IOC. _ 3. _ : -. _. "S" Labeled doors: Conform to 1997 UBC Standard 7 -2. _ _ - 4. Positive Pressure Doors: Conform to 1997 UBC Standard 7 -2. • B. Conform to requirements of ANSI /NWWDA I.S.1. 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. . Packing and Shipping: 1. Furnish wood doors with slip sheets, poly - wrapped or individually cartoned. B. - Storage and Protection: 1. Comply with requirements in AWI, Section 1300 -G -22. 2. Store doors in dry area with humidity between 30 and 50 percent. 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: 1. Furnish manufacturer's standard limited 5 year warranty for each door. 2.• Include replacement of doors with defective materials and labor up to original cost of the door. ' 3. Include removal, refinishing, and re- hanging of doors with defective surface and finishing • labor up to original cost of the door. • 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08210 -2 Printed 7/26/2004 • SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.01 MANUFACTURERS • I A. Acceptable 5 -Ply Flush Wood Door Manufacturers: 1. Algoma Hardwoods 2. Pacific Architectural, Inc., Portland, OR. 3. Oshkosh Corporation, Wood Door Division, Oshkosh, WI. I 4. 5. Eggers Weyerhaeuser. 6. . VT Industries. 7. Mohawk Flush Doors, Inc. 8. Lynden Doors, Inc. B. Acceptable 7 -Ply Flush Wood Door Manufacturers: I . 1. Graham MFG., Co. 2. Vancouver Door Company, Puyallup, WA. 3.. Western Oregon Door. 4. Mohawk Flush Doors; Inc. 5. Lynden Doors, Inc. C. Other Manufacturers: I 1. Submit substitution requests •prior to Bid Date. _ . 2. - Comply with requirements in Section 01600,-Material Equipment._. _ 01 . 2.02 INTERIOR DOORS A. Hardwood Faced Swinging Doors: i . 1. NWWDA Architectural Door Code: PC or FD. • 2. Face Veneer: Select Golden Oak; Plain Sliced; Book match 3. Veneer Grade: AA. 4. Door Grade: Premium. 5. Solid Core: 28 to 32 pounds per cubic foot average density particleboard, except mineral • core at 45, 60, and 90 minute rated fire doors. Comply with particleboard standard ANSI A208.1, Grade 1 -LD -2. 6. Pairs of doors: Veneers to be set matched. ' 7. Core Edge: Glue Bonded. 8. Fire Rating: as indicated on Door Schedule. • 9. Adhesive: Type I, waterproof. 1 2.03 DOOR ACCESSORIES • • A. Metal Vision Lites: i 1. Size and Location: As indicated on Drawings. • 2. Finish: Custom Factory Baked Finish. . 3. Standard Vision and Fire Rated lite glazing frames: Square edged, 18 gage steel frame, III mitered corners. Fasteners through bolted and countersunk flat head at exterior face and through bolted and countersink tamper resistant screws at interior face. 4. Manufacturers: Metal frames: Manufacturer's standard meeting the above criteria or Anemostat FGS 75. Fire Rated metal frames: Manufacturer's standard meeting the above I criteria or FGS 75 for interior doors, FGS -DBL at exterior doors by Anemostat. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL. DISTRICT 23J 08210 -3 Printed 7/26/2004 • • SECTION 08210 ' WOOD DOORS • 5. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date. Comply with requirements in Section 01600, Material and Equipment. I 2.04 FABRICATION • A. Fitting and Machining Doors: • I 1. Vertical Edge Clearance: 1/8 inch. 2. Top Edge Clearance: 1/8 inch. 3. Bottom Edge Clearance: 1/2 inch, except where undercut is indicated on Door Schedule. . 4. Lock Edge: Bevel 1/8 inch in 2 inches on swingin•doors. • 5. Machine Doors: Cut openings for recessed hardware as required by door hardware indicated in Section 08700, Door Hardware. • B. Fabrication Requirements for Flush Wood Doors: 1. Fabricate doors to comply with Industry Standard, I.S. 1-A published by NWWDA. 2. . Fabricate doors to comply with AWI, Architectural Woodwork Quality Standards, Sections 01300 and 01500. 3. Veneer substrate to be hardwood, MDF substrates will not be accepted. • 4. Sand cores prior to application of door face veneers. 5. Fabricate doors with hardwood crossbanding. MDF will not be allowed as a face veneer substrate. 6. Face veneers shall not be less than 1/50 inch thick at 12 percent nominal moisture content. 7. Fabricate doors with 3/4 inch thick edge strips of wood species to match veneer. C. Fabrication Requirements for Fire Rated Flush Wood Doors: - 1. Reinforce styles to meet ANSI Standards for screw withdrawal and modified cleavage. 2. Fabricate doors with 5 inch wide minimum top and bottom rails and 5 inch wide minimum lock blocks for installation of door hardware. 3. Veneer crossbanding to be hardwood, MDF substrates will not be accepted. I 4. Fabricate doors to meet fire rating indicated in Door Schedule. 5. Attach fire rating label to door edge. On "S" labeled door provide special label indicating "S" label, temperature rise rating, product serial number, and the listing agency's logo and name. 6. Provide required additional door components at fire rated pairs of doors scheduled to receive concealed vertical rod exit devices. 7. On "S" labeled doors provide Intumescent gasketing, at head and jambs, concealed under wood door edge. Adhesive applied, surface applied intumescent gasketing will not be accepted. Comply with ITS/Warnock Hersey "Category A" door construction. D. Shop Finish for Transparent Finished Doors: 1. AWI Factory Finish System: No. TR -2 Catalyzed. Lacquer. 2. AWI Quality Grade:. Custom. 3. Degree of Sheen: Medium gloss rubbed, 35 to 45 degrees on 60 degrees gloss meter in • accordance with ASTM D523. 2.05 SOURCE QUALITY CONTROL A. "S" Labeled Doors: • 1. Manufacturer shall verify that door hardware supplied under Section 08700 — Door Hardware, complies with manufacturer's tested assembly for "S" labeled doors. 2. Fabrication Tolerances: As required by manufacturer to meet "S" label requirements. • 1' 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - Ti PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J _ 08210 -4 Printed 7/26/2004 11 SECTION 08210 WOOD DOORS B. Other Doors: Meet requirements of hardware manufacturer and AWI. I • PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 PERFORMANCE A. Installation of Interior Doors: • 1. Comply with NWWDA I.S. 1 -A, Section G -20. 2. Store doors 7 days at building temperature and humidity before installing. • . 3. Comply with building code and fire rating requirements. 4. Install doors to meet fire rating indicated on door schedule. 5. Install fire rated doors to requirements in NFPA Standard No. 80 and NFPA Standard 101. 3.02 COMPLETION A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Adjust operating hardware for smooth operation. 2. Repair damaged•shop fmish to match adjacent door finish. B. Final Cleaning: • 1. Remove dirt, paint splatters, and dust from wood doors prior to Substantial Completion. 2. Wash and wipe dry glass lights in doors prior to Substantial Completion. , _ END OF SECTION • • • • • I I I I I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08210 -5 ' Printed 7/26/2004 I SECTION 08305 ACCESS DOORS PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS . . I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES • A. Rated and non -rated access doors and frames. 1.03 RELATED WORK A. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Application over wall and ceiling finish. B. Section 09900 - Painting: Field finishing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS I • A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include sizes, types, finishes, scheduled locations, and details of adjoining work. - Cr- _ Submit manufacturer's installation.uistructions under provisions of Section 01300. = Oil _ PART 2 PRODUCTS I . 2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Milcor, Inc. • I B. Bilco Co. , C. , JL Industries. ' , • 1 D. ELMDOR Manufacturing Company I E. Nystrom Products Co. F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 ACCESS UNITS A. In Framed Ceilings and Walls: I 1. Milcor "Fire -Rated Door "; primed, 20 gage steel, 90 minute min. fire rating. Self closing. 2. Milcor "Style DW" non -rated access door; primed, 14 gage steel door panel. 3. Provide flush keyed locks in all wall access doors. All doors keyed alike. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL TI PACKAGE - MUSIC 1 JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08305 -1 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 08305 ACCESS DOORS . ,11 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION 11 A. Verify rough openings for door and frame are correctly. sized .and located. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION - ACCESS DOORS A. Install rated access doors in ceilings and walls carrying ratings. B. Install frame plumb and flush with wall surface. +� C. Position to provide convenient access to concealed work requiring access. D. Secure rigidly in place in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 • E. Paint under provisions of Section 09900 - Painting. 1 F. Install access doors at coiling door assemblies for access to motors and operating devices as • required by door manufacturer. END OF SECTION • • It � 1 I I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08305 -2 1 Printed 7/26/2004 II SECTION 08380 ACOUSTIC DOOR ASSEMBLIES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. • 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES I A. Rated and non - rated swinging wood sound control door and steel frame systems. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS • A. Section 03600 - Grout: Grouting of frames. I B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant materials and methods of installation. C. Section 08000 _ Door Schedule. ' D. Section 08210 - Wood Doors: Match veneer and fmish with standard wood doors. E. Section 08700 - Door Hardware: Door hardware for swinging doors. . g F. Section 08800 - Glazing: Door lite glass and glazing sealants. - _ _ _ . _ 01 G. Section 09900 - Painting: Field painting of frames. • 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit product information on doors and frames under provisions of Section 01300. 2. Indicate door core, frame profile, frame corner detail, hardware preparations, and details I 3. of glazing, and door edges. Indicate factory prime fmish. B. Shop Drawings: I 1. Submit shop drawings door and frame work under provisions of Section 01300. • 2. Include door schedule which indicates door, frame, and glazed opening size, and door core materials. 3. Indicate profile and anchorage of glazing stops. 4. Indicate door and frame assembly fire rating and sound rating.. 5. Details shall be submitted for all frames, clearly showing throat size coordinated with frame profiles and project wall types. Details shall be furnished at minimum scale of 3" = 1' -0" for review. Incomplete or incorrectly drawn submittal will not be reviewed and will be returned for resubmittal. 1 1.05 REFERENCES A. DHI - Door Hardware Institute: The Installation of Commercial Steel Doors and Steel Frames, Insulated Steel Doors in Wood Frames and Builder's Hardware. I B. ANSUNWWDA I.S.1 '- Industry Standard For Wood Flush Doors (Includes Standards I.S.1.1 through I.I.S.1.7). I . 02054 • TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08380 -1 Printed 7/26/2004 • SECTION 08380 ACOUSTIC DOOR ASSEMBLIES • I C. AWI - Quality Standards of Architectural Woodwork Institute. D. UL 10B - Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. E. ANSI 224.1 - Modified Epoxy 1 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Provide laboratory test reports from an independent laboratory in accordance with ASTM E90 and ASTM 413. The laboratory referenced in the test report must be qualified under the National Voluntary Laboratory Accreditation Program of the National Institute for Science and Technology. B. Fire rated door and frame construction to conform to UL 10B. C. Installed frame and door assembly to conform to NFPA 80 for fire rated class indicated in I� Schedule. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for fire rated frames. 1.08 WARRANTY 3 _ , - A. Hollow metal work shall be warranted from defects in workmanship and - quality for 2 years from - _ - date of shipment. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS I A. Acceptable Manufacturers: 1. Krieger Steel Products B. Substitute Manufacturers: 1. Comply with requirements in Section 01600. 1 2,02 ACOUSTIC WOOD DOOR FABRICATION A. Fabrication of Interior Acoustic Doors: 1 1. Model: NC5 -WD -1 -9147 • 1. Face Veneer: Premium grade Golden Oak, Plain Sliced, Book match. Face veneer to match that which is specified under Section 08210 — Wood Doors. 2. Door Construction: 5 ply construction. 3. Adhesive: Type I, waterproof: 4. STC Rating: 47 5. Door Thickness: 1 -3/4 inches. B. Shop Finish for Transparent Finished Doors: 1. AWI Factory Finish System: No. OP -2 Catalyzed Lacquer. 2. AWI Quality Grade: Custom. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL •— TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08380 -2 Printed 7/26/2004 I SECTION 08380 ACOUSTIC DOOR ASSEMBLIES 3. Degree of Sheen: Medium gloss rubbed, 35 to 45 degrees on 60 degrees gloss meter in I 4. accordance with ASTM D523. Finish to match door finish specified under Section 08210. • C. Provide interior steel acoustic door and frame assembly for doors scheduled for 90- . minute ratings. Acoustic properties of steel doors to be similar to wood doors. Door and frame shall be factory primed for field painting by Section 09900 . l 2.03 ACOUSTIC FRAME FABRICATION A. Fabrication of Frames for doors and windows: 1. Industry Standard: ASTM A366. 2. Frame Metal: 14 gage steel. 3. Frame Corners: Fully welded, all joints and corners shall have contact edges closed tight and mitered. 4. Frame Dimensions: as shown on drawings. . 5. Provide appropriate masonry anchors and mortar guards for frames installed in masonry or tilt walls. • . 6. At framed walls provide continuous 16 gage channel at jambs and head of door that surrounds the stud and allows drywall penetration into the throat of the frame. 7. Shop Finish: Rust inhibitive alkaline primer. Tnemec Series.88. . 8. Fire Label: Furnish frames with fire label as indicated in door schedule and on Drawings. i 9. Frames shall be prepared and supplied with adjustable NC3 neoprene sound seals. pi 2.04 . HARDWARE PREPARATION - A. Hardware Preparation: 1. Prepare doors and frames to receive door hardware, including cutouts, reinforcing, drilling, and tapping. 1. 2. Reinforce door frames with 3/16 inch by full width by 11 inch long steel plate reinforcing welded to frame at hinge pockets. 3. Prepare fire rated doors and frames to meet requirements of NFPA 252, with A . Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., Warnock- Hersey International, and CABO NER Report for fire rating indicated on Door Schedule. 4. Prepare doors to receive hardware in compliance with ANSI A 115. I 5. Provide manufacturer's standard closer bracket for parallel mounted closers supplied under section 08700. 6. Provide manufacturer's aluminum threshold at all acoustic doors. Refer to wall types for I: each location and size width of threshold accordingly PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PERFORMANCE I . A. Installation of Door and Window Frames: • 1. Install steel frames and anchor frames to wall and floor in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Attach jamb anchors to adjacent walls as indicated in manufacturer's standard details. 3. Fill frames in stud framed walls with fiberglass insulation matching that which is used in adjacent walls. 4. Fill frames with acoustic grout recommended by manufacturer. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08380 -3 Printed 7/26 /2004 • SECTION 08380 ACOUSTIC DOOR ASSEMBLIES • I 5. Cover hardware openings in frames to prevent acoustic grout from entering the hardware. - recess. 6. Install frames to meet requirements of HMMA standards. • 7. Seal joints of dissimilar materials with sealant as specified under Section 07900. • • 3.02 COMPLETION A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Adjust clearances and hardware placement for smooth door operation. 2. Touch up scratched door and frame with Tnemec 90 -97 Tnemec -Zinc at 2.5 to 3.0 mils dry film thickness. • B. Inspections: • • 1. Arrange for a qualified representative of the manufacturer of the Sound Door Assembly to inspect the completed installation. 2. Put all components of the work of this Section through at least ten complete cycles of operations, verifying that each component is properly installed. 3. State in a certified test report to the Architect that the work of this section has been • installed in complete accordance with the Approved Shop Drawings and meets the FSTC ratings as specified. • • C. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean door, hardware, and frame surfaces prior to Substantial Completion. END OF SECTION - I • I • I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL. ADDITION / REMODEL — TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08380 -4 Printed 7/26/2004 - SECTION 08700 i DOOR HARDWARE PART 1 GENERAL I 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES II A. Hardware for interior wood doors. 1 B. Gasketing. • C. Hardware as scheduled on Drawings and end of this Section. I D. Furnish templates to Section 08110,08210, 08380 and 08410 for door and frame preparation. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS I A. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Installation of hardware. B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Hardware for doors. C: - . Section 08210 = Wood Doors: Hardware for doors: - - _- - - 1.04 REFERENCES A. Americans with Disability Act Accessibility Guidelines(ADAAG) Federal Register - Rules and 1 Regulations. B. ANSI/NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows. C. DHI - Door and Hardware Institute. 1.05 COORDINATION A. Coordinate work of this Section with other directly affected Sections involving manufacturer of any internal reinforcement for door hardware. i, 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Manufacturer Qualifications: I 1.' Obtain each type of hardware from only one manufacturer, except where indicated otherwise in hardware schedule. I B. Supplier Qualifications: 1.. Hardware supplier shall have furnished hardware in the same market area as the project for a period of not less than 2 years. 2. Hardware supplier shall have in his employment an experienced Architectural Hardware Consultant (AHC) who is available for project hardware consultation to the Owner, Architect, and Contractor. 3. Hardware supplier shall review and approve Hardware Installer qualifications. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC 1 JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 -1 Prmtcd 07/26/04 SECTION 08700 DOOR HARDWARE • 1 C. Installer Qualifications: Company shall have a minimum of 2 years experience in the installation of commercial grade hardware. D. Keying Meeting: 1. Upon receipt of final hardware schedules, hardware supplier shall request Contractor to arrange a keying meeting between hardware supplier and Owner's Representative. 2. From information obtained at this keying meeting, submit 3 copies of detailed keying schedule.. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS • A. Conform to the requirements of ADAAG for making buildings accessible to and usable by physically handicapped occupants. 1.08 RESPONSIBILITY A. The types listed are to be used as a guide for quality and operation and are not to be construed as a complete list. The detailing of the hardware requirements shall be the responsibility of this Contractor. I 1.09 SUBMITTALS A. Submit schedule, shop drawings, and product data under provisions of Section 01300. -- B. - Indicate locations and mounting heights of each type of hardware. ' C. List each opening, door size, door hand, door and frame material, door label, manufacturer's number and finish. D. Provide edited product data cut sheets on specified hardware. Clearly identify hardware items represented within submittal. Submittals containing complete product line catalogues will be rejected. 1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. B. Include data on operating hardware, lubrication requirements, and inspection procedures related to preventative maintenance. 1.11 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. I B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Package hardware items individually; label and identify package with door opening code to match 1. hardware schedule. D. Protect hardware by storing in secure area. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC • JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 -2 Printed 07/26/04 . . SECTION 08700 DOOR HARDWARE • 1.12 WARRANTY A. Provide one year warranty for general hardware, ten years for closers and three -year warranty for exit devices under provisions of Section 01700. 1.13 MAINTENANCE MATERIALS A. Provide special wrenches and tools applicable to each different or special hardware component. i B. Provide maintenance tools and accessories supplied by hardware component manufacturer. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Butts: 1. Hager. 2. Lawrence. 3. McKinney. *(MCK) 4. Stanley. • B. Latchset, Locksets: - II . . - _ 1. -:- - Schlage. *(SCH)- .- PI C. Cylinders: • 1. Exterior and Interior: "E" Keyway, verify with district. D. Surface Closers: 1. LCN - 4111 Series.* E. Exit Devices and Mullions: 1. Von Duprin - 99 Series. *(VD) F. Stops and Holders: I 1. 2. Builders Brass Works. Glynn- Johnson. 3. Ives. *(IVE) 4. Quality. I V. G. Push and Pull Plates: • 1. Builders Brass Works. 2. Trimco. 3. Tice. *(TIC) 4. Quality. II H. Thresholds, Gaskets, and Weatherstripping: 1. National Guard. 2. Pemko. *(PEM) li ' 3. Reese. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC 1 JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 -3 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 08700 • • 1 DOOR HARDWARE I. Astragals: • 1. • Pemko. *(PEM) 2. Reese. • 3. National Guard J. Automatic Door Bottoms: 1. Pemko. *(PEM) 2. Reese. • 3. National Guard. - K. Flush Bolts, Dust Proof Strikes, and Coordinators: 1. Glynn Johnson. 2. Door Controls International. *(DCI) .1 . L. Silencers: 1. Builders Brass Works. 2. Glynn Johnson. • • 3. Ives. *(IVE) A. Other Manufacturers: 1. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date. 2. Comply with requirements in Section 01600, Material and Equipment. *. Manufacturers specified in hardware schedule at end of this Section. 2.02 LOCKSET/LATCHSET DESIGN A. Design: Rhodes, except where listed otherwise. B. Strikes to have extended lip strike where required to protect trim, ANSI prep. - U • C. All locks to have 2 3/4 inch backset. 2.03 KEYING A. Provide temporary construction cylinders for locks, as required by contractor, keyed alike. Supply twenty (5) keys for use by Contractor. B. Permanent Door Locks: Designed to allow keying by hardware supplier. Master keyed and. Grand master keyed to Owner's existing keying system. C. Supply all keys in the following quantities: 1. 2 keys per lock. 2. 6 master keys, per master key group. 3. 4 grand master keys. D. Mark all keys "DO NOT DUPLICATE ". Do not stamp keys with door number or bitting. Serially I number all keys in accordance with Owner's instructions. 2.04 FASTENINGS A. Furnish hardware with all necessary screws, bolts and other fastenings of suitable size and type to securely anchor in position and harmonize with hardware material and finish. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 -4 1 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 08700 . ' DOOR HARDWARE I 2.05 FINISHES ' A. Finishes are identified in the schedule at the end of this section. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Installation of Recessed Door Hardware: I i. Install recessed hardware, then remove and store recessed hardware in a secure place during application of door and frame finish. 2. After finishing doors and frames, reinstall recessed hardware. III B. Installation of Surface Mounted Door Hardware: 1. Anchor kick plates with oval-head_ full- thread screws, spaced uniformly at a maximum of 5 inches on center at kick plate perimeter. 2: Anchor thresholds with a positive anchoring device or expansion shield and anchor bolts. I 3. Set thresholds in full bed of grout, refer to Section 03600 - Grout. 4. All closers to be thru - bolted, to door. 3.02 COMPLETION 0 .. . . . A. Operating Hardware Adjustments: 1. Check and adjust operating hardware and each door operation to ensure smooth operation. 2. Lubricate moving. parts with type of lubrication recommended by manufacturer. . 3. Use graphite or WD 40 if no other lubrication is recommended. 4. Replace hardware which cannot be adjusted and lubricated to operate correctly. 5. Adjust door closers to required opening force and closing speeds, per ADAAG. Door • closing speed shall be consistent through -out the building. Properly adjust backcheck on i closers per manufacturer's recommendations. B. . Contract Closeout Adjustments: . I • 1. Where hardware installation is made more than one month prior to occupancy of a space or area, return to the work not more than 7 days prior to occupancy, and make a final check and adjustment of door hardware. C. Re- adjust and inspect hardware for opening force and closing speeds, per requirements of ADAAG, after final system balancing of Mechanical Systems. 3.03 HARDWARE SCHEDULE . I • A. Required Door Hardware: Furnish the following hardware groups for each door as indicated on the Door Schedule, I 1. and as required for a complete installation. 2. Include items listed and required for a complete installation regardless of omissions or conflicts in Contract Documents. I I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC 1 JULY 04. TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 -5 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 08700 • DOOR HARDWARE 3.04 SCHEDULE 1 QTY ITEM MFR NUM BER SIZE FINISH HW -7 3 ea. Butts MCK TA2714 — NRP at 4 '/2 x 4 '/2 652 reverse bevel doors. 1 ea. Lockset SCH D7OPD Rhodes 626 1 ea. Door stop IVE WS406 630 3 ea. Silencers WE 20 HW -8 a. 3 ea. Butts By dr. mfr. 1 ea. Lockset SCH D93PD Rhodes — 3 3 /4 inch 626 backset. ,i 1 ea. Closer LCN P4040 Parallel Arm 689 • mounted with dr. ' mfr. supplied bracket. Provide I metal closer cover. 1 ea. Door stop IVE WS406 630 1 set Gasketing By dr. mfr. 1 ea. Threshold PEM 151A . 3 ea. Butts . • By dr. mfr.. 1 ea. Lockset SCH D93PD Rhodes — 3 3 /4 inch 626 4 backset. 1 ea. Door stop IVE WS406 630 1 set Gasketing By dr. mfr. 1 ea. Threshold PEM 151A HW -10 , 3 ea. Butts MCK TA2714 — NRP at 4 'A x 4 ' /2 652 reverse bevel doors. 1 ea. Lockset SCH D93PD Rhodes 626 1 ea. Closer LCN 4111 Spring CUSH 689 Provide metal closer cover. 1 set Smokegasket PEM 297AV 'a 3 ea. Silencers WE 20 • HW -11 • I 3 ea. Butts MCK TA2714 — NRP at 4 '/2x 4 '/2 652 • reverse bevel doors. 1 ea. Lockset SCH D8OPD Rhodes 626 1 ea. Door stop IVE WS406 630 3 ea. Silencers IVE 20 HW -12 3 ea. Butts By dr. mfr. 1 ea. . Exit Device VD 98L -F -2 x 994L 626 2 ea. Cylinder SCH 2O -022 626 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 -6 1 Printed 07/26/04 II . SECTION 08700 DOOR HARDWARE 1 ea. Closer LCN P4040 Parallel Arm 689 .I mounted with dr. mfr. supplied bracket. Provide I metal closer cover. 1 ea. Door stop IVE WS406 630 1 set Smokegasket By dr. mfr. 1 ea. Threshold PEM • 151A HW -13 3 ea. Butts MCK TA2714 — NRP at 4 'h x 4 '/2 652 I 1 ea. Lockset SCH reverse bevel doors. D8OPD Rhodes 626 1 ea. Closer LCN 4111 Provide metal closer 689 cover at fire rated a drs. greater than 20 minute. • • 1 ea. Door stop IVE WS406 630 I i set Smokegasket PEM 297AV 3 ea. Silencers IVE 20 HW -14 3 ea. Butts By dr. mfr. 1 ea. Lockset - SCH - _ D93PD _ Rhodes — 3_'/4 inch -- 626 Pi - backset. 1 ea. Closer LCN P4040 Parallel Arm. 689 mounted with dr. mfr. supplied I bracket. 1 ea. Door stop IVE WS406 630 1 set Gasketing By dr. mfr. 1 ea. Threshold PEM 151A I HW -15 • 3 ea. Butts MCK TA2714 - NRP at 4 V2 x 4 '/ 652 I reverse bevel doors. 1 ea. Exit Device VD 98L -F -2 x 994L 626 1 ea. Cylinder SCH 2O -001 626 1 ea. Cylinder, SCH 2O -022 626 I . 1 ea. Closer LCN P4040 Parallel Arm 689 mounted with dr. mfr. supplied I bracket. 1 ea. Door stop IVE WS406 630 1 set Smokegasket By dr. mfr. 1 ea. Threshold PEM 151A END OF SECTION a 1 I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08700 -7 Printed 07/26/04 . • I SECTION 08800 • 1 GLAZING PART 1 GENERAL iii 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Glass and glazing for hollow metal work, relites, and doors. B. Fire -Rated Glass installed in hollow metal work, windows, relites and doors. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS I ' A. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Sealant and back -up materials. B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Glazing in hollow metal frames and doors. I I C. Section 08210 Wood Doors: Glazing in wood doors. Il _ _ 1.04 REFERENCES • A. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM): - - - - - - . - 1. ' ASTM E119 Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. ASTM E2074 -00 Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. E2010 -01 Methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. I B. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA): 1. NFPA 80: Fire Doors and Windows. 2. NFPA 251: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 3. NFPA 252: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 4. NFPA 257: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. . C. ' Uniform Building Codes (UBC): 1. UBC -7 -1: Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. 2. UBC -7 -2: Methods for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 3. UBC -7 -4: Methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. I D. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): - 1. UL 9: Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. . I 2. UL 10 B: Fire Tests of Window Assemblies. 3. UL 263: Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials. E. American National Standards Institute (ANSI): 1 1. ANSI Z97.1: Standard for Safety Glazing Materials Used in Buildings. F. - Consumer Product Safety Commission (CPSC): 1. . CPSC 16 CFR 1201: Safety Standard for Architectural Glazing Materials. G. FS DD -G -451 - Glass, Float or Plate, Sheet, Figured (Flat, for Glazing, Mirrors and Other Uses). 1 I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08800 -1 Printed 07/26/04 • SECTION 08800 1 GLAZING H. • FS DD -G -1403 Glass, Plate (Float), Sheet, Figured, and Spandrel (Heat Strengthened and Fully Tempered). I I. FS TT -S -227 - Sealer Compound: Rubber Base, Two Component (for Caulking, Sealing and Glazing in Building Construction). ne Rubber Base (for Caulking, Sealing, and Glazing J. FS TT-S-1543 - Sealing Compound: Silicone ( g, g, g in Buildings and Other Structures). K. FS TT -S- 001657 - Sealing Compound: Single Component, Butyl Rubber. Based Solvent Release Type (for Buildings and Other Types of Construction). . L. FGMA - Glazing Manual. M. SIGMA — Sealed Insulating Glass Manufacturers Association 1.05 - SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: Provide fire rated glazing manufactured, fabricated and installed to maintain performance criteria stated by manufacturer without defects, damage or failure. 1. Fire Rating: 45, 60, or 90 minutes as specified. See Door & Relite Schedule for location of rated openings. 2. Window Certification: Window assemblies with ratings of less than 60 minutes shall be • tested in accordance with E2010 -01, NFPA 257, UBC 7 -4, UL 9 Standard Test Methods. - - 3. Wall Certifications: Window /wall assemblies with ratings of 60 minutes shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E119, NFPA 251, UBC 7 -1, UL 263, Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Building Construction and - Materials. 4. Door Certifications: Doors shall be tested in accordance with ASTM E2074 -00, NFPA 252, UBC 7 -2, UL 10b Standard Test Methods of Fire Tests of Door Assemblies. 5. Testing Laboratory: Fire test shall be conducted by an approved independent testing laboratory, similar to Warnock Hersey International or Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. B. Listings and Labels: I 1. Fire rated glazing shall be under current follow -up service by an approved independent agency and maintain a current listing or certification. Assemblies shall be labeled in accordance with limits of listings. • 1.06 SUBMITTALS . A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. 1 B. Provide structural, physical and environmental characteristics, size limitations, special handling, • and installation requirements. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE I • A. Conform to Flat Glass Marketing Association (FGMA) Glazing Manual Glazing Sealing Systems Manual for glazing installation methods. 1 B. . Conform to Uniform Building Code for safety glazing locations and fire rating. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08800 -2 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 08800 GLAZING C. Applicable requirements of ANSI Z97.1 II - D. Each piece of safety glass shall have manufacturer's "stamp" etched on the glass and visible when installed. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. • 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide five year manufacturer's warranty under provisions of Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS • I 2.01 GLASS MANUFACTURERS • A. ASG Industries. B. Ford Industries. p - C. - Libbey- Owens -Ford Glass Co. - D. PPG Industries, Inc. E. Globe /Amenada. F. Guardian Industries Corp. G. Viracon. H. Cardinal Glass I I. Oldcastle Glass I . J. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 1 2.02 GLASS MANUFACTURERS — FIRE RATED GLASS A. Basis of Specification: Safti Glass Products; San Francisco, CA; SuperLite II -XL in ratings. as I specified. B. Comparable Products by the following manufacturers: I 1. Technical Glass Products (TGP); Kirkland, WA C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE- MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08800 -3 Printed 07/26/04 • SECTION 08800 GLAZING • 2.03 GLASS MATERIALS A. Clear Tempered Safety Glass (Glass Type "T "): 1/4 inch thick clear tempered safety glass conforming to FS DD -G -1403. For non -rated applications in metal relites and glazing in wood • doors. �I B. Fire Rated Glass (Glass Type "FR ") clear, fire and safety rated, optically clear and colorless, tempered, polished both sides, cavity gel - filled; overall thickness varies with rating as follows: 45- minutes - 3/4 inch thick; 60- minutes - 1 1/8 inch thick; 90- minutes - 1 1/2 inch thick. Fire rated label permanently attached to each pane. Conforming to ANSI Z97.1 and NFPA 80; also meeting the requirements of UBC -7 -2 "Methods for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies" and UBC -7 -4 — "Methods for Fire Tests of Window Assemblies ". • 2.04 ACCEPTABLE GLAZING COMPOUND MANUFACTURERS A. Tremco. 1 B. Dow Coming Corp. C. General Electric Co. 111 D. Morton Thiokol Inc. _ _ -- - _ _ _ -- _ -. _ - - E. — Pecora Corp. - - - _ _ _.- _ F. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. . 2.05 GLAZING COMPOUNDS • A. Glazing Compound: FS TT- G Black color. , B. Butyl Sealant: FS TT -S- 001657; Shore A hardness of 10- 20; black color; non - skinning. C . Polysulphide Sealant: FS TT -S -227; Class A, Type 2; two component; cured Shore A hardness of 15 -25; color selected by Architect/Engineer. D. Silicone Sealant: .FS TT -S -1543; Class A; single component; chemical curing; capable of water immersion without loss of properties; cured Shore A hardness of 15 -25; clear color. 2.06 GLAZING ACCESSORIES 1. A. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, Shore A durometer hardness. B. Spacer Shims: Neoprene; Shore A durometer hardness. P P C. Glazing Splines: Resilient polyvinylchloride extruded shape to suit glazing channel retaining slot; black color. • D. Sealant Tape: 100 percent solid, crosslinked butyl, preformed sealant. Density, 1/5 grams per cc (plus or minus 0.05 grams per cc.). Tremco — 440 — II Tape. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J • 08800 -4 Printed 07/26/04 - • I SECTION 08800 GLAZING 1. PART 3 EXECUTION ' 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify surfaces of glazing channels or recesses are clean, free of obstructions, and ready for work of this Section. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of substrate. 3.02 PREPARATION i . A. Clean contact surfaces with solvent and wipe dry. B. Seal porous glazing channels or recesses. . 1 C. Prime surfaces scheduled to receive sealant. 3.03 INTERIOR GLAZING - INSTALLATION 1 A. Use dry method (tape on both sides of glass) for glazing interior hollow metal doors and relites. B. Cut glazing tape to length, do not stretch; install on permanent stops, projecting 1/16" out from sightline. i PI' - - C. . Place setting blocks at 1/4 points. - D. Rest glass on setting blocks and push glass against tape for full contact at perimeter of pane. I E. Place glazing tape on free perimeter of glass pane in same manner described above. F. Install removable stop without displacement of tape. Exert pressure on tape for full continuous contact. I G. Knife trim protruding tape so as to eliminate dirt and moisture pockets. I H. Fire Rated Glazing: Installation shall be in strict accordance with the fire resistant glazing material manufacturer's specifications. Field cutting or tampering is strictly prohibited. ,! 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect glazing work until Final Completion. I . B. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged in other ways during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism I 3.05 CLEANING A. After installation, mark pane with an "X" by using plastic tape or removable paste. 1 B. Remoye glazing materials from finish surfaces. C. Remove labels after work is completed. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC • I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08800 -5 Printed 07126104 SECTION 08800 • GLAZING • 1 D. Wash and polish glass on both sides not more than 4 days prior to date scheduled for substantial completion. END OF SECTION 1 • I I 1 - _ - - . I 1 = f .1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 08800 -6 1 Printed 07/26/04 MIN I I • M •M 111111 M — w in I i • SECTION 09001 • • INTERIOR FINISH LEGEND • 1. Carpet: CPT -1 Mannington Commercial, Carthage III 2602 "Mineral Bluff'. • 2. Vinyl Composition Tile: VCT -1 Mannington Designer Essentials, color #288, "Brick ". VCT -2 Mannington Designer Essentials, color #246, "Bronze ". VCT -3 Mannington Designer Essentials, color #295, "Deep Fern". VCT -4 • Mannington Designer Essentials, color #123, "Wheat ". • • 3. Base: B -1 4" rubber base: , Flexco, color #038, "Outer Banks ". 4. Tacksurface TS -1 Koroseal Muratone, color #M621 -61, "Tropic Sunset ". TS -2 Koroseal Muratone, color #M621 -37, "Papyrus ". TS -3 Koroseal Muratone, color #M621 -46, "Teneres Dunes ". ••• 5. Tackboard • • • TB -1 Koroseal Muratone, color #M621 -61, "Tropic Sunset "._ TB -2 Koroseal Muratone, color #M621 -37, "Papyrus ". TB -3 Koroseal Muratone, color #M621 -46, " Teneres Dunes ". 6. Wainscot: WSCT -1 5/8" Medium Density Fiberboard, natural color, field finished by Section 09900. 7. Paint: • P -1 Miller, CW025W, "Restorative ", field color P -2 Miller, 8766N, "Caribou ", hollow metal frame color P -3 Miller, 7816N, "Tasmanian Myrtle ", accent color P -4 Miller, 8165D, "Antique Pine ", accent color • P -5 Miller, 7744M, "September Leaf', accent color P -6 Miller, AC 144N, "Black Deco" • 8. Acoustic Ceiling Tile ACT -1 24" x 48" Lay -In; White • ACT -2 24" x 48" Scored Lay -In; White • • • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION/REMODEL - TI PACKAGE -MUSIC • JULY 04 TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09001 -1 Printed 7/26/2004 • SECTION 09001 • INTERIOR FINISH LEGEND • 9. Plastic Laminate: PL -1 Wilsonart #4673 -60 "Saffron Tigris ", countertop PL -2 Wilsonart #4826 -60 "Windswept Copper ", cabinet faces PL -3 Pionite #AV801 Suede, "Olive Serenity", cabinet faces 1. PL -4 Wilsonart #1595 -60 "Black" 10. Wood Trim WT -1 Maple hardwood, clear finish GENERAL NOTES: • 1. Finish material followed by a number is referencing a color number and/or style number. 2. All walls to be painted P -1 unless otherwise noted on interior elevations, including walls not elevated. ABBREVIATIONS: • AFF Above Finish Floor EX Existing OTS Open to Structure ME Match Existing TBS To Be Selected. • • • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION/REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 • _ TIGARD TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09001 -2 Printed 7/26/2004 11111 Ole all Mil MI NM MI • 1 . SECTION 09100 METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • I A. Drawings and general provisions of the contract, including General and other Conditions and • Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in the Section 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES I A. Interior non load - bearing steel studs. I B. Framed soffits for gypsum wallboard: 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS I • A. Section 07213 - Batt and Blanket Insulation: Thermal and sound insulation. B. Section 07900 - Sealants. I C. Section Q9120 - Ceiling Suspension System: Coordination of systems. D. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum board systems. 1.04'. SYSTEM DESCRIPTION — - - - - -- 01 A. Structural-Requirements: . 1. Steel Framing Systems: Maximum deflection of L/240 for design loads. 2. Seismic Loads: Provide steel bracing members to carry loads created by seismic I movement of.the ceiling and wall systems. B. System Tolerances: 1. Do not exceed 1/4 inch framing variation in 8' -0" from plumb, level, and true lines. 2. Do not exceed 1/8 inch framing variation in 8' -0" from plumb surface in framing areas scheduled to receive thin set ceramic tile and fiberglass reinforced polyester resin panels. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit product data for metal studs, runners, and furring channels. I 2. Submit Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. design numbers and CABO NER reports for fire - rated wall and ceiling assemblies as required by local building officials. • I B. Installer: 1. Submit of list of completed projects prior to commencement of work. 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Installers to have minimum 5 years documented experience installing metal stud systems. I B. Regulatory Requirements: 1. Comply with building code and governing authorities' requirements for fire -rated walls and ceilings. I I 02054 . TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09100 -1 Printed 7/26/2004 - • . SECTION 09100 • METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS I 1.07 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING . A. Storage and Protection: I 1. Store steel materials in dry, ventilated space, under cover and 4 inches above concrete floor slabs. 2. Protect structural members from excessive stress during erection. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. Steel Framing Systems: 1. Angeles Metal Systems, Inc. 2. Domtar Gypsum America, Inc. 3. Georgia Pacific. , • 4. Gold Bond Building Products, A National Gypsum Division. 5. Knorr Steel Framing Systems. 6. Steeler, Inc. 7. United States Gypsum Company. B. Powder Driven Fasteners: 1. Hilti Fastening Systems. I 2. ITW Ramset, Illinois Took Works, Inc. - _ _ _ C. Other Manufacturers: - . - 1. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date. . 2. Comply with requirements in Section 01600. .2.02 FRAMING COMPONENTS A. Lateral Load Bearing C- Studs: - 1. Industry Standard: ASTM C 645. 2. Type: Punched lateral load bearing steel C- studs. 3. Flange Profile: 1.250 and 1.375 inch with 1/4 inch stiffening lip. 4. Metal Thickness: Gage as required for span. Refer to manufacturer's printed span table for spans required for construction. Minimum gage shall be 20 gage. 5. Minimum Yield Strength: 33,000 psi for 18 and 20 gage, 50,000 psi for 12, 14 and 16 gage. • 6. Width: 1 -1/2, 3 -1/2, 6, 8 inches and except as indicated on Drawings. 7 II . Flange Texture: Knurled. 8. Finish: ASTM A 525, G -60 galvanized. 9. Track: Manufacturer's standard profile, except extended legs at top track to prevent axial • i loading of studs. • B. • " Lateral and Axial Load Bearing Structural C- Studs: 1. Type: Punched lateral and axial load bearing steel C- studs. 2. Standard Flange: 1.250 and•1.375 inch with 1/4 to 1/2 inch stiffening lip. 3. Metal Thickness: 20 gage, except where 22 gage, 0.0283 inches is indicated on Drawings. 4. Minimum Yield Strength: 33,000 psi. 5. , Size: 3 -1/2 inches, except as indicated on Drawings. 6. Track: Manufacturer's standard profile. i 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC 1 JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09100 -2 Printed 7 /26/2004 • SECTION 09100 in METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS 7. Acceptable 1.250 and 1.375 Inch Flanged Studs: SS Series by Knorr, HDS Series by AMS. C. Framing Accessories: I 1. Screw Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, roll - formed, hat shaped 25 gage, G -60 zinc- coated steel with knurled face. 2. Steel Cold Rolled Channels: ASTM C 754, 3/4 inch and 1 -1/2 inch wide, 16 gage, G -60 galvanized or black asphaltum painted steel. 1 3. Resilient Channels: Galvanized steel channels, RC -1 as manufactured by U.S. Gypsum Company. 4. "Z" Furring Channels: ASTM C 645, roll formed, 2 inch depth, 25 gage, G60 zinc coated steel. 5. Framing Screws: ASTM C 954 or ASTM C 1002, Type S. 6. Powder Actuated Fasteners: Gun fired fasteners by Hilti or ITW Ramset. I D. Acoustical Sealants: 1. Acoustical Caulking: ASTM C 919, non- hardening polyisobutylene rubber. 2. Foam Acoustical Tape: Polyvinyl chloride or polyurethane foam tape. I 3. Comply with requirements in Section 07900, Joint Sealers for materials and methods of installation. PART 3 • EXECUTION - - 3.01 - PERFORMANCE .. :- A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine structural framing and conditions wider which wall and miscellaneous framing systems are to be installed. 2. Start of Work will indicate acceptance of surfaces and conditions within each area. B. Surface Preparation: ii. Coordinate wall and soffit framing locations with plumbing, fire sprinkler, heating, ventilating, communications, and electrical work. C. Requirements for Installation of Wall and Soffit Framing Systems: 1. Comply with ASTM C 754 for installation of studs, runners, and furring channels. 2. Space framing and fasteners as required to meet allowable deflection and fire rating requirements, give support for covering material, and as indicated on Drawings. I 3. Comply with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. and Building Code requirements for fire rated assemblies. 4. Install doubled 25 gage or single 20 gage C- studs at walls which support mechanical 1 equipment, electrical equipment, and fire extinguisher and stand pipe cabinets mounted on stud partitions. 5. Typical framing to be a gage as designed by manufacturer's printed materials or as required for engineered systems. I 6. Coordinate installation of gypsum board fire proofing for columns, control joints and other penetrations. 7. Construct vertical and horizontal soffit framing as indicated on drawings or at a maximum I of 24 inches on center. Install diagonal bracing in soffits at a maximum of 48 inches on centered, staggered if condition allows. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 231 09100 -3 Printed 7 /26/2004 SECTION 09100 • • METAL SUPPORT SYSTEMS D. Installation of Framed Openings: • 1. Coordinate opening requirements for fire extinguisher cabinets, toilet accessories, pipes, conduits, ducts, light fixtures, electrical boxes, and other items concealed within framing space. - 4. 2. Install framing members around items shown to be recessed within framing space. 3. Install two boxed 25 gage or two 20 gage C -studs at door jambs and comply with recommendations in Gypsum Association, GA -219. • E. Installation of Blocking: 1. Install 16 gage continuous steel plate blocking or fire- retardant treated 2 by 6 wood blocking secured to steel studs for wall mounted cabinets, equipment, toilet accessories and miscellaneous door hardware mounted to walls. 2. Install 2 x 12 fire retardant treated wood blocking secured to steel studs for wall mounted accessories. F. • Installation of Acoustical Sealants: • 1. Install acoustical caulking, or foam acoustical tape at edges of sound control wall and ceiling framing. 3.02 COMPLETION • A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Replace defective wall and ceiling framing members. 2. Relocate hanger wire, cross tees,_and main runners to allow for installation of fire - • -- - sprinkler, mechanical, and electrical - equipment and systems. 3. Adjust ceiling height to meet maximum deflection limits of L/360. 4. Patch and repair any damaged fire proofing. • B. Final Cleaning: 1. Remove excess materials from the site. END OF SECTION • • 1 .1 1 r i s 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09100 -4 1 Printed 7/26/2004 1 SECTION 09120 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 1 . PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and - other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES ii A. Suspended metal grid system for gypsum ceilings. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 09100 - Metal Support Systems - Coordination of framing systems. I B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Gypsum Board and accessories for installation of suspended gypsum ceilings. . I C. Division 15 - Grilles, Registers and Diffusers: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. D. Division 16 - Interior Lighting Fixtures: Light fixtures in ceiling system. 1.04 REFERENCES A. - ASTM C635 — specification for Metal. Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -In Panel Ceilings. B. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panels. . 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE • '1 • . A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system with three years • minimum experience. B. Installer: Company with three years minimum experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Conform to 1997 Uniform Building Code Standards with Oregon Amendments and seismic zone 3 requirements for lateral bracing. t 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. • . B. Provide product data on metal grid system components. I C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit one sample each, 24 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner and edge I trim. , I 02054 - TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09120 -1 Printed 7/26/04 SECTION 09120 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS 1 E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. I 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Maintain uniform temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, , during, and after installation. • PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Armstrong Contract Interiors. B. US Gypsum. 1 C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Main Beam: Heavy Duty, double web steel construction, hot dipped galvanized; components die cut and interlocking. Beam shall include integral splice for expansion relief. B. Primary Furring Cross Tees: Double web steel construction, hot dipped galvanized, components - die cut and interlocking. - • C. - Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices and edge moldings for suspended grid system. D. Face Dimension: Provide 15/16 inch wide flange by 1 inch tall heavy duty. .r E. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. Conform to applicable code requirements for lateral bracing of grid and light fixtures. I PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION I A. Verify that all work above the ceiling line is complete. B. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. - C. Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. ' D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this Section. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09120 -2 ' Printed 7/26/04 SECTION 09120 CEILING SUSPENSION SYSTEMS I 1 B. Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. Install Main Beams and Primary Cross Tees at spacing as recommended by manufacturer for type of ceiling system is to support. I C. Install perimeter molding at intersection of suspension system and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. Allow for expansion and contraction of suspension system with vertical surfaces. Do not fasten Main Beams and Primary Cross Tees to perimeter moldings. I D. Provide expansion joints using two Main Beams to separate the suspension system as recommended by manufacturer. Place control joints in ceilings so that areas do not to exceed 450 square feet and consistent with lines of building spaces or as shown on drawings. I E. . Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. • F. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located where I required. G. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. I . . H. Laterally brace entire suspension system per seismic requirements of the UBC. PI 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. i , , END OF SECTION 1 • I I I - I I 1 -- 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC 1 JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J . 09120 -3 Printed 7 /26/04 1 SECTION 09260 • GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 . SECTION INCLUDES I A. Gypsum board and accessories. • I B. Taped and sanded joint treatment. . 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION I A. Load Bearing Requirements: Steel framing systems maximum deflection of L/240 for design loads. 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS • I A. Section 05400 - Cold Formed Metal Framing: Wall Framing — Solid blocking at reveal joints. B. Section 06112 — Framing and Sheathing: Wall Framing — Solid blocking at reveal joints. - - . , C. -- - Section 07213-- Batt and Blanket Insulation: Sound insulation. - - _ - 0 D. Section 07900 Joint Sealants: Sealants used in conjunction sealing joints of dissimilar materials. E. Section 09120 — Ceiling Suspension Systems: Suspension System for Gypsum Board Ceilings. I F. Section 09900 - Painting: Surface finish. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ASTM C36 - Gypsum Wallboard. I B. ASTM C475 - Joint Treatment Materials for Gypsum Wallboard Construction. • C. ASTM C514 - Nails for the Application of Gypsum Wallboard. I D. ASTM C645 - Non -Load (Axial) Bearing Steel Studs, Runners (Track), and Rigid Furring Channels for Screw Application of Gypsum Board. 1 E. ASTM C754 - Installation of Framing Members to Receive Screw Attached Gypsum Wallboard, . Backing Board, or Water Resistant Backing Board. I F. GA -216 - Recommended Specifications for the Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board. G. Gypsum Construction Handbook - Current Edition: by United States Gypsum Company. I 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Applicator: Company specializing in gypsum board systems work approved by manufacturer. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09260 -1 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 09260 GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 1 B. Conform to Underwriter Laboratory for fire rating. I C. Provide control joints per United States Gypsum Company's Construction Handbook, current edition. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. 1 B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300: PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEM I A. United States Gypsum. B. National Gypsum Company. C. G -P Gypsum Corporation • - - D. - James Hardie Building Products - Hardirock_ - _ _ _ - . - E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 GYPSUM BOARD MATERIALS .• A. Fire Rated Gypsum Board:. ANSI/ASTM C36; Type 'X' fire resistive, UL rated, 5/8 inch thick; 1 maximum permissible length; ends square cut, tapered and beveled edges. B. Abuse - resistant Gypsum Wallboard Panels: Cellulose fiber reinforced gypsum panels - ASTM I C36 long edges, tapered or beveled. Equivalent fire rating where required. 5/8" thick. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Corner Beads: All metal, galvanized. B. Edge Trim: GA 201 and GA 216; type L bead primed metal galvanized. , C. Joint Materials: ANSI/ASTM C475; GA 201 and GA 216; reinforcing tape, joint compound, adhesive, water, and fasteners. D. Control joints: Roll - formed zinc with tape protected opening 7/16 inch depth, metal perforated flanges each side. • E. Reveal joints: Extruded Aluminum alloy 6063 -T5, clear anodized finish suitable for field painting. Manufacturer: Fry Reglet Corporation. See drawings and details for sizes and profiles used. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09260 -2 ' Printed 07/26/04 • SECTION 09260 • GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS I • 2.04 ACOUSTIC ACCESSORIES A. Acoustic Sealant: Type recommended for use in conjunction with gypsum board - Refer to Section 07900 - Joint. Sealants. PART 3 ' EXECUTION I 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that site conditions are ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on I shop drawings. . B. Verify that moisture content in framing lumber or blocking does not exceed 14 percent. I C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces and substrate. 3.02 GYPSUM BOARD INSTALLATION ' I A. Install gypsum board in accordance with GA 201, GA 216 and UL requirements. I B. Interior Gypsum Board — Refer to Schedule below for locations of different Levels of Finish: • 1. Prefill: • -- a) • • Use setting -type joint compound. Mix joint compound aceording to - - - • manufacturer's directions: - b) Fill joints between boards flush to top of eased or beveled edge. c) Fill joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings in fire -rated partitions. Wipe off excess compound and allow compound. to harden. I d) 2. • Taping (Level 1): a) Butter taping compound into inside comers and joints. b) Center tape over joints and press down into fresh compound. • c) Remove excess compound. d) Tape joints of gypsum board above suspended ceilings. I 3. First coat (Level 2): a) Use taping or all- purpose drying -type compound. b) Immediately after bedding tape, apply skim coat of compound and allow to dry I c) completely in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply first coat of compound over flanges of trim and accessories, and over • exposed fastener heads and finish level with board surface. • 1 4. Second coat (Level 3): After first coat treatment is dried, apply second coat of compound over tape and trim, feathering compound 2 inches beyond edge of first coat. . I 5. Third coat (Level 4): a) After second coat has dried, sand surface lightly and apply thin finish coat to joints, fasteners and trim, feathering compound 2 inches beyond edge of second I coat. . b) Allow third coat to dry. Apply additional compound, and touch -up and sand, to provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for application of finish. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09260 -3 Printed 07/26/04 • i . SECTION 09260 • GYPSUM BOARD SYSTEMS 1 6. Skim coat (Level 5): a) Apply skim coat of topping or all- purpose drying -type compound over exposed I surfaces of gypsum board. b) After skim coat has dried, touch -up and sand to provide surface free of visual defects, tool marks, and ridges, and ready for application of fmish.] , C. Install Abuse resistant gypsum board allocations shown on Drawings. D. Erect single layer gypsum board in most economical direction, with ends and edges occurring over • I firm bearing. ' E. Erect single layer fire rated gypsum board vertically, with edges and ends occurring over firm bearing. F. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to metal framing. • G. Double Layer Applications: Secure second layer to first with fasteners. Il H. . Place corner beads at all external corners unless indicated otherwise. Use longest practical length. I Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials. I. Place control joints floor to ceiling in long partition runs, in ceilings and soffits from fascia to wall • or relite at not over 30 feet on center consistent with lines of building spaces, and from each corner - = . . - of door header to ceiling unless noted otherwise on. the Drawings.. -_ - -. _ _ : - — J. Install aluminum reveal shapes as detailed. . 1 K. Joint Sealants: Seal all exposed joints of dissimilar materials. with Sealant as outlined under Section 07900 — Joint Sealants. 3.03 JOINT TREATMENT (At Locations Scheduled to Receive Paint Finish) A. Provide levels of gypsum board fmish for locations as follows, in accordance with Gypsum I Association GA 214, "Recommended Specification: Levels of Gypsum Board Finish" and GA 216 "Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board ". 1. Level 1: Ceiling plenum areas and concealed areas, except provide higher level of fmish as required to comply with fire resistance ratings and acoustical ratings. 2. • Level 2: Gypsum board substrate at surfaces scheduled to receive tile, except remove tool marks and ridges. •3. Level 4: Gypsum board surfaces in all Janitors Closets, Electrical Closets and Storage I/ Rooms. . 4. Level 5: Gypsum board surfaces in all areas except as noted above. 3.04 TOLERANCES I A. Maximum Variation from True Flatness: 1/8 inch in 10 feet in any direction. I 3.05 FINISH • A. Smooth finish, ready for paint provided under Section 09900. 1 END OF SECTION 1 • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09260 -4 1 • Printed 07/26/04 I SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS PART 1 GENERAL 1. 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS . • . A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other•Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Non -rated suspended metal grid ceiling system. I B. Acoustical ceiling tiles. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS I. A. Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend. B. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems. I C. Division 15 - Grilles, Registers and Diffusers: Air diffusion devices in ceiling system. D. Division 16 - Interior Lighting Fixtures: Light fixtures in ceiling system. - " ` . ° 1.04 REFERENCES_ .- . - - - - • 0- _ -. - _ - A. ASTM C423 - Standard Test Method of Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. I B. ASTM E90 - Standard Method of Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound Transmission Loss of Building Partitions. C. ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. D. ASTM E795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests. g P g rP I E. ASTM C635 - Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in Panel Ceilings. F. ASTM C636 - Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay -in 1 Panels. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 - A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacture of ceiling suspension system and ceiling tile with three years minimum experience. 1 B. Installer: Company with three years minimum experience and approved by manufacturer. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I A. Conform to 1997 Uniform Building Code Standards with Oregon Amendments and seismic zone •3 requirements for lateral bracing. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 • TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT'23J 09511 -1 Printed 7!26!2004 • SECTION 09511 •I SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide product data on metal grid system components and acoustic units. C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D. Submit one sample 12x12 inch in size, illustrating material and fmish of acoustic units. ' • E. Submit one sample each, 24 inches long, of suspension system main runner, cross runner and edge trim. 1 F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.08 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Maintain uniform•temperature of minimum 60 degrees F, and humidity of 20 to 40 percent prior to, during, and after installation. , 1 O9 SEQUENCING /SCHEDULING • A. Do not install acoustical ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust 1 . _ - . - generating. activities: have terminated, and overhead. work is completed, tested,.and approved. B. Schedule installation of acoustic units after interior wet work is dry. 1.10 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide extra quantity of acoustic units equal to 5 percent of total installed for each type of job. PART 2 .PRODUCTS 1 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - SUSPENSION SYSTEM A. Donn Products Inc. B. Chicago Metallic Corp. C. Armstrong Contract Interiors. D. Celotex. 1 E. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.02 SUSPENSION SYSTEM MATERIALS 1 A. Grid: ASTM C635, intermediate non -rated assembly exposed T; components die cut and interlocking. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09511 -2 ' Printed 7/26/2004 • t SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS B. Accessories: Stabilizer bars, clips, splices, edge moldings and holddown clips required for suspended grid system. C. Grid Materials and'Finish: Commercial quality cold rolled steel with galvanized coating. Color: I White. D. Face Dimension: Provide 15/16 inch wide grid similar to "DX" by Donn Products, Inc. E. Support Channels and Hangers: Galvanized steel; size and type to suit application, to rigidly secure acoustic ceiling system including integral mechanical and electrical components with maximum deflection of 1/360. Conform to applicable code requirements for lateral bracing of grid 1 and light fixtures. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS - ACOUSTIC UNITS I A. Armstrong Contract Interiors. • B. USG Corporation. C. Celotex • I D. ' Substitutions: Conform to Section 01600. ° - - == 2.04 =- ACOUSTIC UNIT MATERIALS -- " Iii. -- A. Acoustical Panels, Non - Rated, (ACT -1): r . 1. Size: 24 x 48 inches. 2. Thickness: 5/8 inch. 3. Composition: Mineral fiber. 4. Light Reflectance: LR -1. 5. NRC Range: 0.55 to 0.65. 6. STC Range: 35 to 39. • 7. Fire Hazard Classification: 0 -25 Flame spread rating. 8. Edge: Square. • 9. Surface Color: White. I 10. Pattern: "Radar No. 2310" by USG, "Cortega" #769 by Armstrong, "Boroque"# BET 197 by Celotex. 1 B. Acoustic Panels Non -Rated (Scheduled as ACT -2). 1. Size: 24 x 48. 2. Thickness: 3/4 inch. El 3. Composition: Mineral fiber. 4. Light Reflectance: Minimum L.R. 0.80. 5. NRC Range: 0.50 to 0.60. 6. STC Range: 35 -39. I 7. Fire Hazard Classification: 0 -25 (ASTM E1264) 8. Edge: Angled Tegular. 9. Surface Color: White I 10. Pattern: Scored for 24 x 24 inch appearance. "Second Look II" #2767 by Armstrong; Hytone Customline #BQCL - 224 by Celotex; Two /24 #3575 Omni Fissured by USG. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09511 -3 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 09511 SUSPENDED ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS • 1 C. Substitutions, prior to bid date and under provisions of Section 01640. • 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSPECTION I • A. Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. • B. . Verify that layout of hangers will not interfere with other work. • C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. , 3.02 INSTALLATION • A. Install system in accordance with ASTM C636 and as supplemented in this Section. 1 B. ' Install system capable of supporting imposed loads to a deflection of 1/360 maximum. C. Install after major above ceiling work is complete. Coordinate the location of hangers with other work. D. Hang system independent of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where carrying members 1 • _ - _ • _ _ are spliced, avoid visible displacement of face plane of adjacent members. _- - - - E. - Where ducts or other equipment prevent the regular spacing of hangers, reinforce the nearest affected hangers and related carrying channels to span the extra distance. F. Locate system on room axis according to reflected plan. G. Do not support components on main runners or cross runners if weight causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability. Support fixture loads by supplementary hangers located where required. , H. Do not eccentrically load system, or produce rotation of runners. • I. Install edge molding at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using longest practical lengths. . Miter corners. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other interruptions. J. Laterally brace entire suspension system per seismic requirements of the UBC. I K. Fit acoustic units and acoustic panels in place, free from damaged edges or other defects detrimental to appearance and function. L. Install acoustic units level and acoustic panels, in uniform plane, and free from damage, twist, warp and dents. ' • 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Variation from Flat and Level Surface: 1/8 inch in 10 ft. END OF SECTION 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09511 -4 1 Printed 7/26/2004 1 SECTION 09520 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS • PART GENERAL • 1 1.01 . GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other. Conditions and . other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES • I A. Fabric wrapped fiberglass wall panels B. Thermo- plastic molded diffuser panels and absorption panels. I i 1.03 ' RELATED SECTIONS Section 09260 - Gypsum Board Systems: Gypsum board substrate. • I A. B. Section 09950 - Wall Covering: Fabric for wall panels. I 1.04 REFERENCES - A. ASTM C423 - Standard Test. Method of Sound Absorption and Sound Absorption Coefficients by the Reverberation Room Method. . B. ASTM E90 - Standard Method of Laboratory Measurement of Airborne. Sound Transmission Loss _ _ - . of Building Partitions. - . C . ASTM E413 - Classification for Determination of Sound Transmission Class. I • D. ASTM E795 - Standard Practices for Mounting Test Specimens During Sound Absorption Tests. E. ASTM E84 - Test of Surface Burning Characteristics. I F. NFPA - Life Safety Code Requirements for Interior Finish. SUBMITTALS I 1.05 A. Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 01300. 1 • B. . Submit two.6" x 6" samples of each fabric wrapped wall panel in size illustrating edge detail, upholstery method and color of specified fabric. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Pack and ship to avoid damage according to manufacturer's recommendations: 1. _Factory fmish and assemble all components before shipment. I 2. Ship components in sealed, labeled cartons. • B. Do not accept damaged products at the site. I 1.07 WARRANTY A. Provide manufacturer's written standard one -year warranty against manufacturing defects. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09520 -1 Printed 7/26/2004 • SECTION 09520 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS PART 2 PRODUCTS • 1 2.01 ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS A. AWP -1: Approved Manufacturers: 1. "Quiet- Touch" by JASCO, Inc. 2. Type AP 1 by Decoustics 3. "Soundsoak -85" by Armstrong World Industries: 4. "CaPaul WP -1" by Acoustiflex Corporation. 5. Silent Wall Panels SW 100 by Noise Control Products. , 6. Sound Control Panels by Sound Reduction Corporation. 7. Tibbet Series 125 by Tibbett, Inc. 8. A100WP by Wall Technology, Inc. • 9. "Silencer Sound Panel" by Sabin Sound Products I • B. AWP -2: Approved Manufacturers: 1. Jasco Manufacturering — "Quiet Touch Extreme ". 111 2. Sabin Sound Products — "Silencer Sound Impact ". • 3. Substitutions: Prior to bid date and under the provisions of Section 01600. C. AWP -3: Approved Manufacturers: 1. Wenger Corporation. 2. Substitutions: Prior to bid date and under the provisions of Section 01600. • -D. AWP-4: Approved Manufacturers: - b - 1. Jasco Manufacturering — "Quiet Touch Baffle". ._ ___ - 2. . Sabin Sound Products. 3. Substitutions: Prior to bid date and under the provisions of Section 01600. • 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Aluminum Trim at AWP -4: Extruded aluminum, 6063 -T52 alloy, 2 '/4 inch width by 7/8 inch height. Mill Finish. B. Construction Adhesive:. To suit application. C. Electrolytic Protection: Where aluminum abuts members with metals of different galvanic range provide neoprene isolation between materials. 2.03 FABRICATION A. AWP -1, AWP -2 and AWP -4: 1. Bond fabric to wall panels and return to back of panel to provide fully fmished edges and upholstered corners. Insure flat, wrinkle -free surface. 2. Thickness: a. AWP -1 and AWP -2: 1 inch. b. AWP -4 and AWP -5: 2 inches. . 3. Mounting Method: a. AWP -1, AWP -2 and AWP -5: Manufacturer's standard. b. AWP -4: No mounting clips, framed in aluminum. • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09520 -2 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 09520 I ACOUSTICAL WALL PANELS B. AWP -3: 1. Surface shall be 0.125 inch thermo- molded plastic 2. Glass fiber board glued to inside surface. 3. Color: as selected from manufacturer's 50 colors. 4. Thickness: 1 1/6 inch minimum. • . 5. Mounting Method: Manufacturer's standard. I C. Fiberglass Materials: 1. Non - combustible; dimensionally stable, fiberglass panels. I 2. Panel Quantity and Size: As shown on Drawings. 3. Density:. 6 pounds per cubic foot minimum . 4. Edge Detail: Half - bevel, chemically hardened . I 5. . NRC: 0.75 minimum. 6. Flame Spread Rating (ASTM E84): Class A. D. Fabric for wall panels AWP -1, AWP -2, AWP -3, AWP -4 and AWP -5: Provide by Section 09950 - Wall Covering. • E. Aluminum Trim at AWP -4: Frame 4 sides of Acoustical Wall Panel with aluminum trim, miter all I corners and de -burr and ease sharp edges. Attach to baffle using appropriate construction adhesive. I PART 3 EXECUTION . _ -3.0L '- INSPECTION -.- -_ ' PI - - - - . A. - Verify that existing conditions are ready to receive work. - B . Do not install materials unless building has been properly closed and has achieved standard I occupancy temperature of 65 - 85 degrees F, and not more than 80 percent humidity. C. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions. 1 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install units level, in uniform plane-and free from twist and warp. ' B. • Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions and recommended mounting devices. 1 C. Install AWP -4 square and level in steel framework with appropriate fasteners for situation. Provide electrolytic protection between aluminum and steel. END OF SECTION 1 I • I I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09520 -3 Printed 7/26/2004 i . SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING III PART 1 GENERAL - . • I 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and I Division 1 General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES I A. Resilient Base. I B. Resilient Vinyl Composition Tile Flooring. C. Accessories. 1 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 01400 — Quality Control: Testing of slabs for content of moisture and alkalinity. B. Section 02072 - Minor Demolition for Remodeling: Removal of existing floor finishes. Section 03201 - Reinforcing and Concrete: Floor Substrate. I C. :. D. Section 09001- Finish Legend. _ pi _ E. Section 09680 - Carpeting: Transitions between materials. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. B. FS L -F -475 - Floor Covering, vinyl Surface (Tile and Roll), with backing. 1 FS SS -T -312 - Tile, Floor: Asphalt, Rubber, Vinyl, Vinyl Composition. I D. FS SS -W -40 - Wall Base: Rubber. E. Meet Requirements of Resilient Floor Covering Institute. 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Samples: 1. Submit two box samples or chain sets for each floor material specified. I 2. Submit two chain sets of base color for color selection specified by Architect. C. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature and installation instructions. I . I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09650 -1 Printed 07/26/04 • SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING 1 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE • A. Manufacturer: Provide each type of resilient flooring product as produced by a single ' manufacturer, including recommended primers, adhesives, sealants, edge strips and other • accessories as required. B. Subcontractor: Subcontract the Work of this Section to a firm specializing in resilient flooring Work, which is acceptable to the manufacturers of the products involved, and which can demonstrate at least 5 years prior experience in successful installations similar to the Work , required herein. 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS ' A. Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel/smoke rating requirements in accordance with ASTM E84. -1.08 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit cleaning and maintenance data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Include maintenance procedures, recommended maintenance materials, and suggested schedule for cleaning, stripping, and re- waxing. _ 109_ = ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS - _ - - -- _ - _ - A. Store materials for three days prior to installation in area of installation to achieve temperature stability. B. Maintain ambient temperature required by adhesive manufacturer three days prior to, during, and 24 hours after installation of materials. 1.10 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Provide extra stock of flooring and base equal to 5 percent of total installed for each type color on job. 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 RESILIENT VINYL COMPOSITION TILE FLOORING (VCT) , A. Manufacturers: . 1. Mannington Designer Essentials 2. Comparable products by the following Manufacturer's — must match color selected. a) Armstrong World Industries. 3. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. ' • B. Materials - Vinyl Composition Tile: FS SS -T -312, Type IV. Industry Standards: ASTM F1066 . Composition 1, Class 2. Fire Test: ASTM E648 Critical Radiant Flux 0.045 Watts /cm Smoke. Test: ASTM E62, 450 or less. Composition 1: 12 x 12 inch size, 1/8 inch thick. All tile from one batch, excessive color variation will not be accepted. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09650 -2 Printcd 07/26/04 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING .111 C. Color: Refer to Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend. ' 2.02 BASE • • A. Manufacturers: 1. "Wallflowers" by Flexco Company. 2. "Pinnacle SBR" by Roppe. 3. "RubberMyte" by Burke/Mercer Products Co., Inc. 4. "Color Integrated Wall Base" by Armstrong. 5. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. • ' B. Rubber Base Materials: ASTM F1861 — Type TS, Thermoset Vulcanized Rubber; continuous, 4 inch high; 1/8 inch thick; top set coved. Provide factory molded corners. C. Color: Refer to Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Subfloor Filler: White premix latex; type recommended by flooring material manufacturer. B. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof, low solvent and low "VOC's "; types recommended by I flooring manufacturer to suit material and substrate conditions. C. - _ Reducer Strips: As manufactured by Flexco Company, or approved, color as selected by Architect - - - from full color line: 1. VCT to Carpet: "No. 64" tile and carpet joiner. 2. VCT to Concrete:. "No. 81" vinyl edge guard. • PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ' A. Verify that surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8 inch in 10 ft, and are ready to receive Work. B: Verify compatibility of resilient flooring adhesive to substrate. • C. Testing of concrete slab moisture: Shall be done under Section 09605 — Concrete Floor Vapor Emission Sealer. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing substrate and site conditions. 3.02 PREPARATION A. Prepare the substrate according to the material manufacturer's installation instructions. Remove subfloor ridges and bumps. Fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes, and other defects with subfloor filler. B. Apply, trowel, and float filler to leave a smooth, flat, hard surface. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09650-3 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 09650 RESILIENT FLOORING 1 C. Prohibit traffic from area until filler is cured. D. Vacuum clean substrate. " it E. Apply primer to substrate surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. 3.03 INSTALLATION - TILE FLOORING A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. • B. Match tiles for color and pattern by using tile from cartons in same sequence as manufactured and packaged. Broken, cracked, chipped or deformed tiles are not acceptable. C. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of materials before initial set. D. Set flooring in place, press with heavy roller to attain full adhesion. 1 E. Install tile to square grid pattern with all joints aligned, with pattern grain parallel for all units and parallel to length of room. Allow minimum 1/2 full size tile width at room or area perimeter. 1 F. Terminate flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish is dissimilar. Install edge strips at unprotected or exposed edges, and where flooring terminates. G. Scribe flooring to walls _columns cabinets floor outlets, and other a urtenances to roduce tight - - . g PP p g _ - joints. - 3.04 INSTALLATION - BASE A. Determine base types from Section 09000 Interior Finish Legend, and scheduled locations from I Interior Elevation Drawings. B. Fit joints tight and vertical. Maintain minimum measurement of 18 inches between joints. Install as long lengths as practicable. C. Miter internal corners. D. Install base on solid backing. Bond tight to wall and floor surfaces. Apply to all permanent fixtures in room on areas where base is scheduled. E. Scribe and fit to door frames and other interruptions. 1 3.05 PROTECTION A. Prohibit traffic on floor finish for 48 hours after installation. 3.06 CLEANING 1 A. Remove excess adhesive from base, and wall surfaces without damage. B. Clean, seal, and wax floor and base surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 END OF SECTION 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09650 -4 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 09900 PAINTING I PART 1 GENERAL ,Il . . . 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I . A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES • ' I - A. `Surface preparation. - r I B. Surface fmish schedule. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS • I A. Section 01500 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls: Temporary heating and lighting. B. Section 05500 - Metal Fabrications: Miscellaneous steel items. . I C. Section 06200 - Finish Carpentry: Finishing of trim, wainscot, and shelving. D. Section 06410 — Custom Casework: Painting of Countertop Support Brackets. -- _ - _ - E. Section 07900 — Joint Sealants :"._Sealants used in conjunction with preparation of painted surface. . 0 . F. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Field painting of shop primed items. G. Section 08210 Wood Doors: Shop Primed Items. I H. Section'08305 - Access Doors: Field painting of miscellaneous doors and access panels. I. Section 09001 - Interior Finish Legend: Color Selections. J. Section 09260 - Gypsum Board. Systems: Wall and ceiling surfaces. I K. Division 15 - Mechanical: Exposed non - prepainted items. L. Division 16 - Electrical: Exposednon- prepainted items. I 1.04 REFERENCES A. ASTM D2016 - Test Method for Moisture Content of Wood. B. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC) Manual. I C. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) Manual. D. Painting and Decorating Contractors of America (PDCA) Standard P3 for designation of Paint 11 1 Colors. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -1 Printed 7/26/04 0 SECTION 09900 • 1 PAINTING ' I • 1.05 DEFINITIONS A. Conform to ASTM D 16 for interpretation of terms used in this Section. 1 1.06 QUALITY ASSURANCE I • A. -. Applicator: Company specializing in commercial painting special coatings and finishing with five years experience. B. Conform to recommendations of the PDCA and SSPC manuals. I 1.07 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS I • A. Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel/smoke rating requirements for finishes. B. Coatings must comply with Oregon State Department of Environmental Quality "VOC Area I Source" Rules. 1.08 SUBMITTALS •, A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. B. Provide product data for each step or process described in 09900, Part 3 - Schedule: Exterior I - - - -- Surfaces and,Interior Surfaces. - - - - . - - - - _ - - - - - C. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. D 4 . Submit two "draw downs" 8 x 8 inch in size for each color and finishing product scheduled, for Architects approval. Do no work until submittals have been reviewed and approved. E. Provide sample of concrete sealer sand finish for Architect's review prior to starting application. Refer to Part 3 — Schedule: Interior Surfaces. F. Submit manufacturer's application instructions under provisions of Section 01300. G. • Submit finish samples of all wood products, finished under this section. Obtain samples of wood ' products from Section 06200. — Finish Carpentry. 1.09 FIELD SAMPLES - I A. Locate where directed by Architect. B. Apply 100 square feet of each coating and each paint at location on project directed by Architect. I C. Accepted sample will demonstrate minimum standard for work, and may remain as part of the Work. I D. Simulate finished lighting conditions for review of field samples. 1.10 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING I . A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -2 I Printed 7/26/04 0 i . SECTION 09900 PAINTING I ' B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Deliver products to site in sealed and labeled containers; inspect to verify acceptance. I D. Container labeling to include manufacturer's name, type of paint, brand name, manufacturer's batch number, brand code, coverage, surface preparation, drying time, cleanup, color designation, and instructions for mixing and reducing. I E. Store paint materials at minimum ambient temperature of 45 degrees F and a maximum of 90 degrees F, in well ventilated area, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. I F. Take precautionary measures to prevent fire hazards and spontaneous combustion. G. Confine the storage of paints and allied materials to a space particularly assigned, and keep such I space neat and clean at all times. • H. Open containers only as needed, and keep partially filled containers tightly closed when not in use. I 1.11 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain surface and ambient temperatures above 45 degrees Fahrenheit for 24 hours before, during, and 48 hours after application of finishes, - - - - unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions - - -- - - - - - - - , - _ __ : -- ._ - . 0 _ . B. Do not apply exterior coatings during rain or snow, or when relative humidity is above 85 percent, or to damaged or wet surfaces unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. C. Minimum Application Temperatures 'for Latex Paints: 45 degrees F for interiors; 50 degrees Fahrenheit for exterior; unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. D. Provide lighting level of 80 ft candles measured mid- height at substrate surface. I 1.12 COLORS • I A. . Colors of paints and shades of stain shall match approved control samples. B. Locations for all deep tone accent colors are shown on the Drawings. 1.13 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide one gallon in unopened, original container of each color and surface texture to Owner, I minimum. B. Label each container with color, color mix formula, texture and room locations, in addition to the - manufacturer's label. 1 • I 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -3 Printed 7/26/04 • SECTION 09900 PAINTING PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 GENERAL I, A. Products for each general purpose must be of same manufacturer. B. Do not use products of different manufacturers over one another, except for shop prime coats specified in other Sections. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - PAINT A. Benjamin Moore. B. ICI / Fuller O'Brien. C. Kelly Moore. ' • D. Miller Paint. E. Rodda Paint Co. F. Sherwin Williams. H. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. - -_ 2.03 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS — INDUSTRIAL GRADE COATINGS A. Tnemec B. Amneron C. Carboline • D. DeVoe Coatings E. Pittsburgh Paints, Industrial Maintenance High Performance Coatings. F. Sherwin Williams Industrial and Marine Coatings. ' G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 2.04 MATERIALS A. Provide the best quality grade of the various types of coatings as regularly manufactured by • approved paint materials manufacturers. B. Coatings: • 1. Ready mixed, except field catalyzed coatings. Process pigments to a soft paste consistency, capable of being readily and uniformly dispersed to a homogeneous coating. 2. Good flow and brushing properties; capable of drying or curing free of streaks or sags. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -4 1 Printed 7/26/04 SECTION 09900 PAINTING i C. Accessory Materials: Linseed oil, shellac, turpentine, paint thinners and other materials not specifically indicated but required to achieve the finishes specified, of commercial quality. PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 INSPECTION A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work as instructed by the product manufacturer. I 13. Examine surfaces scheduled to be finished prior to commencement of work. Report any condition that may potentially affect proper application.. ' C. Measure moisture content of surfaces using an electronic moisture meter. Do not apply finishes unless moisture content of surfaces are below the following maximums: 1. Gypsum Wallboard: 12 percent. 2. Interior Located. Wood: 15 percent, measure in accordance with ASTM D2016. :' 3: Exterior Located Wood: 15 percent, measured in accordance with ASTM D2016. D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. 3.02 MATERIALS TO BE FINISHED I " - A. The following receives no finish except as indicated: 1. - Metals such as: Brass, bronze, copper, plated metals, stainless steel. 2. Plastic Laminate surfacing. 3. Glass, unless otherwise noted. • I 4. Materials having complete factory finish, such as electrical switch plates, lighting fixtures, finish hardware, and the like. I B. All other surfaces are to be finished except as listed above or otherwise scheduled or noted. 3.03 PREPARATION I " A. • Previously painted galvanized and primed steel surfaces: Remove rust and prepare surfaces in accordance with PCDA Manual. Feather edges of existing paint and prime surfaces with compatible primer. I B. Previously painted or stained wood surfaces: Remove all oil, grease, silicone, wax and other . foreign matter. Moisture meter reading shall be no more than 12 percent, sand surfaces and feather edges between paint layers or between paint and wood. Remove all dust and grit with tack rag. Prime bare wood surfaces. - C. Remove electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings prior to preparing surfaces or I finishing. • D. Correct minor defects and clean surfaces which affect work of this Section. i' E. Shellac and seal marks which may bleed through surface finishes. F. Gypsum Board Surfaces: Latex fill minor defects. Spot prime defects after repair. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -5 Printed 7/26/04 SECTION 09900 PAINTING • 1 G. Galvanized Surfaces: Prepare in accordance with SSPC -SP1 Solvent cleaning. ' • H. Impervious Surfaces: Remove mildew by scrubbing with solution of tri- sodium phosphate and bleach. Rinse with clean water and allow surface to dry. I. Uncoated Steel and Iron Surfaces: Prepare m accordance with SSPC -SP3 Power tool cleaning. J. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Prepare in accordance with SSPC -SP2 or SP3 Hand tool cleaning. ' 1 Feather edges to make touch -up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC- SPI Solvent Cleaning. Prime bare steel surfaces. • K. Interior Wood Items Painted: Wipe off dust and grit prior to priming. Seal knots, pitch streaks, • and sappy sections with sealer. Fill nail holes and cracks after primer has dried; sand between coats. Back prime all wood surfaces which will be in contact with moist or damp areas. L. Shop Primed Steel Surfaces: Prepare in accordance with SSPC -SP2 or SP3 Hand tool cleaning. Feather edges to make touch -up patches inconspicuous. Clean surfaces in accordance with SSPC- SP 1 Solvent Cleaning. Prime bare steel surfaces. M. Joint Sealants: Seal all exposed joints of dissimilar materials with Sealant as recommended by paint manufacturer and as outlined under Section 07900 — Joint Sealants. N: - Verify that Fiberboard Wainscot Panels have all exposed sides sanded and eased with out.any sand - _ marks. _ O. Metal Door Frames: 1. After fasteners are field welded remove rust, spatter, and flux deposits. 2. Clean steel and prime fasteners and frames affected by welding with compatible primer. • 3. Apply Bondo to frame to conceal fasteners, sand smooth and prepare for paint. • 3.04 PROTECTION A. Protect elements surrounding the work of this Section from damage or disfiguration. B. Repair damage to other surfaces caused by work of this Section. 1 C. Furnish drop cloths, shields, and protective methods to prevent spray or droppings from disfiguring other surfaces. D. Remove empty paint containers from site. 3.05 MIXING AND TINTING A. Deliver paints and enamels ready -mixed to jobsite. B. Job -mix and job -tint only when acceptable to Architect. • C. Mix only m clean, rust resistant containers. D. Use tinting colors recommended by manufacturer for specific type of finish. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -6 Printed 7/26/04 SECTION 09900 I PAINTING 3.06 APPLICATION I A. Apply products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Do not apply finishes to surfaces that are not dry. C. Apply each coat to uniform finish. • 1 D. Apply each coat of paint slightly darker than preceding coat unless otherwise approved. E. Sand lightly between coats to achieve required finish. F. Allow applied coat to dry before next coat is applied. ' G. Prime back surfaces and edges of interior woodwork with primer paint according to type of scheduled finish. H. Adequately ventilate areas following manufacturer's recommendations. Utilize forced ventilation 1 if necessary. . I. At existing walls scheduled to be repainted, walls shall be painted from nearest inside or outside corner to nearest inside or outside comer and from floor to ceiling. -3.07 _- FINISHING MECHANICAL AND ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT - -. - - - pi _ A. • Refer to appropriate Sections in Division 15 and 16 for schedule of color coding and identification banding of equipment, ductwork, piping, and conduit. 1 B. Paint shop primed equipment. C. Remove unfinished louvers; grilles, covers, and access panels on mechanical and electrical II components_ and paint separately. D. Prime and paint insulated and exposed pipes, conduit, boxes, insulated and exposed ducts, hangers, brackets, collars and supports, and except where items are prefinished. I E. Replace identification markings on mechanical or electrical equipment when painted accidentally. I F. Paint interior surfaces of air ducts, and convector and heating cabinets that are visible through grilles and louvers with one coat of flat black paint, to limit of sight line. Paint dampers exposed behind louvers, grilles, and convector and heating cabinets to match face panels. 1 G. Paint exposed conduit and electrical equipment occurring in finished areas. H. Paint both sides and edges of plywood backboards for electrical before installing equipment. I ' I. • Replace electrical plates, hardware, light fixture trim, and fittings removed prior to finishing. I J. Paint exterior and interior exposed mechanical ductwork. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -7 Printed 7/26/04 SECTION 09900 PAINTING • • 3.08 CLEANING • A. As Work proceeds, promptly remove paint where spilled, splashed, or spattered. • B. During progress of Work maintain premises free of unnecessary accumulation of tools, equipment, surplus materials, and debris. C. Collect waste, cloths, and material which may constitute a fire hazard, place in closed metal containers and remove daily from site. 3.10 SCHEDULE - INTERIOR SURFACES A. Steel- Shop Primed 1. Touch up with original primer. ■ . 2. Two coats alkyd enamel semi- gloss. 3. Minimum dry thickness: 4.1 mils total. B. Gypsum Board: Paint 1. One coat polyvinyl- acetate primer sealer. 2. Two coats interior latex enamel semi- gloss, apply final coat with roller. 3. Minimum dry thickness: 3.3 mils each coat. C. Wood: Transparent (misc. exposed woodwork).. - . - 1. One coat nitrocellulose lacquer sealer, sandable, stearated typed for catalyzed - _ lacquer system. - 2. Sand with 220 grit stearated paper. - 3. Two (2) coats clear modified alkyd nitrocellulose high solids catalyzed lacquer, 20 percent solid by volume minimum; semi -gloss finish. D. Fiberboard Panels: Transparent (WSCT -1; applied with a short nap roller.) 1. One (1) coat Benwood Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane #423. 2. Sand with 220 grit stearated paper. 3. Two (2) coats Benwood Stays Clear Acrylic Polyurethane #423; semi -gloss finish. END OF SECTION • 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION % REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC • JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09900 -8 Punted 7/26/04 1 SECTION 09950 WALL COVERINGS 1 PART 1 GENERAL II . 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. • 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES . I A. Supply of selected wall coverings. B. Supply and Installation of selected wall coverings. 1.03 RELATED WORK FURNISHED BUT NOT INSTALLED UNDER THIS SECTION I A. Section 10100 - Visual Display Boards: Wall Covering for tackboards. 1 B. Section 10120 — Tacksurfaces: Wall Covering for tacksurfaces. 1.04 REFERENCES A. ANSI /ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.05 . ASSURANCE _ _ • PI A. • Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing commercial wall fabrics with five .years documented experience. 1 B. Applicator: Company specializing in installing wall fabrics with three years experience. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel/smoke ratings of 25/35/50 when tested to ANSI/ASTM E84. 1.07 SUBMITTALS . A. Submit product data and samples under provisions of Section 01300. • 1 B. Provide product data on wall covering and adhesive. C. Submit two samples of wall covering 12x12 inch in size illustrating color, finish, and texture. D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under P rovisions of Section 01300. I E. Submit test reports verifying flame /fuel/smoke ratings, when tested by an agency approved by authority having jurisdiction. .I 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09950 -1 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 09950 • WALL COVERINGS II • 1.08 FIELD SAMPLES 1 A. Provide a three panel field sample panel, full height, illustrating installed wall covering, joint seaming technique.• • B. Locate where directed by Architect. . • C. Accepted sample may remain as part of the Work. 1 1.09 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. 1 B. Store and protect. products under provisions of Section 01600. C. Inspect roll materials on site to verify acceptance. D. Protect packaged adhesive from temperature cycling and cold temperatures. 1 E. Do not store roll goods on end. 1.10 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Provide continuous ventilation and heating facilities to maintain substrate surface and ambient - - temperatures above 60 degrees F, unless required otherwise by manufacturer's instructions. . ; B. Do not apply adhesive when substrate surface temperature or ambient temperature is below 60 degrees F or relative humidity is above 40 percent. C. Maintain these conditions 24 hours before, during, and after installation of adhesive wall covering. D. Provide lighting level of 80 measured mid- height at substrate surfaces. 1 1.11 EXTRA STOCK A. Provide 10 lineal feet of each color of wall covering. 1 B. Package and label each roll by destination room number; store where directed. • 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS - VINYL WALLCOVERING 1 A. Vinyl Wall Covering: Fabric roll stock, conforming to the following: 1. Total Weight: . 21 oz. /lin. yd. . 2. Fabric: Scrim 3. Vinyl Weight: 18 oz. lin. yd. 4. Roll Width: 54 inches 5. Breaking Strength: 70 x 65 6. Tear Strength: 37'x 27 7. Pattern: "Muratone" by Koroseal. ' I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09950 -2 I Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 09950 WALL COVERINGS I 8. Federal Specification: CCC -W -408 Type II 9. Vinyl Backing: Apply vinyl backing to fabric. I 10. UL Rating ASTM E -84 Tunnel Test, Class A • 11. Color: As selected by Architect from full line. Refer to Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend. Two colors may be selected, one color I maxirnum each tacksurface. Substitutions: Under provisons of Section 01600. I PART .3 EXECUTION I 3.01 DELIVERY OF GOODS A. Turn fabric over to Sections listed in Part I for installation. B. Install vinyl wall covering in locations shown on drawings. 1 3.02 PREPARATION A. Wall Covering: 1. Fill cracks and smooth irregularities with filler; sand smooth. 2. Remove electrical, telephone, wall plates and covers: 3_ Vacuum clean surfaces free of loose particles 3.03 INSTALLATION _ pi A. Apply adhesive and wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 1 13. Apply wall covering smooth, without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps. Eliminate air pockets and ensure full bond to substrate surface. Butt edges tight. C. Horizontal seams are not acceptable. • • D. Do not seam within 2 inches of internal corners or within inches of external corners. E. Install wall covering before installation of bases, cabinets, hardware, or items attached to or spaced slightly from wall surface. Do not install wall covering more than 1/4 inch below top of resilient base. 1 F. Where wall covering tucks into door frame reveals, or metal wallboard or plaster stops, apply covering with contact adhesive within 6 inches of wall covering termination. Ensure full contact bond. I G. Remove excess wet adhesive from seam before proceeding to next wall covering sheet. Wipe clean with dry cloth. 1 3.04 CLEANING A. Clean wall coverings of excess adhesive, dust, dirt, and other contaminants. B.. Replace wall plates and accessories removed prior to work of this Section. 1 END OF SECTION 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE- MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 09950 -3 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 1 • • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and �. other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the wak specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Metal surfaced dry markerboards. . • B. Vinyl fabric covered tackboards. . • C. Trim and accessories. 1.03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 09950 - Wall Covering: Supply of wall covering for tackboards. 111• 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS • A. Section 05400 - Cold- Formed Metal Framing: Wall Framing and blocking for markerboards and tackboards. pl B. Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend: Colors for vinyl on tackboards. 1.05 REFERENCES A. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Wood Particleboard. B: ASTM B221 - Aluminum -Alloy Extruded Bars, Rods, Wire, Shapes, and Tubes. C. APA - American Plywood Association. D. ASTM A424 - Steel Sheets for Porcelain Enameling. E. • ASTM A526 - Steel Sheet, Zinc - Coated (Galvanized) by the Hot -Dip Process, Commercial Quality. F. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. G. Porcelain Enamel Institute - Performance Specifications for Porcelain Enamel Chalkboards. 1.06 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS A. Conform to applicable code for flame /fuel/smoke rating of 25/35/50 for v_ inyl fabric covered tackboards in accordance with ASTM E84. 1.07 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings product data under provisions of Section 01300. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10100 -1 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS B. • Indicate on shop drawings, wall elevations, dimensions, joint locations, special anchor details. See . Drawings for sizes and locations of each type of markerboard and tackboard. '1 C. Provide product data on markerboards, tackboards, trim and accessories. D. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. 1 E. Submit two 2" x 2" samples in size illustrating materials and fmish, color, and texture of markerboards and trim. F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. 1.08 MAINTENANCE DATA A. Submit maintenance data under provisions of Section 01700. B. Include maintenance information on regular cleaning and stain removal. 1.09 WARRANTY A. Provide 50 year warranty for porcelain fmish on markerboards under provisions of Section 01700. PART 2 PRODUCTS _ ,. _ 2.01. ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS - A. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. • B. Greensteel, Inc. C. Lemco Corp. D. Nelson Adams E. P.B.S. Supply, Inc. 1 F. Indoff Ceramicsteel G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. 1 2.02 MATERIALS A. Steel Sheet: ASTM A424, Type I, commercial quality. • B. Aluminum Extrusions: ASTM B221, 6061 alloy. 1 C. Fiberboard: ASTM C -208, cellulosic, dry type, Class A rated. D. Cork: Fine gram natural cork, homogeneous composition. 1 E. Particleboard: ANSI A208.1; wood chips set with waterproof resin binder, sanded faces. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10100 -2 Printed 7/26/2004 • SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS 1 F. Vinyl Covering: Vinyl roll stock, as supplied under Section 09950 - Wall Covering. G. Backing Sheet: Aluminum sheet, 0.015 inch thick. I H. Adhesives: Waterproof type as recommended by manufacturer. I. Substitutions: Under provision of Section 01600. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Map and Flag Supports: Formed aluminum hooks, at 24" on center sliding type and one flag 1 holder to fit map rail. 2.04 FABRICATION - MARKER BOARDS . A. Finish: Three ply porcelain enamel. B. Outer Face Sheet: Steel, 24 gage. I . C. Core: Particleboard; 1/2 inch thick. • D. Backing Surface: Aluminum sheet. E. Splice Joint: Concealed spline of sheet steel. - - - _ F. - Laminating Adhesive: Moisture resistant thermoplastic type. - G. Sizes: As shown on Drawings. 1 2.05 FABRICATION - TACKBOARD I A. Outer Facing: Cork, 1/4 inch. B. Core: Plywood, 1/4 inch. 1 C. , Laminating Adhesive: Water resistant type. 2.06 • FRAME AND TRIM 1 A. Markerboard and Tackboard Frame:. Extruded aluminum, exposed fasteners; map rail with colored cork (with clear sealer) insert over dry markerboard and tackboard surfaces; 2 inches wide. • 1 B. Chalk tray: Extruded anodized aluminum, one piece, full length of markerboards, 1 inch radius at ends; exposed fasteners. • I • 2.07 FINISHES A. Markerboards: I 1. Glass fibered enamel, baked to vitreous surfaces; Porcelain Enamel Institute, Type A at dry markerboards. 2. Color: #6102UG by Ceramicsteel, basis of specification. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10100 -3 Printed 7/26/2004 • SECTION 10100 VISUAL DISPLAY BOARDS B. Aluminum Frame and Accessories: Anodized to Satin AA AA- M31A31 finish. C. Tackboard: Vinyl wall covering supplied by Section 09950. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSPECTION . A. Verify that surfaces and internal wall blocking is ready to receive work, and opening dimensions are as instructed by the manufacturer. B. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing surfaces. • 3.02 INSTALLATION • A. Install markerboards and tackboards m accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure units level and plumb. 1 C. Butt markerboard panels tight with concealed spline to hairline joint. 3.03 CLEANING A: Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Markerboards: Remove factory applied wax protection from all markerboard surfaces prior to owner occupancy. Remove in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations. END OF SECTION 1 • • 1 1 '11 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10100 -4 Printed 7/26/2004 • CT • SE ION 10120 TACKSURFACES PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES I A. Vinyl covered Tacksurfaces. 1.03 PRODUCTS INSTALLED BUT NOT FURNISHED UNDER THIS SECTION A. Section 09950 - Wall Covering: Supply of wall covering for tacksurfaces. • 1.04 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Blocking and framing for markerboards, tackboards and I , tacksurfaces. B. Section 09001 — Interior Finish Legend: Colors for wall coverings applied to tacksurface. III 1.05 REFERENCES Pi- A. ANSI A208.1 - Mat Formed Particleboard. B. APA - American Plywood Association. o 1 C. ASTM E84 - Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials. 1.06 SUBMITTALS • A. Submit under provisions of Section 01300. B. Product Data: I 1. Submit product data for panel core materials. C. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings which indicate location, panel sizes, and anchorage of tacksurfaces. See Drawings for locations of tacksurface. D. Samples: Submit 8 inch square units of each panel core material. r 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Installer Qualifications: Engage an experienced installer to perform Work of this Section who has 1 specialized in installing fabric covered tacksurface panels similar to those required for this Project. 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 1 . A. Protect vinyl covered tacksurface panels from moisture in shipment, storage and handling. 1 I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10120 -1 Printed 7 /26/2004 SECTION 10120 • .TACKSURFACES. 1.09 PROJECT CONDITIONS A. Environmental Conditions: Do not begin installation until spaces for fabric covered tacksurface 1 panels have been enclosed and maintained at approximately the same temperature and humidity , conditions as planned for occupancy. B. Maintain minimum 60. degrees Fahrenheit temperature and 35 to 65 percent humidity for 48 hours after installation. C. Field Measurements: Check actual wall surfaces by accurate field measurements before fabrication. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURER'S A. Jasco Manufacturing • • B. Claridge Products and Equipment, Inc. 1 C. Greensteel, Inc. D. Lemco Corp. E. Nelson Adams F. Sabin Sound Products G. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01600. I 2.02 MATERIALS A. Panel Substrate: 11, 1. Composition: Mineral Fiber. • 2. Treatments: Factory protection against rot, fungi and moisture absorption. 3. Density 16 to 30 pounds per cubic foot • 4. Thickness: '/2 inch. 5. Size: - Maximum 48 inches wide by height required to fabricate seamless panels to indicated height, refer to drawings. 6. Edge Treatment: Square. 7. Fire rating: Class A. 8. Fiberboard: ASTM C -208, cellulosic, dry type, Class A rated. B. Adhesive: As recommended by manufacturer for vinyl fabric supplied under Section 09950 — Wall Covering. C. Vinyl Fabric: Refer to Sections 09000 — Interior Finish Legend and 09950 — Wall Coverings. ' 2.03 FABRICATION A. Fabricate panels to sizes and configurations as shown on drawings. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10120 -2 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 10120 TACKSURFACES B. Attach vinyl fabric facing to cores to produce installed panels with visible surfaces fully covered and free from waves in weave, wrinkles, sags, blisters, seams and adhesive or foreign matter. C. Edge wrap vinyl fabric facing around edge of tacksurface vertically for butt joint and exposed perimeter edges. Install in 48 inch maximum width by full height of panels. Vertical joints only, I no horizontal joints allowed, except as shown on drawings. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 PREPARATION A. Examine substrates with installer present for compliance with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions affecting performance of fabric covered tacksurface panels. Do not proceed with installation until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected. 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Installation quality. 1. Install tacksurface panels in locations indicated with vertical surfaces and edges plumb, with top edges level and in alignment with other panels. 2. Scribe panels to fit adjoining work accurately at borders and at penetrations. Tuck vinyl fabric facing back into joint and fix in place with adhesive if required. B. Installation of vinyl fabric covered - 1. - Apply adhesive to walls and panels or in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations. 2. Set tacksurface panel on wall and secure with 6D fmish nails to hold in place until adhesive cures. 3.03 CLEANING AND PROTECTION A. Remove all fmish nails holding panels in place after manufacturer recommended curing period. B. Clean panels upon completion of installation to remove dust or foreign materials from the fabric, using dry brush, a vacuum or both. C. Maintain conditions in a manner acceptable to the Manufacturer and Installer that ensures that the tacksurface panels are without damage or deterioration at the time of substantial completion. �. • D. Replace panels that cannot be cleaned and repaired, in a manner acceptable to the Architect, prior to the time of substantial completion. END OF SECTION • 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL TI PACKAGE MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10120 -3 Printed 7/26/2004 t SECTION 10522 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 1 PART1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS I A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES: I A. Fire extinguisher cabinets. 1 B. . Fire extinguishers. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS: 1 A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Stud blocking in wall. B. Section 07900 - Joint Sealers: Acoustical seal around cabinets. C. Section'09100 - Metal Support Systems: Metal stud wall framing. D. Section 09250 - Gypsum Board: Gypsum board substrate panels. - I 1.04. SUBMITTALS - ,. _ • -- ' - _ . -. - _ A. Product Data: 1. Submit manufacturers' product data on extinguisher cabinets and extinguishers. 2. Indicate type, size, and factory finish for each cabinet. 3. Indicate capacity and UL rating for each type of extinguisher. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS — CABINETS . A. J.L. Industries B. Larsen's Manufacturing I C. Modem Metal Products D. Potter - Roemer. • I E. Substitute Manufacturers: 1. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date. 2. Comply with requirements in Section 01600. I 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS I A. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets (denoted FEC): 1. Type: Semi- recessed, maximum 4 inch recess with rolled edge trim, 2 -1/2 inch return. 2. Cabinet Material: Steel. 3. Door and Trim Material: Aluminum. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10522 -1 Printed 7/26/04 • • • SECTION 10522 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 1 4. Minimum Inside Dimensions: 10V2 by 24 by 5'/2 inches. 5. Door Style: Solid with Clear .060 inch acrylic view panel and recessed pull. 6. Lock: Comparable to J.L. Industries "Saf- T -Lok ". II 7. Letter Style: Black vertical ascending die cut letters. 8. Exterior Door and Trim Finish: Clear anodized. 9. Interior Cabinet Finish: White epoxy enamel. 10. See Drawings for locations. 2.03 MANUFACTURERS - EXTINGUISHERS 1 A. Standard Extinguisher provided in all fire extinguisher cabinets unless noted otherwise below. 1. Larsen's: MP5 2. J.L. Industries: Cosmic 5E 3. Modern Metal Products: Wing 5HB 4. Potter - Roemer: 3005. 5. Amerex: A500. 6. Kidde: PROS MP 2.04 FIRE EXTINGUISHERS: A. Multi- Purpose Dry Chemical — Standard Extinguisher: 5 pound capacity, U.L. Rating 2A -10BC. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 . PERFORMANCE ill A. Verification of Conditions: 1. Examine substrates and conditions under which fire extinguisher cabinets are to be installed. 2. Do not proceed with installation of fire extinguisher cabinets until the required opening and solid blocking has been installed in framed walls where fire extinguisher cabinets will be anchored. 3. Starting work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. Installation of Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: 1. Top of rough opening 56" above finished floor or as shown on Drawings. 2. Install semi- recessed cabinets in wall recess, shim in plumb and level position, and screw II to wall framing or blocking. 3. Securely fasten mounting bracket to structure, square, plumb and per manufacturer's 1 instructions. , 4. Apply acoustical caulking, or acoustical tape between cabinet and gypsum wall surface at sound rated walls. Refer to Section 07900 - Joint Sealers. d i 5. Provide additional 2x blocking and 5/8 inch Type X gypsum board behind and around II cabinet to maintain fire rating for cabinets installed in rated walls. C. Installation of Fire Extinguishers: 1. Install one 5 pound multipurpose dry chemical fire extinguisher on bracket inside each i fire extinguisher cabinet. 3.02 COMPLETION A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 10522 -2 Printed 7/26/04 SECTION 10522 FIRE PROTECTION SPECIALTIES 1. Replace damaged and defective fire extinguisher cabinets, fire extinguishers, and fire • 1 extinguisher blankets. B. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean door glazing and fire extinguisher cabinet interior and exterior surfaces prior to - Substantial Completion. 1 END OF SECTION • • 1 1 M r 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE -MUSIC ' JULY 04 • TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 237 10522 -3 Printed 7/26/04 SECTION 11130 AUDIO — VISUAL EQUIPMENT PART1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS • • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES: A. Factory assembled, manually operated projection- screens. . 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS • A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Solid wood blocking for projection screens. B. Section 09100 - Metal Support Systems: Interior Wall Framing. 1.04 SUBMITTALS • • A. . Product Data: 1. Submit edited product data for items specified. I B. ' Shop Drawings: _ • _ - 1,. - Indicate field dimensions and special dimension requirements. _ _ • • 1.05 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS -• A. Projection. Screen Unit to be listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc., and bear the U.L. label. PART 2 PRODUCTS . 2.01 MANUFACTURERS — PROJECTION SCREENS • ' A. Projection Screens — Manual: 1. Draper — "Luma" 2. Da -Lite — "Model B" • B. Substitutions: Prior to bid date, under the Provisions of Section 01600. r 2.02 MANUFACTURED UNITS A. Projection Screens Manual: 1. Case: Steel, painted. 2. Screen: Fiberglass matte white surface. • 3. Size: 60 inches wide by 60 inches high. 4. Quantity: As shown on Drawings. 2.03 ACCESSORIES A. Projection Screens — Manual: Wall Brackets, 6 inch non - adjustable brackets. • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION 1 REMODEL TI PACKAGE MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 11130 -1 Printed 07/26/04 • • SECTION 11130 • AUDIO — VISUAL EQUIPMENT • , PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 1 A. Installation of screen assemblies: 1. Install unit plumb; level, true and straight. 2. Anchor unit to structure per manufacturer's recommendations. 3.02 COMPLETION A. Adjusting Work: 1. Adjust operating hardware for smooth and quiet'operation. • . B. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean exposed and semi - exposed surfaces. • 2. Remove labels. 1 END OF SECTION • • • 1 1 1 i 1 • 1 • • 1 r 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 11130 -2 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 12370 HEAVY DUTY SPECIALTY SHELVING • • 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to •the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Pre - fabricated modular heavy -duty metal shelving with open end panels. • 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit shop drawings product data under provisions of Section 01340. B. Indicate on shop drawings shelving elevations, dimensions and special anchor details. Shelving • system shall be seismically designed, for Seismic Zone IIl,.by,a Structural Engineer licensed in the State of Oregon. Submit calculations for Architect's review. C. Provide product data on shelving and accessories. D. Submit two samples illustrating materials, finish and color of shelving components. • E. - Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01340. - - 110 1.04 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND PROTECTION A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01615. • B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01615. ' PART 2, PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS ' A. Heavy -Duty Shelving: 1. Penco "Rivetrite" Boltless Shelving System, accessible from front or sides of system. B. Substitutions: 1. Prior to bid date. 2. Under provisions of Section 01640. 2.02 COMPONENTS A. Standard Modular Shelving: • 1. Construction: 1 , a. Steel: Double -rivet heavy duty sections as supplied by manufacturer. b. General: Modular type, designed so that components can be removed or rearranged without affecting adjacent units. 2. Module: Provide two (2) shelving unit sections, each section 72- inches long, with number of individual shelves as specified below. 1 ' 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 12370 -1 Printed 07/26/04 • SECTION 12370 HEAVY DUTY SPECIALTY SHELVING 1 3. Frame: System consisting of Angle posts, Tee posts, Angle beams, Channel beams, and Center shelf supports. All from manufacturer's "heavy- duty" product line. 4. Seismic Bracing: Provide details showing floor and/or wall attachments and bracing. . Overhead top bracing is not acceptable. 5. Shelves: Manufacturer's 30 -inch deep steel shelf. Provide seven (7) shelves per module. 6. Finish: Manufacturer's baked enamel in standard color. B. Configuration: Provide two modules, each 84- inches high by 72- inches long with all required components to install as one integral unit. Locate in Physics Storage 011. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that room has, been properly prepared to accept installation of shelving modules: B. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions. 1 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Assemble and install modular shelving units and seismic bracing per manufacturer's printed .. instructions and engineered details._ - - ` - - - 3.03 CLEANING A. Final clean shelving meeting provisions of Section 01710. END OF SECTION 1 • • • • i 1 r r 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — TI PACKAGE - MUSIC' JULY 04 • TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 12370 -2 Printed 07/26/04 SECTION 12 81 S 3 MUSIC SPECIALITY CASEWORK PART 1 GENERAL • I ' 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and 1 • other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES • 111 A. Musical Instrument Storage Cabinets. • B. Music Storage Cabinets. 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Performance Requirements: 1. Hanger Rods Vertical Load: Minimum 200 pounds applied anywhere. 2. Full Height Door Vertical Load: Minimum vertical load of 200 pounds applied at outer I edge. 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: 1. Submit product data on cabinet system, including applicable reference standards, _ - — - • - - performance data and application recommendations and limitations. - B. Shop Drawings: 1. Submit shop drawings to indicate entire system assembly, custom details and finishes, and installation method proposed. 2. Indicate typical shelf, cabinet wall, door panel, hinges and slide bolts. 3. Indicate location of special casework hardware. 4. Indicate field dimensions and special dimension requirements. • C. Product Samples: 1. Submit 4 by 8 inch minimum size samples of casework finishes. D. Manufacturer's Instructions: 1.. Submit copy of manufacturer's installation instructions. 1.05 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Fabricator Qualifications: 1. Casework fabricator shall have 10 consecutive years of experience in fabrication of similar casework. B. Installer Qualifications: 1. Casework installer shall be trained by casework fabricator. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING ' A. Packing and Shipping: 1. Ship components in individual, sealed, labeled cartons. 2. Deliver components to room designated for installation. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — TI PACKAGE - MUSIC I • JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 12381 -1 Printed 7/26/2004 • SECTION 12381 MUSIC SPECIALITY CASEWORK 1 B. Handling: -' 1. Do not accept or install damaged products. • C. Storage: • 1. Store products in heated indoor storage near place of installation. Retain protective packaging until installing. 1.07 SITE CONDITIONS A. Temperature and Humidity Requirements: • 1. Maintain•ambient air temperature between 65 and 80 degrees F. and relative humidity . between 30 and 60 percent for 48 hours prior to and during fabricating, finishing, and installing casework. B. Existing Conditions: 1. Do not install cabinets until mortar, wet and dust producing work is completed. C. Field Measurements: 1. Obtain field measurements. Contractor is responsible for the accurate fitting of Work. 1 1.08 WARRANTY A. Manufacturer's Warranty: - , • . • - - 1. Provide manufacturer's standard written_three year warranty on cabinetry. _ .. • 2. " - Provide manufacturer's 10 year warranty on instrument storage shelving. - - PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 FABRICATORS 1 A. Musical Specialty Cabinet System Fabricators: 1. Wenger Corporation, 555 Park Drive, Owatonna, MN 55060, 1- 800 - 733 -0393. B. Other Fabricators: 1. Submit substitution requests prior to Bid Date. 2. Comply with requirements in Section 01600. 1 • 2.02 MATERIALS A. Cabinet Wall Panels- Instrument and Music Storage Cabinets: 1 1. Side and Top Panels: 3/4 inch thick, industrial cabinet grade particleboard, minimum 45 pcf with thermoset polyester laminate; . Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard • colors. 2. , Back Panels: 'A inch thick finished hardboard to match side and top panels. t 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 . TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 12381 -2 Printed 7/26/2004 SECTION 12381 MUSIC SPECIALITY CASEWORK 1 B. Cabinet Shelving: • . 1. Instrument Storage Cabinets: I a) Cabinets up to 27 inches wide: One -piece high molecular blow - molded polyethylene with 1 3/8 inch radius front edge. Mount to cabinet walls with one - piece molded ridge PVC clip. b) Cabinets over 27 inches wide. One -piece high molecular formed polyethylene with radius front edge and 3/16 inch wall thickness. Ribbed for structural integrity. Supported by four structural tubular members 1 1/2 inch x 1 inch x 16 I gage wall thickness with 14 gauge welded end plates. 2. Music Storage Cabinets: a) Plywood core with polyester laminate fmish to match side and top panels. b) Music Library System: 6 Shelf Unit - 3 adjustable shelves, 3 fixed shelves. I c) Mobile Music Storage Cabinet: 100 slot Choral Folio Cabinet. C. Doors: I 1. Instrument Storage Cabinets: Welded steel grille with powder coat fmish. Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Music Storage Cabinets: 3/4 inch thick, industrial cabinet grade particleboard, minimum 1 45 pcf with thermoset polyester laminate; Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. D. Joinery Hardware: 1 1. Two inch, 1/2 =20 panel connectors with 15mm head diameter and steel thread inserts. - E. Casework Hardware: - - - - 1. Hinges, Compai talent Doors: Two case hardened spring steel barrel hinges with 0.094 inch thick leaves and 0.25 inch diameter non - removable pins, through bolted to cabinet wall. 2. Hinges, Full Height Cabinet Doors: Continuous steel hinges. 3. Locking slide -bolt designed for padlocks, with strike plate: 14 gauge steel; provide clear plastic label holder for identification card insert. Finish: Powder paint coating, color oyster. 1 4. Cabinet Levelers — Instrument Storage: Four leveling glides with minimum 3/8 inch diameter threaded rod in steel corner brackets. 5. Castors — Music Storage: a) Music Library System: Four 8 inch diameter casters. 1 b) Mobile Music Storage Cabinet: Four minimum 3 inch diameter casters. F. Specialty Items: I 1. Vertical closure .kit between wall and cabinet, 0.750 inch thick thermoset composite wood to match cabinets; Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 2. Corner closure kit at inside corner at top of cabinet, 0.750 inch thick thermoset composite wood to match cabinet color. I 3. Top back filler kit between back wall and top panel, 0.750 inch thick thermoset composite wood to match cabinets; Color: As selected from manufacturer's standard colors. 4. Music Storage Cabinets: I a) Shelf labels. b) One music divider per shelf. c) Steel Frame: 16 gage, 1 inch square tubular steel, painted to match cabinet wall I panels. d) Top Closure: 3 4 inch plywood with polyester laminate fmish to match shelving unit. 1 I 02054 JULY 04 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — TI PACKAGE - MUSIC TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 12381 -3 Printed 7/26/2004 • • SECTION 12381 MUSIC SPECIALITY CASEWORK • PART 3 EXECUTION • 3.01 PERFORMANCE 1 • A. Verification of Surfaces: 1. Verify location of framing and blocking to support wall mounted cabinets. 2. Verify room dimensions prior to fabrication of casework affected by variations in room size. 3. Starting work constitutes acceptance of existing conditions. B. • Installation of Casework: 1. Install casework in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 2. Install casework plumb, level, true and straight. 1 3. Shim casework as required using concealed shims. 4. Anchor casework to furring, studs, and blocking with concealed countersunk fasteners. 5. Anchor wall mounted cabinets with concealed continuous cleats screwed to cabinets and solid blocking. 3.02 COMPLETION A. Adjusting Defective Work: 1. Adjust operating hardware for smooth and quiet operation. 2. Repair or replace damaged and defective music casework. 3. Adjust concealed hinges to center cabinet door in cabinet opening. B. Final Cleaning: 1. Clean exposed and semi- exposed surfaces. 2. Remove labels from exposed low pressure laminate finish. 3. Remove packaging materials and construction debris. - END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL_ DISTRICT 23J 12381 -4 Printed 7/26/2004 • SECTION 12512 • HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS • 1 . PART 1 GENERAL 1 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS ' A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and Division 1- General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. • 1.02 SECTION INCLUDES A. Horizontal slat louver blinds. B. Operating hardware. 1.03 RELATED SECTIONS A. Section 06112 - Framing and Sheathing: Installation of wall opening head support. B. Section 08110 - Steel Doors and Frames: Substrate for attachment of blinds. ' C. Section 08410 - Aluminum Entrances and Storefront: Substrate for attachment of blinds. 1.04 REFERENCES . A. FS AA -V -00200 - Venetian Blinds. - • - 1.05 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. Horizontal metal slat louver blinds installed at window openings, manual control of raising and lowering by cord; blade angle adjustable by control wand. 1.06 SUBMITTALS ' A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 01300. • B. Submit shop drawings indicating opening sizes, tolerances required, installation of blinds at window opening, method of attachment, clearances, and operation. C. Submit product data under provisions of Section 01300. ' D. Submit product data indicating physical and dimensional characteristics, operating features, and mounting details. • E. Submit samples under provisions of Section 01300. F. Submit two samples four inches long illustrating slat materials and finish, manufacturer's full line of colors, cord and rod type and color. G. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 01300. ' H. Contract Closeout: 1. Submit maintenance and cleaning data under provisions of Section 01700. 2. Include recommended cleaning methods and cleaning materials. 111 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL -TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 12512 -1 Printed 7/26/04 SECTION 12512 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS 1 1.07 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Venetian Blinds: FS AA -V- 00200. • 1.08 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 01600. • B. Deliver blinds wrapped and crated in a manner to prevent damage to components or marring of surfaces. C. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 01600. 1 D. Store in a clean, dry area, laid flat and blocked off ground to prevent sagging, twisting, or warping. • • 1.09 EXTRA MATERIALS A. Furnish ten additional slats as extra stock for each size of blind. PART2 PRODUCTS • 2.01 MANUFACTURERS A. 'Bali "Classics" B. Hunter- Douglas • C. Substitutions: Under provisions of Section 01.600. 2.02 MATERIALS A. Louver Slats: One inch wide; 0.008 inch thick spring tempered prefmished aluminum horizontal slats, with manufacturing burrs removed; radiused slat corners, unperforated. B. Slat Support: Woven polypropylene, ladder configuration. C. Head Rail Housing: Prefinished, "U" shaped 1" high x 1 -1/2" wide formed aluminum box, internally fitted with hardware, pulleys and bearings for blind operation. D. • Cord: Braided nylon, continuous loop, free end. E. Control Wand: Extruded hollow plastic, hexagonal shape. F. Head Support Bracket: Overhead head rail housing attachment. ' G. Accessory Hardware: Type recommended by blind manufacturer. H. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full line offminimum 54 standard colors. , 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL -TI PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 • TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 12512 -2 , Printed 7/26/04 • SECTION 12512 HORIZONTAL LOUVER BLINDS • 1 PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION ' A. Verify that openings are ready to receive the work. B. Do not commence fabrication until field measurements are confirmed. . 1 • C. Ensure structural supports are correctly placed. D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing surfaces. 1 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Install blinds in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. B. Secure in place with concealed fasteners. 3.03 TOLERANCES A. Maximum Variation of Gap at Window Opening Perimeter: 1/4 inch. 1 _ B. Maximum Offset From Level: 1/8 inch. 3.04 ADJUSTING - A. Adjust blinds for smooth operation. I 3.05 CLEANING • A. Clean work under provisions of 01700. • 3.06 SCHEDULE - • A. Provide horizontal louver blinds at all interior relites and interior doors unless noted below. B. Do not provide horizontal louver blinds at the following locations: 1. Door Type D. 1 END OF SECTION 1 • 1 1 1 • • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - TI PACKAGE 1 MAY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 12512 -3 Printed 7/26/04 • SECTION 15050 • BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1 PART 1 - GENERAL • 1.01 DESCRIPTION • 1 A. Requirements Included: Provide all materials, labor and equipment required to install complete mechanical work. I 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Codes and Standards: Comply with the provisions of the following codes, standards and specifications, except where more stringent requirements are shown or specified: 1 1. State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code. 2. State of Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code. 3. State of Oregon Plumbing Specialty Code. I 4. State of Oregon Uniform Fire Code. 5. NFPA and other Standards referenced in the above codes. B. Permits, Licenses, Fees, and Taxes: Obtain and pay for all permits, licenses, fees and taxes applicable to this project as required by law. C. Drawings: Do not scale drawings for roughing -in measurements, nor use as shop drawings. Make field measurements and prepare shop drawings as required. Coordinate work with shop drawings I of other specification divisions. D. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications, especially the electrical drawings, to voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the electrical drawings. All . • equipment shall be installed in compliance with the Electrical Code and the equipment's UL listing. Bring to the attention of the Architect in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and /or I discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered. 1.03 SUBMIT • • A. Installation Submittals: Clearly indicate which model, size, style, and options are to be provided. III Submit all equipment submittals bound together in groups. Deliver all at one time. Clearly indicate which model, size, style and options are to be provided. Arrangement of mechanical equipment has been based on items of specific manufacturer intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be approved. I B. Wiring Diagrams: Submit complete wiring diagrams showing field- installed wiring and devices - for all equipment requiring same. I C. Submittal Review: Comply with the contract documents where deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the contract documents are discovered prior to or after the . review process. 1 D. Project Record (As- Installed) Drawings: 1. Obtain and pay for reproducible drawings or electronic media from Architect. 2. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date. I 3. Record and accurately indicate the following: a. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed piping. • b. Locations of all clean -outs. I c. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, obstructions, etc. • Eradicate extraneous information. d. Locations of tracer wire terminal points. 1 4. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review. - 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050- I Printed 07 /27/04 . 1 SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS I 5. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents. Final submittal will be in the , form of reproducible drawings. 6. Quality of entire set of project record drawings to match the quality of the contract documents; quality to be judged by Architect. Computer -aided design drafting (CADD) shall be used to complete project record drawings. Use standards set in contract documents. Note field modifications, all addenda and change order items on project I record drawings. If deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of the drawings, they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of subsequent submissions shall be at the contractor's expense. • • E. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Submit three (3) sets of Operating and Maintenance Instructions, including manufacturer's service data, wiring diagrams and parts lists for all major items of equipment, valve charts, balancing data, final control diagrams showing final set points, and any additional equipment added by change order, bound in three -ring, vinyl or canvas covered, • I loose -leaf binders organized with index and thumb -tab markers for each classification of equipment or data. Comply with provisions of Section 01700 where applicable to the mechanical work. F. Record Drawings once approved shall be placed at: 1. District archives. 2. District operation and maintenance department. 3. The school; laminate this set. G. Instruction Manual: Submit separate Instruction Manual 30 days prior to scheduling the required 1 Instruction Period. Include the following: 1. Description of each system and operational sequences. I 2. Seasonal system adjustments. 3. Description and normal settings for time clocks, thermostatsjan and other motor switches, etc. • 4. Normal valve settings. 5. Emergency measures upon system failure. 6. Cross reference information furnished by manufacturer in the Operating and Maintenance 4 Manual above. . 7. Operation and maintenance manual once approved shall be placed at: I a. District archives. b. District operation and maintenance department. c. The school. 8. Provide laminated control drawings and wiring diagrams at each mechanical system (i.e. air handler, boiler, etc.) if not provided under 15900. 1.04 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Delivery: Deliver to project site with manufacturer's labels intact and legible. 1 B. Handling: Avoid damage. . C. Storage: Inside protected from weather, dirt and construction dust. Where necessary to store I outside, elevate well above grade and enclose with durable, waterproof wrapping. PART 2- PRODUCTS 1 2.01 GENERAL A. General: Provide all new materials and equipment, identical to apparatus or equipment in ' successful operation for a minimum of two years.. Provide materials of comparable quality omitted here but necessary to complete the work. Maximum allowable variation from stated capacities, minus 5% to plus 10% as approved in each case. I B. Compatibility: Provide products which are compatible with other portions of the work and provide products with the proper or correct power and fuel- burning characteristics, and similar adaptations for the project. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -2 l Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS C. Equipment scheduled by performance or model number shall be considered the basis of the design. I If equipment of other specified manufacturer's provided in lieu of the design equipment the contractor is responsible for all changes and costs which may be necessary to accommodate this equipment, including different sizes and locations for connections, different electrical characteristics, different dimensions, different access requirements or any other differences which I impact the project. 2.02 STARTERS AND SWITCHES I A. Manufacturers: General Electric, ABB, Cutler- Hammer Square D, Furnas. Provide starters by same manufacturer throughout project. • B. General: Provide each motor with starter or switch as approved and recommended by I manufacturer of motor or equipment of which motor is a part. C. Starter Characteristics: Type I general purpose enclosure with padlock ears and supports for mounting as indicated. Starter type and size as recommended by motor manufacturer. Use no I starter smaller than NEMA Size 1. D. Manual Switches: Provide on motors 1/3 horsepower and smaller except where automatic control or interlock is indicated. Include pilot light. Provide overload protection where not protected by I E. internal motor overload protection. Magnetic Starters: Provide for 1/2 horsepower and larger motors, and for smaller motors on automatic control or with interlock switch. Include pilot lights, reset, trip -free relay on each phase, and devices for coordination control system (including 120 volt transformer for control circuit I where service exceeds 120 volts). Provide automatic ambient temperature compensation for starter heaters. IIII 2.03 DRIVES A. Acceptable Manufacturers: Dayton, Gates, Browning. B. General: "V" section belt drives, multiple as required, sized on 1.5 times installed motor I horsepower. Provide standard slide rails or approved means of adjustment for each motor with belt drive. Use standard section belts and no sheave smaller than cataloged industry standard; provide countersunk center on shaft ends to receive speed counter tip. Variable pitch sheaves are approved only for initial balancing on variable frequency driven fans. Final drives must be fixed sheave. Coordinate installation with balancer. 2.04 GUARDS • A. Provide guards in accordance with State Safety Code and OSHA requirements over all rotating . equipment including belts, shafts and couplings. Drive guards over belts and sheaves shall include 2-1 diameter access opening at shaft ends for speed - counter. -- Provide guards inside all air handlers. I 2.05 ACCESS PANELS A. Manufacturers: Milcor, Bilco, Elmdor, Karp, Potter - Roemer or accepted substitute. Milcor Style I DW, K, or M panels as required by construction. B. Construction: Fire rated in fire rated partitions and ceilings. Provide flush key cylinder locks on all access panels less than 8' above the floor. Turn keys over to owners at project completion. I 2.06 Screwdriver latches on all others. MISCELLANEOUS STEEL I A. General: Provide all steel as required for adequate support of all mechanical equipment, standard angle or channel, I or H sections as required by application. Provide shop drawings of supports especially constructed for this project. Adequately cross braced and welded pipe stands may be used for supports. Provide suitable base plates for all stands and anchors for all hanging equipment. Drill or burn support holes in center line of web of structural shapes only, and in only I one leg of any one angle, and as far from center of length as possible. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 1.5050 -3 Printed 07/27/04 SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS I B. Paint: Apply one coat of black Rustoleum primer to shop fabricated items before delivery to job; other painting as specified herein. I 2.07 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS A. Pipe Markers: 1. See Chart Below: • PIPE DIAMETER LETTER SIZE with insulation I • 3 /4" through 2- 1/4" 3/4" 2- 1/2" through 7- 7/8" 1- 3/4" 8" through 10" 2 -' " Over 10" 3- 1" • PIPE COLOR i background Acid vent Yellow I Acid Waste Yellow Air Blue Boiler Blowdown Yellow 1 . • Boiler Feed - Yellow - - Boiler Feedwater Yellow 4 Chilled Water Return Green Chilled Water Supply Green Cold Water Green Condensate Yellow ' Condensate Drain Yellow Condensate Return Yellow - I Condenser Water Return Green Condenser Water Supply Green Deionized_ Water ... -_ . ... Green _ -__ -- Domestic Cold Water Green Domestic Hot Water Yellow I Domestic Hot Water Yellow Recirculation Fire Sprinkler Red Heating Water Return Yellow Heater Water Supply Yellow Heating Water Reverse Return Yellow 1 140° Hot Water Yellow Natural Gas Yellow I Refrigerant - Liquid Yellow Refrigerant Suction Yellow Sanitary Drain Green 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -4 Primed 07/27/04 1 • SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS Steam Yellow 1 Storm Drain Green Sump Pump Discharge Yellow I Tempered Water Yellow Vacuum Yellow Vent Yellow I 2. Provide direction arrows on all lines. B. Nameplates: I 1. Engraved nameplates, 1/16" thick, laminated 3 -ply plastic, center ply white, outer ply black, letters formed by exposing center ply. 2. Size: 3" by 5" nameplates with 1/4" high letters. 1 C. Valve tags: 1. Tag to identify what valve is. Example (Hot water shut -off valve for restroom 100 & . 101). I 2. 3. , Numbered brass tags referring to a valve chart are not acceptable. Provide engraved plastic or laminated plastic tags with chain attachment. I 2.08 PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING A. Through - penetration fire stopping system tested and listed by Underwriters Laboratories. 3M, Pi . Metacaulk, SpecSeal, or approved. B. Select system for proper application based on wall construction, type of penetrating item, wall rating, etc. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. Site Examination: Before starting work, carefully examine site and all contract Drawings. Become thoroughly familiar with conditions governing work on this project. Verify all indicated elevations, building measurements, roughing -in dimensions and equipment locations before proceeding with any of the work. _ I B. -- - -Utility -Locations: The - location -of all utilities, wires conduits, pipes,- duets,— or-ather -ser -vice - - - -- facilities are shown in a general way only on the Drawings and are taken from existing public I records. Ascertain whether any additional facilities other than those shown on the plans may be present and determine the exact location and elevations of all utilities prior to commencing installation. I C. Sleeves, Inserts, Cast -in -Place Work: Provide sleeves, inserts, anchoring devices, cast -in -place work, etc. which must be set in concrete sequenced at the proper time for the project schedule. D. Coordination: I 1. Where the work must be sequenced and positioned with precision in order to fit into the available space, prepare accurate scale shop drawings showing the actual physical dimensions required for the installation and submit prior to purchase-fabrication- installation of any of the elements involved in the coordination. I 2. Cooperate with other trades in furnishing material and information for sleeves, bucks, chases, mountings, backing, foundations and wiring required for installation of mechanical items. 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -5 Printed 07 /27/04 SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3. Coordinate all work with other trades and determine in advance where interfacing of the mechanical work and other work are required to be connected together. Provide all materials and equipment to make those connections. Submit shop drawings showing required connections where special conditions exist. E. Discrepancies: Report immediately any error, conflict or discrepancy in Plans, Specifications and/or existing conditions. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. Should rearrangement or re- routing of ducts or piping be necessary, provide for approval the simplest layout possible for that particular portion of the work. F. Related Engineering Services: The cost for all professional engineering services related to Division 15 items of work shall be included in the bid, and will be paid for by the General Contractor. References to "structural engineer" in Division 15 do not refer to the project structural engineer of record, unless that individual or firm is retained (independently) by the general contractor to perform Division 15 consulting services." 3.02 MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT WIRING A. Provide all mechanical equipment motors, automatic temperature, limit, float and similar control devices required, with wiring complete from power source indicated on Electrical Drawings. B. Provide properly rated motor overload and undervoltage protection and all manual or automatic motor operating devices for all mechanical equipment. C. Equipment and systems shown on the Drawings and/or specified, are based upon requirements of specific manufacturers which are intended as somewhat typical of several makes which may be approved. Provide all field wiring and/or devices necessary for a complete and operable system including controls for the actual selected equipment/system. D. Provide all starters for mechanical motors. Review Electrical Specifications and Drawings to determine which mechanical motor starters will be provided under the Electrical Specification Sections and provide all others. 3.03 INSTALLATION • A. Locating and Positioning Equipment: Observe all Codes, Regulations and good common practice in locating and installing mechanical equipment and material so that completed installation presents the least possible hazard. Maintain adequate clearances for repair and service to all equipment and comply with Code requirements. B. Arrangement: Arrange ductwork and piping parallel with primary lines of the building construction, and with a minimum of 7' overhead clearance in all areas where possible. Unless ' indicated otherwise, conceal all piping and ductwork. Locate operating and control equipment properly to provide easy access, and arrange entire mechanical work with adequate access for operation - and rrraintenance� Give right -of -way to piping which mustslaps - for - drainage. Set all equipment level or as recommended by manufacturer. Under no conditions shall beams, girders, footings or columns be cut for mechanical items. Casting of pipes into concrete is prohibited unless so shown on Drawings. C. Anchorage: Anchor and/or brace all mechanical equipment, piping and ductwork to resist displacement due to seismic action, include snubbers on equipment mounted on spring isolators. 111 D. Access Panels: Provide access panels with proper backing reinforcement for all equipment, fire and smoke dampers, dielectric unions and valves requiring service and installed above ceilings, behind walls, or in furring, complete with correct frame for type of building construction involved. Exact size, number and location of access panels are not necessarily shown on Drawings. Use no panel smaller than 12" by 12" for simple manual access or smaller than 16" x 20" where personnel must pass through. E. Adjusting: Adjust and calibrate all automatic mechanical equipment, mixing valves, flush valves, float devices, etc. Adjust flow rates at each piece of equipment or fixture. F. Building Vapor Barrier: Wherever the building insulation vapor barrier is penetrated by mechanical piping, hangers, conduits, ductwork, etc., provide clear self - adhesive tape recommended by the insulation manufacturer around the penetrations. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -6 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15050 I BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS I G. Mechanical System Identification: 1. Piping System: Indicate each pipe system by its generic name (abbreviated) as shown/scheduled /specified; except vent and drainage piping. Comply with UMC I Standard 11 -2 / ANSI A13.1 for marker locations, letter sizes, and colors. Include arrows to show direction of flow and "Electric Traced" signs to identify heat cable wrapped piping. 2. Valve Identification: Tag all valves as directed previously. I - 3. Equipment: Provide engraved plastic - laminate signs at locations of major equipment, primary control devices, emergency equipment, dangerous elements of the mechanical work and similar places. Provide text of sufficient clarity and lettering, of sufficient size to convey adequate information at each location, and permanently mount in an I appropriate and effective location. For systems with multiple rooftop HVAC units, comply with OMSC 304.5. Comply with recognized industry standards for color and design. H. Concrete Work: Coordinate with other work, particularly other concrete work and accessories. Comply with applicable provisions of Section 03310 for mechanical work concrete, including formwork, reinforcement, mix design, materials (use mix designs and materials accepted for Division 3 work where possible), admixtures, accessories, (including waterstops), placing of wet concrete, finishing, curing, protecting, testing, submittals and other requirements of the concrete 1 work. • 3.04 PROTECTION I A. Protect all work and materials against loss or damage. Close all pipe openings with caps or plugs. At final completion, 'thoroughly clean and deliver all work and equipment in an unblemished new condition. Keep all motors and bearings in watertight and dustproof covers during entire course of IIII installation. - B. Protect floors, walls, framing and sheathing where pipe cutting and threading operations are conducted with plastic sheeting under plywood sheets. Extend plastic sheeting beyond the plywood. Clean -up metal cuttings, oil, etc., daily or as necessary to prevent debris from being I tracked beyond the protected area. Damages, as determined by the Architect, due to the pipe cutting /threading operation shall be repaired by the responsible trade. 3.05 CUTTING AND PATCHING 1 A. General: Comply with the requirements of Division 1 for the cutting and patching of other work to accommodate the installation of mechanical work. Do all•necessary cutting and patching of existing building and yard surfaces required for completion of the mechanical work. Patch to match finish and color of adjacent surfaces. Coordinate work in remodel and new areas to avoid cutting of new finished surfaces. 3.06 PIPE PENETRATION FIRE STOPPING I A. Install as recommended by manufacturer and in accordance with the product's UL listing. Below are the minimum installation requirements. I l . Install specified penetrating item(s) with required annular spacing in proper size wall or floor opening. Support penetrating item(s) adequately on both sides of construction. 2. Clean all opening and penetrating item surfaces in penetration area to remove loose debris, dirt, oil, wax, grease, old caulking, etc. I 3. If needed or required for gypsum or concrete block walls, install specified galvanized steel wire mesh or sleeve recessed and centered inside wall around penetrating item(s) so that it is snug against perimeter of opening. 4. When required, install specified type and depth of backing material in annular space, I recessed to required fill depth of fire stopping caulking. 5. Gun, trowel, and /or pump fire stopping sealant to specified depth in annular space around penetrating item(s). Trowel sealant surfaces flush with wall or floor surfaces to a smooth, defect -free finish. Where required, apply specified size caulking bead around penetrating 1 item(s) at zero annular contact areas and tool smooth. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -7 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15050 BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1 3.07 EQUIPMENT REMOVAL A. All removed mechanical equipment is the property of the Contractor unless indicated otherwise, , see `D' below. Disconnect and remove all such equipment from the project property. Cap all piping in walls, below floors, and /or above ceilings in finished rooms. B. Disable electrical circuits by disconnection of both ends and make safe with wire nuts or other approved methods. Remove conduit to concealed locations. Remove wire to panel or j -box if circuit is used for other devices. C. Reused Equipment: Reconnect piping, wiring and/or controls to restore original equipment functions unless indicated otherwise. D. Rooftop units and Carrier control modules and cabinets are to be delivered to Tigard - Tualatin School District maintenance headquarters in the same condition as found on site. Coordinate with Tigard- Tualatin School District for an inspection of all rooftop units and Carrier control modules. Document condition prior to construction beginning. Any damage or loss to be reimbursed by contractor to Tigard - Tualatin School District at market value determined by Carrier Corporation representative. 3.08 MECHANICAL PAINTING A. Minimum Requirements: Comply with minimum requirements of Section 09900, Painting. All mechanical equipment, piping, insulation, etc., exposed in finished areas, storage rooms and other locations except mechanical equipment rooms will be painted under Section 09900. B. Painting Materials: Material shall comply with Section 09900, Painting. , C. Uninsulated Piping: Paint black or galvanized uninsulated piping located buried in ground, in • concrete or masonry one (1) coat acid - resisting black paint. Paint black or galvanized uninsulated piping exposed to weather one (1) coat black asphaltum varnish. D. Iron Work: Paint hangers, rods, anchors, guides, threads of galvanized pipe, bases, supports, uncoated sheet metal and other iron work without factory finish, exposed to weather, one coat acid - resisting black paint. Apply one (1) coat Dixon's Aluminum Graphite No. 209 paint over the (1) coat primer as recommended by paint manufacturer to all hot metal surfaces. E. Sheet Metal: Apply one coat of zinc chromate to mechanical sheet metal exposed to weather, except no painting required on aluminum or stainless steel. Apply one coat of flat black paint to the inside of unlined ducts behind all grilles and registers. F. Insulated Piping and Other Insulated Surfaces: Paint insulated piping in half - round, split tile, or other inaccessible locations, one (1) coat asphalt emulsion. 3:09 TEMPORARY - HEATING AND COOLING A. Comply with requirements of Section 01500. B. Permanent mechanical systems' equipment utilized for temporary heating, ventilating and cooling shall be started with all controls and safeties installed and operational. Start -up shall be done by a factory approved mechanic only. C. Owner's warranties shall not be abridged by contractor's use of the permanent systems' equipment prior to final acceptance. Warranty period shall begin at final completion. Warranty maintenance to be included. 1 3.10 MECHANICAL WORK CLOSEOUT A. General: Refer to the Division 1 sections for general closeout requirements. Calibrate all equipment requiring same. B. Record Drawings: Submit record set of drawings as previously specified in this Section. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC 1 JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -8 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15050 . BASIC MECHANICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS • C. Closeout Equipment/Systems Operations: Sequence operations properly so that work of project will not be damaged or endangered. Coordinate with seasonal requirements. Operate each item of equipment and each system in a test run of appropriate duration with the Architect present, and with the Owner's operating personnel present, to demonstrate sustained, satisfactory performance. Adjust and correct operations as required for proper performance. Clean and lubricate each ' system, and replace dirty filters, excessively worn parts and similar expendable items of the work. D. Operating Instructions: Conduct a full walk - through instruction seminar for the Owner's personnel who are to be involved in the continued operation and maintenance of mechanical equipment and ' systems. Provide written instructions outlining and explaining the identification system, operational diagrams, emergency and alarm provisions, sequencing requirements, seasonal provisions, security, safety, efficiency and similar features of the systems. See Section 15900 for control operating instruction requirements. Video tape or otherwise record the training session for future playback. Provide three copies (one each with O &M material). END OF SECTION 1 • • • 1 1 i 1 • 1 1 ' 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15050 -9 Printed 07/27/04 SECTION 15060 I PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS • III PART 1 - GENERAL • 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1 A. Provide pipe, pipe fittings and related items required for complete piping system. B. Related Work: Specified in Section 15090, Supports and Anchors, and in Section 15100, Valves. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. General: ASTM and ANSI Standards are indicated. In addition, special standards are referenced 1 where neither ASTM nor ANSI Standards are applicable. B. Concealed Plastic Piping: No concealed plastic piping inside the building unless approved by Code or Governing Authorities. I C. Definitions: Where piping fluid is not indicated in the following paragraphs, provide similar piping materials for similar fluids (i.e., "make -up water" _ "domestic water "; "wet stand pipe" = "fire sprinkler pipe "; "drainage piping" = "sanitary /storm sewer piping "). I D. Provide submittal for all piping. Leave tags and labels on piping to allow field inspection to verify American Manufacturer. I 1.03 STORAGE AND HANDLING A. Deliver materials to the project site with galvanized pipe manufacturer's labels intact and legible as O .. required by code. B. Provide factory - applied end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain end caps through shipping, storage and handling as required to prevent pipe -end damage and eliminate dirt and moisture from inside of pipe and tube. Protect flanges and fittings from moisture and dirt by inside storage and enclosure, or by packaging with durable, waterproof wrapping. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 1 2.01 PIPING MATERIALS A. Galvanized Steel Pipe: I 1. Applications: Aboveground only and 2" and smaller. a. Natural gas_pipng onroof b. Sanitary waste I c. Rain drain d. Plumbing vent 2. Pipe: Schedule 40, standard galvanized steel pipe, ASTM A -53 or A -106. B. Black Steel Pipe: I 1. Applications: a. - Natural gas (Inside Building Only) b. Fire sprinklers I c. Heating water 2. Pipe: Schedule 40, standard black steel pipe ASTM A -120 or A -53. 3. Threaded Fittings: For above ground installations only. a. Banded class 120 cast iron fittings, ANSI B16.4 to 125 psi. b. Compressed Air: Banded class 150 malleable iron fittings, ANSI B 16.3 to 150 I psi. 4. Welding Fittings: For al underground installations, beveled ends, seamless fittings of the same type and class of piping above. 1 C. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 237 15060 -1 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15060 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS I 1. Application: 2" and larger. a. Sanitary waste I b. Plumbing vent c. Rain drain 2. Pipe: Hubless cast iron soil pipe, CISPI 301 -90 /ASTM A888. 3. Fittings: a. Hubless Cast Iron Fittings: CISPI 30 -901 or cast iron hub and spigot fittings, ASTM A -74. b. Couplings Underground: Clamp -A11 Hi -Torq 125, Husky SD4000, Mission Heavy Weight, or approved substitute. I c. Couplings Above Ground: Standard couplings meeting CISPI Designation 310 except rain drain couplings in systems greater than 20 feet water column, utilize couplings approved for underground locations. d. Couplings to Steel or Plastic Pipe in Concealed Locations: Fernco "LowFlex" or ' approved substitute. 4. Manufacturers: Cast iron pipe and fittings — AB &I, Charlotte Pipe, Tyler Pipe. D. Copper Pipe and Tube: I 1. Application: • a. Domestic water b. Heating water c. Cooling condensate drain. 2. Pipe: ASTM B88. I a. Above Ground Domestic Water, Heating Water, and Pressure Sewer: Type L hard temper copper with soldered joints. b. Underground Domestic Water, Pressure Sewer, and Priming Lines: Type L soft annealed with no joints or type K hard tempered copper with silver soldered joints. • c. Refrigerant Piping: ANSUASME B31.5 or SAE J 513 -F, "Refrigeration Tube Fittings." Where conflicts occur, B31.5 shall govern. d. Above Ground Sanitary Waste and Vent: Copper tube and fitting DWV, ASTM B306. 4 3. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint fittings, ANSI B16.22. 4. Refrigerant Fittings: ANSUASME B31.5 or SAE J 513 -F, brazed or flange joints. E. Plastic Pipe — Drainage: I 1. Application: a. Sanitary waste, below floor only b. Rain drain, below floor and outside tunnels only I 2. Pipe: a. Acrylonitrile- butadiene - styrene (ABS) plastic drain, waste and vent piping and fittings (DWV): ASTM D2751 for 4" and 6 "; ASTM D2680 for 8" and larger. b. Poly(vinyl chloride) (PVC) plastic drain, waste and vent pipe and fittings (DWV): ASTM D2665. 3. - Fittings: Provide fittings indicated, matching piping manufacture. Where not otherwise indicated, provide fittings produced and recommended for the service indicated by the piping manufacturer. 2.02 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING MATERIALS/PRODUCTS • A. Insulating (Dielectric) Fittings: Provide standard products recommended by the manufacturer for use in the service indicated, and which effectively isolate ferrous from non - ferrous piping I (electrical conductance), prevent galvanic action, and reduce corrosion. Victaulic "Clear Flow." B. Soldering and Brazing Materials: Provide soldering materials as determined by the installer to I comply with installation requirements. 1. Tin - Antimony Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 95TA. 2. Lead -Free Solder: ASTM B32, Grade HB. Harris "Bridgit" approved. 3. Silver Solder: ASTM B32, Grade 96.5TS. I C. Sleeve Seal: Rubber-link pipe wall and casing closure. Thunderline Link -Seal. For fire rated wall, floor or ceiling penetrations, 3 -M "CP -25" caulk, "No. 303" putty and /or "PSS 7904" sealing system. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15060 -2 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15060 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS D. Tracer Wire: 14'gauge, single strand, copper wire with blue insulation for water, green for sanitary I E. and storm sewers, and yellow for gas. 3M "DBY" direct bury splice kit required at all splices. Flex Connection: T -316L stainless steel corrugated inner with T-321 outer braid. Fleronics 4001H or approved. AGA approved for gas equipment 1 2.03 BACKFILL MATERIALS A. Subbase Materials: A graded mixture of gravel, sand, crushed stone or crushed slag. I B. Finely- Graded Subbase Material: Well graded sand, gravel, crushed stone or crushed slag, with 100% passing a 3/8" sieve. C. Backfill Material: Soil material suitable for compacting to the required densities, and complying I with AASHTO designation M145, Group A -1, A -2 -4, A -2 -5. or A -3. I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 PIPE INSTALLATION I A. General: Install pipe, tube and fittings in accordance with recognized industry practices. Install each run accurately aligned with a minimum of joints and couplings, but with adequate and accessible unions and flanges for disassembly, maintenance and/or replacement of valves and equipment. Reduce sizes (where indicated) by use of reducing fittings. I B. Tracer Wire: Install tracer wire as close to underground non - metallic water, sanitary and storm sewers and gas pipe in the trench as possible. Tracer wire shall be accessible at grade via all services, valve and meter boxes, curb cocks, cleanouts at the building, manholes (inside the cover 01 _ . . near the top), etc. Locate all points'on the record as- installed drawings. Splice into utility tracer system where available. Comply with code requirements. 3.02 PIPING JOINTS I A. General: Provide joints of the type indicated in each piping system, and where piping and joint as manufactured form a system, utilize only that manufacturer's material. B. Cast Iron "No- Hub ": All joints in accordance with the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute (CISPI) II Designation No. 310 -90 "Installation Procedures for Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings For Sanitary and Storm Drain, Waste and Vent Piping Applications." Horizontal runs of 5" and greater shall be braced as indicated in Figure 4 for "rodding" restraints. I C. Ferrous Threaded Piping: Thread pipe in accordance with ANSI 82.1; cut threads full and clean using sharp dies. Ream threaded ends to remove burrs and restore full inside diameter. Apply e joint compound or p pipe joint tape Tetlon) where recommended b pipe/fittingmanucurer, — Pi i P J P PP J P( Y on male threads at each joint and tighten joint to leave no more than 3 threads exposed. 1 D. Solder Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: In accordance with recognized industry practice. Cut tube . ends squarely, ream to full inside diameter, and clean outside of tube ends and inside of fittings. Apply solder flux to joint areas of both tubes and fittings. Insert tube full depth into fitting, and I solder in a manner which will draw solder full depth and circumference of joint. Wipe excess solder from joint before it hardens. "T- Drill" field formed tees may be utilized where the main is at least two pipe sizes larger than the branch. I E. Braze Copper Tube and Fitting Joints: Where indicated, in accordance with ANSI /ASME B31.5. Pass a slow stream of dry nitrogen gas through the tubing at all times while brazing to eliminate formation of copper oxide. I F. Plastic Pipe/Tube Joints: Comply with manufacturer's instructions and recommendations, and with applicable industry standards: 1. Making Solvent- Cemented Joints: ASTM D -2865 and ASTM F -402. 1 I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC . JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15060 -3 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15060 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS G. Insulating (Dielectric) Fittings: Comply with manufacturer's instructions for installing unions or fittings. Install in a manner which will prevent galvanic action and stop corrosion where the I "joining of ferrous and non - ferrous piping" is indicated. For connections at the main water line (3" in tunnel) provide brass valve or minimum of 12" brass pipe as coupling in place of di- electric union. Continuity of grounding at the main service shall be maintained. H. Changes in Direction: Use fittings for all changes in direction. Run lines parallel with building I surfaces. I. Line Grades: 1. Drainage Lines: Run at maximum possible grade and in no case less than 1/4" per foot within building. 2. Vents: Pitch for drainage 1/4" per 10'. 3. Water: Pitch to low points and install hose bib drains. 3' minimum depth of ground cover I for all lines outside building unless otherwise noted. 4. Heating Piping: Pitch 1" to 40' minimum to low point drips or drains. • J. Unions and Flanges: At all equipment to permit dismantling and elsewhere as consistent with good installation practice. I K. Expansion: Provide loops, swing joints, anchors, runouts and spring pieces to prevent damage to piping or equipment. 3.03 MISCELLANEOUS PIPING EQUIPMENT 1 A. Floor, Wall and Ceiling Plates: Chrome plated pressed steel or brass screw locked split plates on . all pipe penetrations in finished spaces. I . _. B. Sleeves: At all penetrations of concrete or masonry construction.. PVC, 24 gauge galvanized steel or Schedule 40 galvanized steel pipe. Use steel pipe sleeves through beams, footings, girders or columns and for all penetrations of walls or floors below grade. Where floor finish is ceramic tile, terrazzo, or similar material extend standard steel pipe sleeves 1 -1/2" above finished floor. Fabricate sleeves 1" diameter larger than pipe or insulation. PVC and sheet metal sleeves at non- structural penetrations only. C. Sleeve Caulking: Caulk insulated pipe with rubber link seal. Grout uninsulated pipe with cement mortar or approved waterproof mastic. All caulking or grouting shall extend full depth of sleeve. Utilize rubber sealing links in Lieu of caulking. Install UL sealing caulk, putty and /or system at all penetrations of fire rated walls, floors and ceiling. I • 3.04 EXCAVATING A. General: Do not excavate for mechanical work until the work is ready to proceed without delay, to minimize the total time lapse from excavation to completion of backfilling. Comply with all I applicable Federal and state safety regulations. B. Width: Excavate for piping with 6" to 9" clearance on both sides of pipe, except where otherwise 111 shown or required for proper installation of pipe joints, fittings, valves and other work. Excavate for other mechanical work to provide minimum practical but adequate working clearances. C. Depth for Direct Support: For work to be supported directly on undisturbed soil, do not excavate beyond indicated depths, and hand - excavate the bottom cut to accurate elevations. Support the following work on undisturbed soil at the bottom of the excavations: 1. Piping of 5" and less pipe /tube size. 2. Cast -in -place concrete. 1 D. Depth for Subbase Support: For large piping (6" pipe size and larger), tanks and where indicated for other mechanical work, excavate for installation of subbase material in the depth indicated, or, if not otherwise indicated, 6" below bottom of work to be supported. E. Depth for Exterior Piping: Excavate for exterior water - bearing piping (water, drainage) so that the I top of piping will not be less than 3' vertical distance below finished grade. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15060 -4 Printed 07/27/04 ' 1 SECTION 15060 I PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS • F. Depth for Unsatisfactory Soil Conditions: Where unsatisfactory soil condition at the bottom of I excavation exists, excavate additional depth as directed to reach satisfactory soil - bearing condition. Backfill with subbase material, compacted as directed, to indicated excavation depth. 3.05 DEWATERING I A. Maintain dry excavation for mechanical work, by removing water. Protect excavations from inflow of surface water. Pump minor inflow of ground water from excavations; protect excavations from major inflow of ground water, by installing temporary sheeting and I waterproofing. Provide adequate barriers which will protect other excavations and below -grade property from being damaged by water, sediment or erosion from or through mechanical work excavations. Comply with local erosion control regulations where applicable. I 3.06 BASE PREPARATION A. Subbase Installation: Where indicated, install subbase material to receive mechanical work, and compact by tamping to form a firm base for the work. For 4" and larger piping, horizontal cylindrical tanks and similar work, shape and subbase to fit the shape of the bottom 90 degrees of 1 the cylinder, for uniform continuous support. Provide finely- graded subbase material for wrapped, coated and plastic pipe and tank. Shape subbases and bottoms of excavation with recesses to receive pipe bells, flanged connections, valves and similar enlargements in the piping systems and I set bottom of trench at proper pitch and correct elevations with subbase material. B. Concrete Encasement: Where piping under roadways is less than 2' -6" below surface of roadway, provide 4" base slab of concrete to support piping. After piping is installed and tested, provide 4" thick encasement (sides and top) of concrete before backfilling. Provide Class 250 concrete for . 1 encasement and slab. . 3.07 BACKFILLING - 10 . A. Do not backfill until installed mechanical work has been tested and accepted wherever testing is indicated. Install drainage fill where indicated, and tamp to a uniform firm density. Backfill with finely- graded subbase material to 6" above wrapped, coated and plastic piping and tanks, and to center line of other tanks (where recommended by tank manufacturer, use "pea gravel" backfill). I Condition backfill material by either drying or adding water uniformly, to whatever extent may be necessary to facilitate compaction to the required densities. Do not backfill with frozen materials. 3.08 CLEANING 1 A. General: Clean all dirt and construction dust and debris from all mechanical piping systems and leave in a new condition. Touch up paint where necessary. I B. Domestic Water System: Flush with clean water to eliminate grease, cuttings and foreign matter; run water until clear and free of oil. Chlorinate domestic water as per procedure outlined by Board — of Health I C. Sanitary and Storm Drainage System: 1. Remove construction debris from cleanouts, drains, strainers, baskets, traps, etc., and leave same accessible and operable. Place plugs in the end of uncompleted conduit at the end of the day or whenever work stops. I 2. Before final acceptance of completed sewer system, flush and clean the entire system with water. Trap and remove solid material obtained from flushing and cleaning from the new system. Do not allow debris to enter the existing sewer system. ' D. Gas Piping: Blow clear of debris with nitrogen or oil free air. Clean all low point strainers and pockets. E. Heating Water Systems: I 1. Use one pound of trisodium phosphate per 50 gallons in the system, or one pound of sodium carbonate for each 30 gallons in the system or one pound of sodium hydroxide (lye) for each 50 gallons in the system. 2. Fill, vent and circulate the system with this solution at design operating temperature. I 3. After circulating for four hours, drain and fill with fresh water. Test for pH and add sufficient amount of the cleaning chemical to obtain a pH between 7 and 8. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15060 -5 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15060 PIPES AND PIPE FITTINGS 4. Clean all strainers and remove start -up strainers (from suction diffusers) after the system has operated for one week. 3.09 TEST A. General: 1. Minimum duration of two hours or longer, as directed for all tests. Furnish report of test observation signed by qualified inspector. Make all tests before applying insulation, backfilling, or otherwise concealing piping or connecting fixtures or equipment. Where part of the system must be tested to avoid concealment before the entire system is complete, test that portion separately, same as for entire system. 2. Provide all necessary temporary equipment for testing, including pump and gauges. Remove control devices before testing and do not use piping system valves to isolate sections where test pressure exceeds valve pressure rating. Fill each section with water and pressurize for the indicated pressure and time. 3. Observe each test section for leakage at end of test period. Test fails if leakage is observed or if pressure drop exceeds 5% of test pressure. B. Repair: 1. Repair piping system sections which fail the required piping test by disassembly and re- installation, using new materials to the extent required to overcome leakage. Do not use chemical stop -leak compounds, solder, mastics, or other temporary repair methods. • 2. Drain test water from piping systems after testing and repair work has been completed. • C. Sewer: Furnish all facilities and personnel for conducting the test. Test in accord with the requirements of the State Plumbing Inspector and local authorities. D. Plumbing Waste and Vent Piping: Hydrostatic test by filling to highest point, but not less than 10' . -. - water column on major horizontal portion._ __ - E. Water Piping: Hydrostatic pressure of 100 psig without loss for four hours. F. Natural Gas Piping: One half hour minimum air at 60 psig for 2 psig gas, and 15 minutes at 10 psig for 7" water gauge natural gas or as approved and certified by serving utility. G. Heating Water Piping: 75 psig hydrostatic for 30 psig systems without loss for four hours. 1 H. Tanks and Equipment: Hydrostatic pressure to 1.5 times operating pressure. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15060 -6 Printed 07/27/04 SECTION 15090 I SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. I 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the mechanical piping and equipment systems specified elsewhere in these specifications. I B. Provide pipe and equipment hangers, supports, anchors and related items for complete anchor, hanger and support systems. ' 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Standards: The. Manufacturers Standardization Society (MSS) of the Valve and Fittings Industry Practice SP -58 and SP -69 are referenced in this section. I B. Provide factory- fabricated horizontal piping hangers, clamps, hanger rod, shields, supports, etc., of the indicated MSS type and size. • C. Seismic Requirements: Provide seismic restraints in accordance with UBC Section 1632. Design restraint systems in accordance with "Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines for Mechanical Systems," Second Edition, 1998, SMACNA, or "A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint" Oil ASHRAE RP 812, 1999: PART 2- PRODUCTS I 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Manufacturers: B -Line, Carpenter & Paterson, Grinnell, Michigan, Superstrut or accepted ' substitute. I B. Listed Types: MSS Piping Types listed with Grinnell figure numbers in parentheses where - applicable (or other manufacturers as noted). I 2.02 SUPPORTS • Horizontal Pi in Hangers Supports: • A. ping Han r g 1. Adjustable Clevis Hanger: MSS Type 1 (Fig. 260). 2. Adjustable Band Hanger: MSS Type 7 (Fig. 97), fabricated from steel. I 3. Adjustable Swivel Band Hanger: MSS Type 10 (Fig. 70). 4. Clamp: MSS Type 4 (Fig. 212, 216). 5. Double -Bolt Clamp: MSS Type 3 (Fig. 295A, 295H), including pipe spacers. I B. Equipment and Piping Supports: 1. Channel Support System: Galvanized, 12 gauge channel and bracket support systems, single or double channel as indicated on the Drawings or as required by piping and equipment weights. Grinnell "Power Strut" channel. Acceptable manufacturers: Super I Strut, Globestrut, Bee, Kindorf or Unistrut. 2. Steel Brackets: Welded structural steel shapes complying with one of the following: a. Light Duty: MSS Type 31 (Fig. 194). b. Medium Duty: MSS Type 32 (Fig. 195). c. Heavy Duty: MSS Type 33 (Fig. 199). 3. Rooftop Pipe Stands: MIRO Industries model 24 -R or accepted substitute. C. Vertical Pipe Clamps: I 1. Two -Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 8 (Fig. 261). 2. Four -Bolt Riser Clamp: MSS Type 42 include pipe spacers at inner bolt- holes. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15090 -1 Prins erl 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15090 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS D. Hanger Rod Attachment: I 1. Hanger Rod: Grinnell Fig. 140 or 146 for all sizes. Right hand threaded. 2. Turnbuckles: MSS Type 13 (Fig. 230). . 3. Weldless Eye -Nut: MSS Type 17 (Fig. 290). 4. Malleable Eye- Socket: MSS Type 16 (Fig. 110R). 5. Clevises: MSS Type 14 (Fig. 299). E. Building Attachments: 1. Concrete Inserts: MSS Type 18 (Fig. 282), steel or Grinnell Power -Strut PS349 I continuous channel. Acceptable Manufacturers: Michigan Hanger, Globestrut, Unistrut, Super Strut. 2. Clamps: MSS Type 19 (Fig. 285, 281), Type 20, 21 (Fig. 225, 226, 131), Type 23 (Fig. 86, 87, 88), Type 25 (Fig. 227), Type 27 through 30 where applicable. I F. Saddles and Shields: 1. Protection Saddles: MSS Type 39 (Fig. 160). 2. Protection Shields: MSS Type 40 (Fig. 167). 3. Preinsulated Pipe Supports: Pipe Shields Inc. or accepted substitute. a. Pipe supported on rods - Models A1000, A2000, A3000, A4000 and A9000. b. Pipe supported on flat surfaces - Models A1000, A2000, A5000, A6000 and • A7000. I c. Pipe supported on pipe rolls - Models A3000, A4000, A5000, A6000 and A8000. G. Miscellaneous Hanger Materials: 1. Metal Framing: Provide products complying with NEMA STD ML 1. I 2. Steel Plates, Shapes and Bars: ASTM A -36. 3. Cement Grout: Portland cement (ASTM C -150, Type I or Type III) and clean uniformly graded, natural sand (ASTM C -404, Size No. 2). Mix at a ratio of 1.0 part cement to 3.0 - parts sand, by volume with only the minimum amount of, water required for placement and hydration. 4. Heavy Duty Steel Trapezes: Fabricate from steel shapes selected for the loads required; weld steel in accordance with AWS Standards. 5. Pipe Guides: Provide factory- fabricated guides, of cast semi -steel or heavy fabricated t steel, consisting of a bolted two - section outer cylinder and base with.a two - section guiding spider bolted tight to the pipe. Size guide and spiders to clear pipe and insulation (if any), and cylinder. Provide guides of the length recommended by the manufacturer -to allow indicated travel. I 6. Standard Bolts and Nuts: ASTM A 307, Grade A. 7. Concrete Anchors: Rawl Lok/Bolt, Hilti "HSL," ITT Phillips, Red Head Wedge Anchors, Ramset Trubolt or Dynabolt or accepted substitute. 8. Shop Primer: Manufacturer's standard rust inhibitive primer. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 1 A. General: Proceed with the installation of hangers, supports and anchors only after the required building structural work has been completed in areas where the work is to be installed. Correct I inadequacies including (but not limited to) the proper placement of inserts anchors and other building structural attachments. 1. Install hangers, supports, clamps, and attachments to support piping and equipment properly from the building structure. Use no wire or perforated metal to support piping, I and no supports from other piping or equipment. For exposed continuous pipe runs, install hangers and supports of the same type and style as installed for adjacent similar piping. 2. Prevent electrolysis in the support of copper tubing by the use of hangers and supports which are copper plated or by other recognized industry methods. 3. Support fire sprinkler piping independently of other piping and in accordance with NFPA Pamphlet 13. 4. Arrange supports to prevent eccentric loading of joists and joist girders. Locate supports I at panel points only. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC • I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15090 -2 Primed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15090 1 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS I B. Provisions for Movement: 1. Install hangers and supports to allow controlled movement of piping systems and to permit freedom of movement between pipe anchors, and to facilitate the action of expansion joints, expansion loops, expansion bends and similar units. I 2. Install hangers and supports so that equipment and piping live and dead loading and stresses from movement will not be transmitted to connected equipment. 3. Install hangers and supports to provide the indicated pipe slopes, and so that maximum pipe deflections allowed by ANSI B31 are not exceeded. Comply with the following I installation requirements: a. Clamps: Attach clamps, including spacers (if any), to piping outside the insulated piping support. Do not exceed pipe stresses allowed by ANSI B31. • b. Insulated. Pipe Supports: Insulated pipe supports shall be supplied and installed I c. on all insulated pipe and tubing. Load Rating: All insulated pipe supports shall be load rated by the manufacturer based upon testing and analysis in conformance with ASME B31.1, MSS SP -58, MSS SP -69 and MSS SP -89. I d. Support Type: Manufacturer's recommendations, hanger style and load shall determine support type. e. Insulated Piping Supports: Where insulated piping with continuous vapor barrier or where exposed to view in finished areas is specified, install hard maple wood insulation shields (Elcen Fig. 216) or steel pipe covering protection shields I (MSS type 39) at each hanger. C. Pipe Support:. Vertical Spacing: Support at base, at equivalent of every floor height (maximum 10' as P required by Code) and just below roof line. 2. Screwed or Welded Steel or Copper Piping: Maximum hanger spacing shall be as follows: -- . - , - - . II Steel Copper 1-1/4" and smaller 7' span 6' span 1-1/2" pipe 9' span 6' span 2" pipe 10' span 10' span 2 -1/2" & larger 12' span 10' span I 3.. Cast Iron Soil Pipe: a. Hubless and Compression Joint: At every other joint except when developed length exceeds 4', then at each joint. P b. Additional Support: Provide at each horizontal branch and /or at concentrated loads to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. 4. Install additional hangers or supports at concentrated loads such as pumps, valves, etc. to maintain alignment and prevent sagging. P 5. Support Rod: Hanger support rods sized as follows: a n d -- -- -- -- Rod Size Inches mm Inches mm P112" to 4" 12.7 to 101.6 3/8" 9.5 5" to 8" 127.0 to 203.2 1/2" 12.7 10" to 12" 254.0 to 304.8 5/8" 15.9 I D. Adjust hangers and supports to bring piping to proper levels and elevations. E. Provide all necessary structural attachments such as anchors, beam clamps, hanger flanges and brackets in accordance with MSS SP -69. Attachments to beams wherever possible. Supports I suspended from other piping, equipment, metal decking, etc., are not acceptable. F. Horizontal banks of piping may be supported on common steel channel member spaced not more than the shortest allowable span required on the individual pipe. Maintain piping at its relative lateral position using clamps or clips. Allow lines subject to thermal expansion to roll axially or slide. Size channel struts for piping weights. 1 I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15090 -3 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15090 SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS 1 3.02 INSTALLATION OF ANCHORS A. Install anchors at the proper locations to prevent stresses from exceeding those permitted by ANSI B31, where recommended in SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual" or exceeding manufacturer's recommended loading, and to prevent the transfer of loading and stresses to connected equipment. B. Fabricate and install anchor by welding steel shapes, plates and bars to the piping and/or equipment and to the structure. Comply with ANSI B31 and AWS standards and SMACNA "Seismic Restraint Manual." C. Bolting: Provide standard plate washers under heads and nuts of bolts bearing on wood. Soap threads of lag bolts prior to installing. D. Structural Blocking: Locate as indicated and as required to support mechanical piping and equipment. E. Where expansion compensators are indicated, install anchors in accordance with the expansion unit manufacturer's written instructions, to limit movement of piping and forces to the maximums recommended by the manufacturer of each unit. • F. Anchor Spacings: Install anchors at the ends of principal pipe runs, at intermediate points in pipe runs between expansion loops and bends. Make provisions for presetting of anchors as required to accommodate both expansion and contraction of piping. 1 G. Painting: Refer to Section 15050. 3.03 EQUIPMENT RESTRAINTS A. - Systems and equipment shall be anchored to resist displacement, including sliding, swinging, and overturning due to seismic forces. Friction due to equipment weight shall not be considered as anchorage. B. The contractor shall retain a consulting engineer or equipment manufacturer to design the seismic restraint systems. C. Contractor shall submit calculations and shop drawings, sealed and signed by a professional engineer, showing seismic restraint design for all equipment weighing 400 lbs. or more and for all piping and ductwork required to be braced. Design shall show analysis of supporting structure, anchorages, and restraints in accordance with UBC Section 1632. D. Seismic restraint system components shall be approved by the California Office of Statewide Health Planning and Development (OSHPD) for fixed equipment anchorages. Acceptable manufacturers: Mason Industries, Tolco, or approved. END OF SECTION • • 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 1 5090 -4 Printed 07/27/04 SECTION 15100 1 • VALVES 1 PART 1 - GENERAL • 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. • I 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the valving for the piping system specified elsewhere in these specifications. 1. B. Provide valves where shown on the Drawings and specified herein. • 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Provide factory fabricated valves of the type, body material and pressure class indicated and service indicated. . I B. Valve Sizes: Same as connecting pipe size. C. Bronze valves shall comply with MSS- SP -80. Iron gate and globe valves shall comply with MSS- SP -70. - 0 - - PART 2 - PRODUCTS - - _ 01 2.01 VALVE TYPES A. General: Where possible, provide valves from a single manufacturer. B. Acceptable Manufacturers: Milwaukee, Crane, Grinnell, Nibco, Hammond, Stockham, Watts, and I Walworth. Grinnell numbers are given except as noted. C. Domestic Water Systems: S, 1. Valves 2" and Smaller: a'. Ball: Two - piece, bronze body, standard port, 400 psi WOG, Fig. 3500. b. , Check: Bronze body, swing check, 200 psi WOG, Fig. 3300. 2. Valves 2" through 12 ": .. I a. Ball: Three- piece, cast bronze body, full port, 600 psi WOG, T /S -595Y. b. Butterfly: Ductile iron body, aluminum bronze disc, 200 psi WOG, Lugged body- LD -2000, Wafer body — WD -2000, Grooved body — GD ,4765. _ - c. Gate (to 3 "): Bronze body, non - rising stem, 200 psi WOG, T/S -133. d. Gate (4" to 12 "): Iron body, bronze trim, non- rising stem, solid wedge, bolted bonnet, 200 psi WOG, F -619. D. Heating Water: ,1 1. Valves up to 12 ": a. Ball: Two - piece, bronze body, standard port, 400 psi WOG, Fig. 3500. b. Butterfly: Iron body, aluminum bronze disc, 200 psi WOG, series 8000. c. Check: Bronze or iron body swing check, 200 psi WOG, Figs. 3300 and 6300. E. Natural Gas: UL listed or AGA approved valves. 1. 10 psig or Less: a. Ball: Watts FBV -1. I F. Butterfly Valve Operators: Locking lever for shut -off service; "Memory Stop" for lever handle and slotted index plate for infinite number of settings for throttling service; gear operator with babbitt sprocket rim for chain- operated valves and gear operators on all 6" or larger valves. I G. Butterfly Valve Style: Lug -type with cap screws for all valves utilized for equipment isolation for servicing. • I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15100 -1 Printed !17/97/04 SECTION 15100 VALVES 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Comply with the following requirements: 1. Install valves where required for proper operation of piping and equipment, including valves. in branch lines where necessary to isolate sections of piping. 2. Locate valves in accessible spaces (or behind access panels) and so that separate support can be provided when necessary. 3. Install valves with stems pointed up, in the vertical position where possible, but in no case with stems pointed downward from a horizontal plane. - B. Insulated Valves: Install extended -stem valves in all piping specified as insulated, and arrange in the proper manner to receive insulation. C. Selection of Valve Ends (Pipe Connections): Select and install valves with ends matching the types of pipe /tube connections. D. Valve Access: Provide access panels to all valves installed behind walls, in furring or otherwise inaccessible. E. Fluid Control: Install gate, ball, globe, plug, and butterfly valves to comply with ANSI B31. Install check valves where indicated and where flow reversal is obviously not desirable and can be reasonably expected to occur, including piping at the discharge of pumps. Install silent check valves where necessary to eliminate water hammer occurring from reversal of flow. • END OF SECTION • • • 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15100-2 Primed 07 /27/04 11 SECTION 15240 I MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1 A. The requirements of this section apply to the vibration isolation for mechanical equipment specified elsewhere. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Isolator Engineering: Selected and furnished by the equipment manufacturer. Select isolators for 98% efficiency unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. I B. Manufacturer: Provide field installed isolation required from a single manufacturer where possible. 1.03 SUBMITTALS • A. Provide product data sheets on all vibration isolators and seismic restraints. B. Provide itemized list showing the items of equipment or piping to be isolated, isolator type and I model number selected, isolator loading and deflection, and reference to specified drawings showing frame and construction. I C. Provide manufacturer's drawings showing equipment frame construction for each item including dimensions, structural member sizes and support locations. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 EQUIPMENT FRAMES I A. Roof Curb Mounted Vibration Isolation Bases: • I. Mount rooftop equipment on factory fabricated vibration isolation curbs that fit under the isolated equipment. Construct the lower member of rectangular steel tube containing adjustable and removable steel springs that support the upper floating. member. The upper frame shall provide continuous support for the equipment and shall be captive so as to resiliently resist wind and seismic forces. A continuous flexible aluminum seal joined at the corners with EPDM bellows shall be nailed to the wooden port frame to it . • weatherproof the assembly. Hardware shall be cadmium plated or galvanized with springs plated or provided with an approved rust - resistant finish. Mason Industries RSC_' sized to fit equipment furnished. Acceptable equivalents: Vibrex,Thycurb, Amber Booth, Micrometl. I 2. Provide perimeter angle and cross members to support two layers of 5/8" sheet rock. See Part 3 for acoustical protection. Mason Industries RSCA or approved. I 2.02 VIBRATION ISOLATORS A. Flexible Pipe Connectors: All stainless steel hose and braid with carbon steel connections. Male thread ends on flexible connectors 2" and smaller, and flanged connections on 1 -1/2" and larger connectors. Amber BoothType SS or equal Flexonics PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install vibration isolators and flexible connectors as specified herein, as shown on the I Drawings and as recommended by manufacturer. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15240 -1 1 SECTION 15240 MECHANICAL SOUND AND VIBRATION CONTROL B. Flexible Pipe Connections: • 1. Provide flexible connections on all piping to spring isolated equipment, where indicated on Drawings and for all coils mounted in spring isolated air handling units or plenums. Coils in rigid units and plenums do not require flexible connectors. Provide a flexible connection in both the supply and return connections to the coil as near the coil as .-, possible. 2. Install connectors in a straight line as recommended by the manufacturer without offsets or twists and support pipe without any load on flexible connectors. Minimum live length shall be as follows: II Pipe Size Minimum Live Length • 1" through 1 -1/2" 8" 2" through 2 -1/2" 10 3" through 4" . . 12" Over 4" 18" ,l E. Anchorage: Anchor all isolators to the floor, wall or ceiling structure and anchor points reinforced where necessary. Anchor bolts, cap screws, etc., shall not be continuous through the isolator such that vibrations are transmitted to the structure. II F. Rooftop HVAC Unit Acoustical Protection: , 1. All roof mounted HVAC units shall be supported and anchored on leveled, flashed and 1 counterflashed vibration isolated curbs anchored to resist seismic forces and suitable for the roof construction. Minimum curb height shall be 12" above the roof unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Flashing into the roof is specified in another Section. 2. Install two layers of 5/8" weatherproof sheet rock with staggered joints on the perimeter 5, _ angle and cross members provided with the vibration isolator bases. Apply sheet rock - . around all ductwork above the roof and caulk all joints and seams. Provide additional acoustical materials as recommended by acoustical engineer. G. Adjustment: Adjustable during and after installation, to ensure sufficient clearance between 4 1 , vibration isolation element and rigid restraining device. Do not install isolators until they have been loaded and adjusted to achieve the specified static deflection and clearances. RESTRAINTS 3.02 EQUIPMENT RE S A. All equipment shall be anchored to resist displacement including sliding, swinging, and overturning due to seismic forces. Friction due to equipment weight shall not be considered as anchorage. B. Contractor shall submit shop drawings showing seismic restraint design for all equipment weighing i t 400 lbs. or more. Design shall show analysis of supporting structure, anchorages, and restraints in accordance with UBC Section 1-630- _ _._._ _ . —__ -- - -- I END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 i 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL – T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD – TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15240-2 Printed 07/27/04 1 • I SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION PART 1— GENERAL • 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the insulation of mechanical equipment specified . elsewhere in these specifications. 1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Insulation Thickness and Thermal Performance: Comply with Chapter 13 provisions of the State of Oregon Structural Specialty Code. i1 B. Composite (Insulation, Jacket or Facing and Adhesives) Fire and Smoke Hazard Ratings: Not to exceed a flame spread of 25 or smoke development of 50. 1 C. Component Ratings of Accessories (Adhesives, Mastics, Cements, Tapes, Finishing Cloth for Fittings): Same as "B" requirements above and permanently treated. No water soluble treatments. . 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING 11 A. General: In addition to the requirements specified in Section 15050, the following apply: 1. Deliver insulation, coverings, cements, adhesives and coatings to the site in factory - fabricated containers with the manufacturer's stamp or label affixed showing fire hazard . ratings of the products. Store insulation in original wrappings and protect from weather I and construction traffic. . . . . 2. - Protect insulation against dirt, water, chemical and mechanical damage. Do not install I damaged insulation. Remove such insulation from project site. - 1.04 SUBMITTALS A. Submit catalog data and performance characteristics for each product specified. PART 2 — PRODUCTS - I 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Insulating Manufacturers: Schuller, Knauf, Armstrong, Owens- Corning, Pittsburgh Corning, Pabco, Imcoa or Certain Teed. Schuller products are listed unless indicated otherwise. 1 B. Adhesive Manufacturers: Benjamin Foster, 3M, Insul - Coustic, Borden, Kingco or Armstrong. 2.02 PIPING INSULATION A. Interior Piping Systems 40 to 850 Deg. F: Glass fiber preformed pipe insulation with a minimum K -value of 0.23 at 75 Deg. F, a minimum density of 3.5 pounds per cubic foot within all- service vapor barrier jacket, vinyl or pre -sized finish and pressure sensitive seal. Schuller "Micro -Lok." I B. Exterior Installations: Same as for interior installations except 0.016" aluminum finish jacket. Schuller "Micro -Lok." I C. Pipe Temperatures Minus 30 to 180 Deg. F: Flexible, preformed, pre -slit, self - sealing elastomeric . pipe insulation up to 2 -1/8" ID, thermal conductivity of 0.27 BTU /hr. sq. ft. /in. at 75 deg. F and vapor transmission rating of 0.2 perms /inch. Apply in thickness necessary to prevent condensation on the surface at 85 deg. F and 70% RH. Armstrong "Armaflex 2000" or, in ' concealed locations, Imcoa or Nomaco also approved. 2.03 DUCT INSULATION I A. Interior Above Grade Ductwork: Glass fiber blanket with "FSK" facing, k value = 0.31 at 75 deg. F, and UL 25/50 surface burning rating. Schuller "Microlite." • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15250 -1 Primed 07/27/04 • 1 SECTION 15250 • MECHANICAL INSULATION ' 2.04 EQUIPMENT INSULATION A. Equipment Temperatures From 70 to 450 Deg. F: Glass fiber 3 pound density insulation with a i 0.23 thermal conductivity at 75 deg. F. Schuller "814 Spin -Glas" with "FSK" jacket or finished as recommended by manufacturer. 2.05 INSULATION ACCESSORIES 1 A. Insulation Compounds and Materials: Provide rivets, bands, adhesives, cements, coatings, sealers, welded studs, etc., as recommended by the manufacturers for the insulation and conditions - specified. No stapled jacket fastenings are acceptable. 1 B. Interior Tanks and Equipment Insulation Covering: Finished metal jacket or as recommended by the manufacturer for insulation material specified. C. PVC Protective Jacketing and Valve and Pipe Fitting Covers: Schuller Zeston 2000, Proto LoSmoke, or Ceel -Co Ceel -Tite 100 Series with precut fitting fiberglass insulation or approved. D. Jacket Lap Sealing Adhesives: Foster Drion 85 -75 contact cement or approved substitute. '' PART 3 — EXECUTION 3.01 PIPING INSULATION 1 A. General: Do not insulate underground piping except at joints and fittings on preinsulated piping unless indicated otherwise. B. = Domestic Water Piping: .,_ 1. Insulate with glass fiber pipe covering, 1" thick for cold water piping and for 1" and smaller hot water piping; 1 -1/2" for 1 -1/4" and larger hot water piping. 2. At contractor's option and in accordance with Part 2 of this section, elastomeric III insulation may be installed on domestic water piping in thicknesses equivalent to the glass fiber insulation. Installation shall comply with the manufacturer's recommendation with joints and seams completely sealed. Insulate hot water return piping same as cold water piping. 3. Do not insulate emergency shower supply line. C. Heating Water Piping: Insulate with glass fiber pipe covering: Size Thickness • 1/2" to 1 -1/2" 1 -1/2" 2" to 3" 2" 4" and larger 2 -1/2" Runouts up to 1" and 12' length D. Pipe Fittings: 1. Insulate. and finish all fittings including valve bodies, bonnets, unions, flanges and expansion joints with precut fiberglass insulation and preformed PVC covers sealed to adjacent insulation jacket for continuous vapor barrier covering over all fittings. 2. Use 1/2" thick Armaflex or Aerotube foamed plastic at flexible pipe connections on chilled and /or cold water lines. No insulation on other flexible pipe connections. 3. Provide removable /reusable insulation covers on 4" and larger valves, unions, flanges, pump casings, strainers and similar fittings or equipment requiring periodic service. E. Protective Covering: Install continuous protective PVC or metal covering on all piping and fittings in mechanical rooms below 8', or outside where insulation may be subject to damage. Install with rivets or cement seams and joints. F. Piping Insulation Lap Seams and Butt Joints: Install insulation jacket in accordance with manufacturer's recommendation. Where jacket joint and lap seams have not adhered, remove affected section of insulation and reinstall or apply lap sealing adhesive in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC ' JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15250 -2 Printed 07/27/04 SECTION 15250 MECHANICAL INSULATION G. Interior Rain Drains: 1. Concealed: Insulate with 1" thick one pound density glass fiber blanket and continuous vapor barrier jacket 3.02 DUCTWORK INSULATION A. Ductwork: Insulate the following: 1. All supply ductwork. 2. All supply and return ductwork in systems routed in unconditioned spaces or exposed to the outside conditions. 3. All outside air intake ducts. 4. All ductwork required to be insulated by code. B. Insulation Thickness: Select board and blanket insulation of thickness required to provide the following installed R- value. 1. All heating or cooling system supply and return ducts located on the exterior of the insulated building envelope and all outside air intake ducts. a. R -8: Zone 1 b. R -12: Zone 2 2. Ducts located within or below concrete slabs on grade, R -4. 3. All heating and cooling 'system return ducts located in unconditioned spaces, R -3.5. C. Fittings: Wire and duct adhesive as required. To prevent sagging on all rectangular or square ducts over 24" wide, install Gramweld or welding pins on the bottom. Maximum spacing 18" on center in both directions. D. Installation: Applied with butt joints, all seams sealed with vapor seal mastic or taped with 2" wide vapor - proof, pressure- sensitive tape. Seal all penetrations with vapor barrier adhesive. E. Internally Lined Ductwork: Where internally lined ductwork is indicated on the Drawings and/or specified, no exterior insulation is required. Select duct lining to provide the required R- value. Carefully lap the ends of the exterior insulation a minimum of 6" past the interior insulation unless otherwise shown. Seal the end of vapor barrier jacket to the duct with mastic where the vapor barrier is required. Duct lining is specified in Section 15880. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15250 -3 Punted 07 /27/04 • 1 SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION • PART 1 - GENERAL . 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1 A. The requirements of this section apply to the fire protection system. B. Provide all, labor and material and perform such other services necessary and reasonably incidental 1 to the design and installation of an automatic sprinkler and standpipe system for all areas indicated on the Drawings and as required by the Governing Agency. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. Contractor Qualifications: 1. Established fire protection contractor regularly engaged in the design and installation of automatic fire sprinkler systems. III 2. Employ workers experienced and skilled in this trade. 3. System designer: Qualified and certified for the design of fire protection sprinkler systems. NICET level III or IV technician or Professional Engineer experienced in the ft design of sprinkler systems. B. Governing Agency: All work in accordance with and accepted by the following hereafter referred to Governing Agencies: 1. Fire Marshal State of Oregon. 2. .. Fire Marshal City of Tigard, Oregon. 01 C. Design Requirements: 1. Comply with the latest issue of NFPA Standard 13. 2. Design, lay out and install a hydraulically calculated wet pipe system utilizing code approved automatic devices designed particularly for use in this type of system. I 3. Fire Sprinkler Coverage: As required by the Governing Agency and including fire protection of all areas noted. 4. Occupancy Hazard: Final Occupancy Hazard designation in accordance with the Governing Agency requirements. 5. Revisions to the Contractor's design required by the Governing Agency shall be at the Contractor's expense. 6. Coordinate and pay for all flow tests required for design. 7. Provide complete flow calculations from point of known flow,and pressure. 8. See drawings for areas served and systems to be modified. D. Acceptable Manufacturers: All sprinkler specialty material Grinnell /Gem, Central, Reliable, Globe, Star, Viking, Automatic Sprinkler Corp. of America with UL or FM approval for use in I automatic sprinkler systems. All materials and equipment suitable for 175 psi working pressure. E. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15050. 1 F. Work of Other Trades: Comply with requirements of Section 15050. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Working Drawings: 1. Prepare fire protection system working drawing showing locations and types of head or outlets, alarm valves and devices, pipe sizes and cutting lengths, test tees and valves, drain valves, and other related items. Plans shall comply with the requirements of I Chapter 8, 1999 . NFPA 13, irregardless of the edition adopted by the Governing Agencies and used for design. 2. Provide 3 sets of drawings showing sprinkler head locations and layout coordinated with architectural ceiling details to the Architect for review prior to submitting details to the I Governing Agencies. r , 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC • JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15300 -1 PrWed 07/27/04 II SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION 3. Provide 6 sets of drawings to the Architect to be provided to Insurance Underwriter for approval. 4. Provide 6 sets of drawings to designated representatives of the Fire Marshal for approval. I 5. Then provide 6 sets of approved Drawings to the Architect for final review. B. Submittals: i 1. Sprinkler Heads: Product Data for each type of head. II 2. Alarm flow or pressure switches. 3. Fire department connection. 4. System control valves. 5. Piping materials. II 6. Alarm bell. 7. Miscellaneous Equipment. C. Test Reports: Submit certificates of completion of tests and inspections. 1 1.04 EXTRA STOCK ' A. Additional Heads: Provide number, type and temperature rating installed as required to meet NFPA 13 requirements. . B. Storage Cabinet: Provide as required to receive reserve sprinkler heads and special installation ` a' tools required. C. Index Label: Provide for each head indicating manufacturer, model, orifice, size or K- factor, and temperature rating. Also provide, inside cabinet, a list of heads stored within and brief description of where installed. PART2- PRODUCTS • . 4 2.01 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT A. Miscellaneous Sprinkler Specialties: Complete system including all items required by the Governing Agency including but not limited to: 1 1. Electric alarm switch and indoor and outdoor alarm bell or water motor gong. 2. Double check assembly. 1 3. Valve monitoring switches. 4. Fire department hose connections. 5. Wiring from the alarm switches to the point of connection in the Fire Alarm Control Panel. Coordinate with the Electrical Work specified in Division 16. kli -- - — B. - -- Winkler Heads: Approved heads with temperature ratings required for service indicated. 1. Unfinished Areas: Upright, pendent or sidewall spray type, plain bronze. Provide with 1 head guards. 2. Finished Areas: Chrome plated recessed and sidewall heads in finished ceilings and where piping is exposed use chrome plated upright heads. . C. Escutcheons: Provide polished chrome escutcheons on pipe extending through finished walls and II ceilings. D. Above Ground Water Piping: Use standard weight (schedule 40) black steel pipe ASTM A53, a A135, or A795, and cast iron screwed or mechanical joint fittings especially adapted and approved for sprinkler work. Use reducing fittings where changes in pipe size occur. Bushings are ill prohibited. E. At Contractor's option, Schedule 10 black steel pipe ASTM A135 or ASTM A795, and mechanical joint fittings specifically approved for sprinkler use, may be substituted for the black steel pipe specified above. Pipe shall be UL listed and FM approved for 300 psi working pressure. Pipe must have a CRR of 1.00 or greater. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL – T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD – TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15300 -2 Printed 07 /27/04 1 . SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION F. At contractor' option, thin wall threadable steel pipe, ASTM A135 or A795, and cast iron or 1l malleable iron screwed fittings 11/2" and smaller, approved for sprinkler work. G. Valves: UL and/or FM listed for fire protection service. 1. Iron body OS &Y pattern, bronze mounted double disc, parallel seat. 2. Iron body butterfly style with EPDM liner, bronze disc with lever or indicating type gear operator. 3. Bronze body ball valve, three -piece design, with approved operator. it 4. Where required by Governing Agency, provide wall or post style indicating valves. H. Valve Monitoring Switches: Provide approved monitoring switches where shown on the Drawings or required by Governing Agency. I I. Guards: Standard manufacture. I I PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Connect to water supply source as shown on Drawings, check adequacy and call any deficiency to attention of Architect. Coordinate with work in Section 15050. B. Install all piping in a true and even manner with lines pitched for drainage and system arranged so I that it can be entirely emptied of water. Install hangers at all branch line connections to cross mains and at all other points as required in herein before specified Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. - and NFPA standards. • OA C. Support all pipe work from building construction with mild steel hangers spaced not more than 12 feet on centers. Support mains independently of branches and in no case shall branch hangers assume any portion of the weight of mains. D. Locate sprinkler heads in repeating, modular pattern, centered and accurately coordinated with ceiling grid as indicated. Conceal all piping unless indicated otherwise. Coordinate design with lighting and exposed HVAC duct layout in areas without ceilings. I E. Locate and install the required fire sprinkler alarm, flow, and test and drain valves where required by the Governing Agency. F. Where sprinkler lines penetrate fire rated partitions, provide fire stopping system in accordance with Section 15050. 3.02 TEST 1 A. Test all pipes to a hydrostatic pressure of 200 psi and maintain for four hours minimum. Perform other tests as directed by Governing Agency. 3.03 PAINT 1 A. Paint all exposed piping and hangers in accordance with Section 09900. Do not paint heads. 3.04 CERTIFICATE OF COMPLETION II A. Obtain and deliver to Owner a certificate, in duplicate, stating that system as installed has been inspected and accepted by authorities and /or agencies having jurisdiction, and that all regulations affecting work have been satisfied. Submit an acceptable certificate to the Owner before final I payment is requested. B. Certificate: Minimum NFPA Form 8 -1 information per NFPA 13. II 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15300 -3 Pr hued 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15300 FIRE PROTECTION END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 • _ _ _ . __.• _ . 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC 1 JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15300 -4 Printed 07/27/04 • I • SECTION 15400 PLUMBING r • PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the plumbing system. • B. Provide fixtures specified and shown on the Drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Code: Comply with requirements of the Oregon State Plumbing Specialty Code. 1 .' B. Fixture color: White unless indicated otherwise. C. Utility Connections: Make utility and equipment connections and install distribution piping as I shown on the Drawings and specified herein. Verify size, location, depth, elevation and arrangement of connection points before bidding or starting work. D. Potable Water Valves: Potable water valves not limited to faucets, mixing valves, or pressure reducing valves. Valves shall meet NSF Standard 61, Section 9, for drinking water faucets and I , shall be brass construction. Brass components which contact water within the faucet shall be from brass which contains no more than 3 percent lead by dry weight. I E. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15050, Article 1.2, paragraph D. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 PIPING A. Piping, fittings, and related items as specified in related Sections 15060, 15100 and 15250. 2.02 INTERIOR PLUMBING MATERIALS A. Cleanouts: • • I 1. Manufacturer: J.R. Smith, Zurn, Wade, Ancon, or approved substitute. 2. Types: a. Tile Floor Cleanouts: Smith 4053 -U with square heavy -duty nickel bronze top, taper thread, bronze plug, and vandalproof screws. b. Carpeted Floor Cleanout: Smith 4023 -U -X with round heavy -duty nickel bronze top, taper thread, bronzeplug, carpet clamping device, and vandalproof screws. c. Concrete Floor Cleanout: Smith 4023 with round heavy -duty nickel bronze top. d. Wall Cleanouts: Smith 4472 -U, bronze ferrule with raised head bronze plug, stainless steel shallow cover and vandalproof screws. ig e. Outside Area Walks and Drives: Smith 4253 -U -G with galvanized cast iron body, top secured with vandalproof screws, taper thread and bronze plug. Install I in 18" x 18" x 6" deep concrete pad flush with grade. B. Flashing: Minimum 4# sheet lead; to extend horizontally 10" from edge of vent penetrations or rain drain body and vertically 12" minimum up from roof turned over and down into hub of vent or finished with bronze cap providing counterflashing for screwed pipe. I C. Air Chambers and Shock Arrester: Precharged bellows or sealed piston type manufactured to meet PDI WH -201 and ASSE 1010 Standards. Size in accordance with PDI procedures. J. R. Smith, PPP, Sioux Chief, Wade, Zurn, Ancon, or approved substitute. D. Traps: Except chrome plated fixture traps. Recessed drainage pattern for threaded pipe and same grade as pipe for cast iron pipe; with cleanout plugs in trap body in all above grade locations. 1 02054 • TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15400 -1 Prin to.1 m1-M04 I SECTION 15400 PLUMBING . I E. Gas Pressure Regulators: Size based on pressures indicated on the drawings and for 1.5 times connected load. Style and model as approved by Northwest Natural Gas Co. Maxitrol, Rockwell, 1 Fisher, Reliance, or approved substitute. 2.04 PLUMBING FIXTURES A. Stops: Furnish stop valves for all fixtures. Loose key style, in wall, angle or straight through pattern to fit installation. Stops to be all brass with full turn brass stem and replaceable washer, no plastic. Compression nuts to be high copper content brass. Finish to be copper nickel chrome • plate. Product to carry manufacturer's name. Risers to be chrome plated copper. McGuire, Chicago, Brasskraft, or approved substitute. B. Provide handicap piping protector kit on all exposed accessible fixture traps and supplies (I &S Insulation Co. Inc., Brocar Products Inc. kit 500R, McGuire "Prowrap ", Plumberex "Pro- 2000" or approved substitute. C. Stainless Steel Sinks: 1. Type 304, 18 gauge, self - rimming stainless steel sink installed with stainless steel crumb • cup strainer outlet unless noted otherwise, and flange tail piece. Elkay numbers are listed, Just approved. For faucets, Chicago numbers are listed; equal T &S approved except as noted. 2. Music "S -2 ": ADA, single compartment, Elkay LR2222 with 61/2" depth, grid strainer, II Chicago 1100 faucet and Elkay LK 1141A bubbler. D. Drains: 1 1: Zurn, Jay R. Smith, Wade and Mifab. Numbers scheduled on drawings represent minimum acceptable standard for locations involved. 2. Install 4 pound sheet lead flashing, extending not less than 10" from and clamped to all 4 drains not completely cast -in -place in a homogeneous material. PART 3 — EXECUTION 1 3.01 UTILITY SERVICE A. Sanitary and Storm Sewers: Connect to sanitary and storm sewers as shown on the Drawings and as required by the serving utility. Verify depth, size and location prior to installation of the new "- sewer systems. B. Water Service: Connect to water service. Verify serving utility requirements prior to beginning any installation. Verify water main size, depth, pressure and location prior to starting work. 3.02 EXCAVATION AND BACKFILL A. As specified in Section 15060. i 3.03 PIPING A. Install in accordance with Section 15060, 15090, 15100 and 15250. 1 B. Shock Arrestors and Air Chambers: Install at end of mains, in a battery of three or more flush valve- operated fixtures water header, ahead of quick closing and solenoid operated valves. Size per PDI recommendations where size is not indicated. Provide access panels. C. Trap Priming: Traps serving floor drains, floor sinks, catch basins, and similar fixtures shall be primed in accordance with Code requirements. I . 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 231 15400 -2 Printed 07 /27/04 .1 SECTION 15400 • ii PLUMBING 3.04 CLEANOUTS 1 A. Where required by code, at each change of sewer direction 45 degrees or greater and more than 10' long, at end of each branch or main and spaced not greater than 100' apart, as required by code and /or as shown on Drawings. id 3.05 FIXTURE INSTALLATION AND CONNECTION . A. All exposed fixture connections and piping shall be plated with polished chrome. Where chair carriers or special carrier design are not indicated, provide 3/16" thick by 6" wide steel to waste or vent piping and to available building construction. B. All fixtures in contact with finished walls shall be caulked with waterproof, white, non - hardening sealant which will not crack, shrink or change color with age. ' C. All fixtures and component parts shall conform to governing codes. I 3.06 FIXTURE CLEANING A. Remove construction protection, tags and labels and thoroughly clean all plumbing equipment and trim scour all fixtures just prior to building acceptance. I . 3.07 CHEMICAL WATER TREATMENT I A. Analyze the water condition and determine chemicals required for treatment. Provide sufficient _ chemicals for the initial fill and provide a list of the chemicals required for the Operating and Maintenance Manuals specified in Section 15050. The list shall include probable quantities of . 0 each chemical required for one year, availability of each chemical and the name and address of the supplier. I END OF SECTION 1 . . 1 I 1 1 I . 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15400 -3 Pt utted 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15500 • HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION ,1 A. The requirements of this section apply to the Heating, Ventilating and Air Conditioning systems. 1.02 SUBMITTALS 1 A. Submit in accordance with Section 01300, Submittals. B. Submit catalog data, construction details, performance characteristics for each type and size of heat I generation equipment. C. Submit operating and maintenance data. I 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Ratings: I 1. Air Handling Equipment: AMCA rated and labeled. 2. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment: ARI certified and ARI labeled. B. Codes: Comply with applicable sections of the State Mechanical Specialty Code. III C. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15050. pi PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 HEATING WATER SPECIALTIES • A. Air Vents: Install at all system high points whether shown or not; fabricate of 2" diameter or larger I pipe at least 12" long. At the high point of each main install an Armstrong No. lAV autovent, or equivalent Taco, Bell & Gossett, Armstrong, Dunham -Bush approved substitute. B. Pressure - Temperature Test Plugs: 1. 1/4" or 1/2" NPT fitting of solid brass capable of receiving either an 1/8" OD pressure or temperature probe and rated for zero leakage from vacuum to 500 psig. Neoprene valve core for temperatures to 200 deg. F, Nordel to 350 deg. F. Provide each test plug with a pressure gauge adapter with 1/16" or 1/8" OD pressure probe. 2. .- ._. -- . Furnish a test kit containing one 2 -1 /2" dial pressure test gauge of suitable range, one gauge adapter with 1/16" or 1/8" OD probe and two 5" stem pocket test thermometers - one 0 to 125 deg. F and one 50 to 250 deg. F. Turn the kit over to the Architect. The system balancing firm may use this kit to complete the balancing. 3. Sisco "P/T Plugs," Peterson "Pete's Plug," Trerice "Test Plugs," or approved substitute. C. Fan Coil and VAV Unit Hose Connection: Provide rubber hose connection assembly which I includes 24" long flexible hoses with swivel end connections, ball valves, strainer on one and automatic flow control valve on the other. Select assembly for flow rates required by each individual unit. Include condensate drain kit with vinyl hose P -trap and hose assembly strainer blow down connection. Griswold "Hose kit #2" or approved substitute. • I . D. Strainers: "Y- pattern," iron body rated for pressures indicated with blow -off connection and 20 mesh stainless steel screen. .1 E. Flow Indicators: Install, where shown on plans, flow indicating orifice or venturi fittings complete with quick disconnect meter valves, size and series identification tags. Install as recommended by manufacturer. Barco, Taco, Venturi Meter Co, Bell & Gossett, Thrush, Armstrong or approved substitute. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15500 -1 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15500 HEATING, VENTILATING AND AIR CONDITIONING F. Circuit Setter and Balancing Valves: Calibrated ball valve style balancing fitting with differential ' pressure taps, brass or bronze body and trim. Bell & Gossett, Taco, or approved substitute. At 1 contractor's option, balancing valves 3" and larger may be butterfly style valves. • G. Flow Balancing Valves: Globe valve style balancing valve with differential pressure taps, locking position stop, and position readout. Brass or bronze body and trim up to 2 ", iron body over 2 ". Nibco, Tour & Andersson, Armstrong, or approved substitute. H. Flow Control: Install where shown on plans, flow metering fittings complete with quick disconnect, flow meter valves, with safety shut -off valves and with size and series identification i tags. Install as recommended by manufacturer, Aquaduct, Flowset, Griswold or approved substitute. PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 PIPING INSTALLATION A. Refer to applicable Sections for Piping, Valves, Insulation, Painting, etc. 1 3.02 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. •Installation and Arrangement: Install and arrange as shown on the Drawings. Comply with manufacturer's recommendations for installation connections and start -up. B. Lubrication: Lubricate all moving and rotating parts in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to start -up. • - C. Steam Traps: Provide where indicated on returns from steam using equipment and on drips from ends of mains and other.low points in steam piping, whether indicated or not. Install with union connections on both sides, "Y" type strainer same make as trap on inlet, and gate valve on inlet from main riser or end of main drips and where indicated. For systems over 15 psig, install bucket type traps on all equipment and on drips from ends of main and other low points in steam piping, whether indicated or not, with gate, "Y" type strainer (same make as trap) and union on inlet side and check and gate on outlet. 3/4" minimum size in ,Il any location. D. Expansion Joint and Compensator Installation: Carefully align joint or compensator and make proper allowance for temperature of pipe at time of installation. � F. Air Vents: Conduct 1/4 ". copper tubing from high end of air chambers to accessible locations and terminate with, screwdriver cock. Conduct 1/4" copper tubing from outlets of automatic air vents to floor drains indicated or to the outside when approved by Governing Authorities and Architect. _ END OF SECTION 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC i JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15500 -2 Primed (17/27/04 . 1 • SECTION 15750 • I HEAT TRANSFER PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS . ,r A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. The requirements of this section apply to the Heating and Air Conditioning systems. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. Submit in accordance with Section 15050. I B. Submit catalog data, construction details and performance characteristics for each type and size of heat transfer equipment. C. Submit operating and maintenance data. 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Rating: Rated in accord with ARI certified rating procedures and bear the ARI label. B. Gas -fired Equipment: Design certified by American Gas Association. p C. Codes: .Comply with applicable sections of the State Mechanical Specialty Code. D. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15050 for field wiring. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 HOT WATER HEATING COIL I A. Hot Water Heating Coil: Non - ferrous extended surface, counterflow serpentine type with heavy gauge galvanized steel casing suitable for mounting required. Assembled with 5/8" OD x 0.020" thick copper tubes brazed to copper headers with drain and vent tappings. Copper or aluminum fins mechanically bonded to tubes and spaced a maximum of 12 fins per inch. Construction shall I allow for expansion and contraction without developing leaks. Permanently label each coil in accessible location with all operating - parameters. - Trane, Carrier, Pace,.Heatcraft,Colmac orby_____ approved air handling unit manufacturer. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.01 INSTALLATION A. General: Install and arrange equipment as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the equipment manufacturer. 1111 B. Piping: Refer to applicable sections for piping, valves, insulation, painting, etc. END OF SECTION 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15750 -1 Printed 07 /27/04 SECTION 1.5850 I AIR HANDLING 1 PART 1— GENERAL 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS II , A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. I 1.02 DESCRIPTION A. Provide Air Handling and Heating Equipment as specified herein and shown on the Drawings. .1 B. Equipment capacity and size as indicated in the equipment lists on the Drawings. 1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Air Handling Equipment: Rated in accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and AMCA labeled. B. Air Conditioning and Refrigeration Equipment Rating: Rated in.accordance with ARI certified rating procedures and AMCA labeled. C. Codes: Comply with applicable sections of the State Mechanical Specialty Code. D. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15050. pi PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ROOF MOUNTED HVAC EQUIPMENT A. Packaged Roof Mounted Gas Heating - Electric Cooling Unit (2 ton and less): I 1. Manufacturers: Carrier, Lennox, Trane, or approved. 2. Supply Fan Section: Commercial class air condition duty, direct or belt driven centrifugal air supply fan. I 3. Heating Section: AGA and serving utility approved gas burner with glass lined aluminized steel heat exchanger. Include automatic gas valve, bonnet switch, high limit, main and pilot gas cocks, automatic electric and electronic ignition system, draft diverter and vent. II 4. Cooling Section: Include hermetic compressor, capacity matched vertical discharge, air cooled condenser, direct expansion cooling coil, complete refrigeration circuit, including high and low pressure cutouts, short cycling . refrigerant filter dryer, etc. 5. Casing: Enclose complete assembly in weatherproof formed steel enameled cabinet with II 1" thick, non - organic casing insulation; 1" disposable air filters of standard sizes, extended housing for downward supply and return air ducts connections; 1/2" galvanized mesh bird screen over rain hood inlet. Mount unit on leveled factory furnished steel support curb with ductwork connections brought up through the roof within the curb. 6. Controls shall be as subsequently specified. PART 3 - EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Install and arrange equipment as shown on the Drawings and as recommended by the equipment I manufacturer. B. Factory personnel or representative shall verify all information associated with existing systems to be replaced (number of zones, size of zones, location of utilities, curb size, etc.) prior to unit ,Il construction. ,I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15850 -1 Printed 07/27/04 - 1 SECTION 15850 AIR HANDLING C. Factory personnel or representative shall be on site during setting of unit and shall perform start -up of system. 3.02 ROOF MOUNTED EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION A. All roof mounted mechanical equipment shall be supported and seismically anchored on levelled, flashed and counterflashed vibration isolated curbs anchored to resist seismic forces and suitable for the roof construction. Minimum curb height shall be 12" above the roof unless indicated otherwise on the Drawings. Flashing into the roof is specified in another Section. B. Make all piping, electrical and duct penetrations for each equipment within the curb unless shown otherwise on the Drawings. Piping and electrical conduit routed above and across the roof shall be supported on flashed and counterflashed curbs with pipe guides anchored to the curbs in "pitch pockets." Submit shop drawings on other arrangements for approval. 3.03 AIR HANDLING INSTALLATION A. Installation and Arrangement: Air handling equipment shall be installed and arranged as shown on the Drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation connection and start -up. B. Lubrication: All moving and rotating parts shall be lubricated in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations prior to start -up. C. Filters: Specified filters or approved temporary construction filters shall be installed in supply units prior to start -up or used for drying and /or temporary heat. Include one set of filters after change -out of construction filter. D. Provide factory start -up of all rooftop units. . - END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 • . 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15850 -2 Printed 07/27/04 1. I SECTION 15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION • A. Provide Air Distribution Equipment as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. B. Equipment capacity and size shall be as indicated on the Drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Air Handling Equipment Rating: In accordance with AMCA certified rating procedures and bearing the AMCA label. B. Ductwork: Comply with requirements of Chapter 6 of the Oregon State Mechanical Specialty Code. I C. Field Wiring: Comply with requirements of Section 15050 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 SHEET METAL A. Quality Assurance: Galvanized steel sheet metal except where otherwise indicated. Metal gauges, joints and reinforcement in accordance with Mechanical Code, ASHRAE and SMACNA tables and recommendations. - • p B. Acoustical Duct Lining: Line ducts with 1" thick, Schuller "Linacoustic," Gustin Bacon "Ultra - Liner," or Owens Corning "Aeroflex" meeting NFPA 90A requirements for maximum flame . spread and smoke developed. Mechanically attach lining to sheet metal duct with Schuller Grip Nails or Gramweld welding pins. Apply fire- retardant type adhesive similar to Schuller No. 44 I adhesive, Benjamin Foster 81 -99, Insul - Coustic 22 or 3M equivalent on all leading edges, joints and seams. C. Duct Sealing Tapes: Provide one of the following .UL listed ductwork sealing tape systems. 11. Aluminum bonded to aluminized mylar reinforced with fiberglass mesh backing an elastomeric pressure sensitive adhesive specifically formulated for adhesion to galvanized metal. Hardcast AFG -1402 or accepted substitute. 2. Two -part sealing system with woven fiber, mineral gypsum impregnated tape and non- /. flammable adhesive. Hardcast "DT" tape and "FTA -20" adhesive, United "Uni- Cast" systein, or accepted substitute. 3. For- joints -and seams exposed -to- the - weather -ice- lieu -of- solder -ing— United - "Uni- Cast" system or approved. ,/ D. Duct Joints for Sheet Metal Ducts: "Ductmate System" by Ductmate Industries, Inc., for making transverse rectangular and round duct joints at contractor's option. Ward Duct Connectors, Inc., Lockformer TDC, Mez Industries, or acceptable substitute. I E. Flexible Ductwork -Low Pressure: Insulated low pressure flexible duct, factory fabricated assembly consisting of a zinc - coated spring steel helix seamless inner liner, wrapped with a nominal 1" thick, 1 pound /cubic foot density fiberglass insulation. The assembly shall be sheathed I in a vapor barrier jacket, factory vapor resistance sealed at both ends of each section. The composite assembly, including insulation and vapor barrier, shall meet the Class 1 requirements of NFPA Bulletin No. 90 -A and be labeled by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., with a flame spread rating of 25 or less and a smoke developed rating of 50 or under. The duct shall have factory 1 sealed double air seal (interior and exterior) to'assure an airtight installation. Genflex, ATCO, Wiremold, Thermaflex, Glassflex, Clevepak, Schuller, or accepted substitute. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15880 -1 n.-;...,.d 117n7ma 1 SECTION 15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION I 2.02 ACCESSORIES A. Manual Volume Dampers: Construct of material two gauges heavier than duct in which installed; single plate up to 12" wide; multiple over 12" wide. Hem both edges 1/2" and flange sides 1/2 ". . Use Young, Duro -Dyne or accepted substitute damper accessories. Young numbers are shown. 1. No. 605 bearing set with No. 403 regulator for dampers up to 24" long. 2. For dampers over 24" long use No. 660 3/8" rod, No. 656 end bearing and No. 403 • regulator. 3. Where damper regulators are not readily accessible, use No. 660 or No. 661 rod extensions and No. 301 and No. 315 concealed damper regulators as required. Location of all volume dampers is not necessarily shown on Drawings; minimum required is one in each supply, return or exhaust main and one in each branch. B. Combination Fire /Smoke Dampers: 1. Constructed and installed in accordance with NFPA No. 90A, UL labeled. Provide dampers with rating equal to surrounding construction where penetrations are made through fire- resistant rated construction per applicable codes. 2. Provide access panels of proper fire rating. Size dampers to maintain free area through . damper same as unobstructed run of duct or opening. I, 3. Each damper shall be classified by UL as a "corridor damper" for installation in tunnel corridors, shall be rated for one hour fire resistance under UL555, and shall have a minimum leakage rating of Class II under UL555S for use in smoke control systems: Each damper shall bear a UL label designating the damper as "corridor damper." 4. In addition to the leakage rating specified herein, the dampers and their actuators shall be classified under UL555S to an elevated temperature of 250 degrees F (121 degrees C). Appropriate electric motorized operators shall be installed by the damper manufacturer at time of fabrication and damper /actuator assembly shall be factory cycled 10 times to assure operation. Assembly shall meet all applicable UL555 and UL555S criteria for - both damper and actuators. Damper shall be power open -fail close design. 5. Damper manufacturer shall provide factory assembled minimum 20 gage steel sleeve. Damper shall be sealed to the sleeve with a 25/50 flame spread /smoke developed sealant material. Each corridor damper shall be equipped as standard with an electric fusible link. These fusible links shall be rated for 165 deg. F (74 deg. C) and shall be easily resettable for system testing. 6. Provide all necessary wiring and devices to close dampers on a signal from the building fire alarm system. Provide with factory position switch. 1. C. Locking Connection Straps: 1/2" wide positive locking steel straps or nylon self - locking straps. Panduit or accepted substitute. D. Access Doors In Sheet Metal Work: 1. Hollow core double construction of same or heavier gauge material as duct in which installed. Use no door smaller than 12" by 12" for simple manual access or smaller than 4 18" by 24" where personnel must pass through infrequently. Use 24" by 60" minimum — — for filters`and more frequent maintenance. - Use Ventlok - or accepted substitute and latches on all doors.. a. 100 series hinges and latches on low pressure system doors up to 18" maximum • dimension. �, b. 200 series on larger low pressure system doors and 333 series on high pressure systems. 2. Construct doors up to 18" maximum dimension with 1" overlap, furr and gasket with 3/4" by 1./8" sponge rubber. Fit larger doors against 1 -1/2" by 1/8" or angle frame and gasket with 3/4" by 1/8" sponge rubber or felt. E. Anti - Backdraft Dampers: Connected, felt -edged aluminum blades set in 14 gauge or heavier steel frame; brass, nylon or Teflon bearings; equip with spring helper with tension adjustment feature or with adjustable counterweight and adjust to open when not more than 0.10" wg pressure is applied. Ruskin CBS -4, Pacific Air Products, Air Balance, Controlair or accepted substitute. F. Flexible Connections: Neoprene impregnated fiberglass connection. Ventglass, Duro -Dyne, or accepted substitute. • 2.03 GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS A. Description: Provide grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the Drawings. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15880 -2 Primed 07/27/04 I SECTION 15880 I AIR DISTRIBUTION 1 B. Finishes: 1. Steel: Flat white enamel prime coat, factory applied on ceiling diffusers. Others are to have a baked enamel finish, color as selected by Architect. 2. Aluminum: Anodized clear finish unless indicated otherwise. C. Manufacturers: Carnes, Krueger, Titus, Price are accepted substitutes where only Titus model numbers are listed. Where other manufacturer's products are listed and/or "accepted substitute" is indicated, only the products or an accepted substitute for that item shall be provided. D. Perforated Face Diffusers (Ceilings below 9'): Perforated snap -in or concealed hinged face plate with internal deflection blades at diffuser neck in steel or extruded aluminum frame and margin to suit the ceiling construction. Provide with opposed blade volume damper. Panel size shall be 24" x 24" where lift -out tile ceiling system is indicated. Titus PCS. E. Sidewall or Ceiling Return or Exhaust Register: Face bars parallel to long dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars set at 35 degrees to 45 degrees, spaced on 0.66" to 0.75" I centers; key operated opposed blade volume damper. Titus 350RL series. F. Sidewall Ceiling Supply Grille or Register: Double deflection grille with face bars parallel to long dimension on ceiling type and horizontal on wall type; bars to be individually adjustable, spaced I on 0.66" to 0.75" centers; key operated opposed blade volume damper. Titus 300RL. F. Ceiling Matched Return and /or Exhaust Register: To match adjacent ceiling outlets. Use in spaces containing ceiling diffusers and /or T -bar ceilings. Provide with damper except where dampered plenums are indicated. Match manufacturer of supply. I G. Linear Slot Supply Diffuser: Slot diffuser to be standard one -piece lengths up to 4 ft long. Diffuser length, and number of slots as specified on drawings. Each slot to have a deflector that is PI ' adjustable from the face of the diffuser. Plenums shall be manufactured by the same manufacturer of the linear slot diffuser. Plenum inlet size as specified on drawings. Titus TBD -10 series. H. Louver Face Ceiling Diffusers (Ceilings above 9'): Rectangular type with pattern of distribution . as indicated. Provide with opposed blade volume dampers. Titus TMS. I I. Heavy Duty, Fixed Bars Low Return Grille: All welded construction with heavy 13 or 14 gauge, fixed round edge steel horizontal face bars at 1/2" on centers, set at 35 to 45 degrees and reinforced every 6" to 8 ". Titus 33RL. J. Steel Door Transfer Grilles and Sidewall Transfer grilles: All welded construction with 20 gauge, fixed inverted V- blades with a deflection angle of 77° so as to provide a sight proof design. Titus T -700L. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EQUIPMENT INSTALLATION I' A. Air Handling Equipment Installation and Arrangement: Install and arrange as shown on Drawings. Comply with the manufacturer's recommendations for installation, connection, and start -up. I B. Equipment Access Panels: Locate free of all obstructions such as ceiling bars, electrical conduit, lights, ductwork, etc. 3.02 INSTALLATION OF GRILLES, REGISTERS AND DIFFUSERS 1 A. Size and air handling characteristics shall be as shown on the Drawings. B. Locate, arrange, and install grilles, registers and diffusers as shown on the Drawings. Locate ,11 registers in tee -bar ceilings with diffusers centered on the tile unless indicated otherwise. 1 I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15880 -3 Pruned 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15880 AIR DISTRIBUTION 1 3.03 DUCTWORK INSTALLATION • A. Support: Install ductwork with 1" wide cradle hangers not more than 8' on centers or as required by code. Support terminal units independent of adjacent ductwork. Attach to available building construction according to good practices for materials involved. B. Fan and Air Handling Unit Flexible Connections: Install neoprene impregnated fiberglass connections in ductwork at all rotating equipment. Ventglass, Duro -Dyne or accepted substitute. 0 C. Elbows and Fittings: Construct elbows with throat radius equal to duct width in plane of turn or make them square and provide double wall, air foil turning vanes. I. D. Fittings: Make transitions and take -offs as shown on Drawings. Provide volume dampers and splitter dampers as indicated on Drawings and as specified. E. Acoustical Duct Lining: Acoustically line all outside air ducts and plenums, all fan unit intake and I discharge plenums, all ductwork indicated as lined on the Drawings, all sheet metal ductwork specified per Section 15250 as insulated, where exposed to view or subject to damage in areas such as mechanical rooms, and, at the Contractor's option, all insulated ductwork specified in i Section 15250. F. Manual Volume Dampers: Location of all volume dampers are not necessarily shown on the Drawings. Provide a minimum of one volume damper in each supply, return or exhaust branch. in Install dampers in fiberglass ductwork (where fiberglass ductwork is allowed) with galvanized • sheet metal sleeves of sheet metal gauges required for metal duct systems of the'same dimensions. G. Duct Insulation: Insulate all ductwork specified in Section 15250 as requiring insulation. In addition, all ductwork indicated in Table No. 53F of the Structural Specialty Code and Fire and II, • - - Life Safety Regulations shall be insulated or lined. H. Sleeves: Provide galvanized sheet metal plaster ring around ductwork penetrating exposed finished walls. I. Plenums: Construct sheet metal plenums and partitions of not lighter than 18 gauge galvanized steel and reinforce with 1 -1/2" by 1/2" by 1/8" angles as required to prevent drumming or . breathing. 1 J. Access: Install necessary access opening and covers for cleaning, wiring or servicing motors, • filters, fans, both entering and leaving air sides of coils, fire and /or smoke dampers and to other equipment located within or blocked by sheet metal work. K. Sealing: Caulk, seal, grout and /or tape ductwork and plenums to make airtight at seams, joints, edges, corners and at penetrations. Solder all seams, joints, etc., on all ductwork exposed to the weather. Install specified tape in accordance with manufacturer's requirements using degreaser on - surfaces - to taped and wiped to eliminate moisture. L. Flexible Duct Connections: :' 1. Install in full extended condition, free of sags and kinks, using only the minimum length required to make the connection. 2. Make all joints and connections with 1/2" wide positive locking steel straps or nylon self- . locking straps and make connections to non - metallic ducts with sheet metal sleeves or manufactured sheet metal "spin -in" fittings. 3. Thoroughly coat all high pressure duct interior with an approved high pressure duct sealer to overlap 3" and secure in place over sheet metal collar with 1/2" wide positive locking strap. On vertically suspended ducts, secure with a minimum of three sheet metal screws on a maximum of 8" on center. - 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL —.T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15880 -4 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15880 1 AIR DISTRIBUTION 3.04 FIRE /SMOKE DAMPERS • I A. Provide fire dampers with rating equal to surrounding construction where penetrations are made through fire resistant rated construction per applicable codes and installed in accordance with UL label requirements. Locate fusible links for easy service or replacement and provide access panels 0 of proper fire rating. Size fire dampers to maintain free area through fire damper same as unobstructed run of duct. Where dampers are installed in forced air systems which may not shut down under fire conditions, dampers shall be UL "dynamic- rated" dampers. I III B. Provide complete wiring including electrical connections between field connected components and the fire alarm system specified in Division 16. 3.05 NEW DUCTWORK CLEANING I A. Store all ductwork materials on pallets or above grade, protected from weather, dirt/mud and other construction dust. I B. Remove all accumulated dust, dirt, etc. from each duct section as it is being installed. C. Prior to installation of diffusers, grilles and registers, install temporary system filters and cover all diffuser, grille and register openings with temporary 25% efficiency filter materials and start the 1 fan systems. Operate fans a minimum of 8 hours. Remove all temporary filters at the end of that period. D. Clean all diffusers, grilles and registers just prior to project final completion. END OF SECTION . _ __ - - _ 1 1 i 1 .1 • 1 . • 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15880-5 Printed 07/27/04 1 . I SECTION 15900 CONTROLS 1 PART 1 - GENERAL SYSTEM DESCRIPTION 1.01 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS III A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. 1.02 BASIC SYSTEM . A. Extend the existing Johnson Controls. Building Automation System (BAS) system shall utilize DDC to control valve and damper actuators for all mechanical equipment as specified in the II sequence of operation and in the drawings for all systems. B. The control system shall be fully integrated and installed as a complete package of controls and instruments in a manor that provides maximum benefit to the end user., The control devices shall I be Johnson Control devices only unless specified otherwise. C. The system shall include all computer software and hardware, control unit hardware and software, operator input/output devices, sensors, control devices, and miscellaneous devices required for complete operation and future modifications. Documentation for all software and hardware devices shall be provided. • D. Provide engineering, installation, calibration, commissioning, acceptance testing assistance, I software programming, and checkout for complete and fully operational DDC. E.. _ . All existing pneumatic and electric control devices not used, cabinets, valves, tubing, actuators, p etc. are to be removed. - 1.03 SCOPE OF SERVICES (OVERVIEW OF SECTION 15900) A. Work under this section of the specification shall include, but not limited to, the following: I 1. Furnish and install a complete sensor, actuator, wiring and piping system for all air handling and related equipment as shown on the plans and specified in this section. Install all necessary sensors and actuators as required by the plans and specifications, and equipment schedules.. Coordinate installation of factory mounted controls. Factory mounted devices except for valves and d amper • I actuators to match manufacturer of control system. 2. Label all sensors, control devices, and control units. 3. Furnish and install conduit, wire, branch circuit protection, etc. as required to bring 120 VAC power to control panel locations and equipment (actuators, sensors, control devices, etc.) as shown on the drawings and described in the specifications. 1 4. All line drivers, signal boosters, and signal conditioners etc. shall be provided as necessary for proper data communication. 5. Coordination as required with other sections of the specification for the proper and complete I installation of the wiring and tubing system, control devices, dampers, valve, actuators, etc. 6. Furnish and install Direct Digital Control Equipment (DDC) as required by the point list, plans, and specifications including, control units, software, database development, check -out, and debugging. .Provide points necessary for a complete and operable system. - I 7. Install the sequence of operations specified in the drawings and in this section. 8. Software testing requirements shall include testing in the field of all logic sequences including actual simulation of different processes and events and observing program response to the process or event. All deviations from the requirements of the sequence as specified on the drawings or this specification shall be corrected immediately at no additional cost to the Owner. 9. Provide documentation of software system testing before acceptance testing. 10. Provide staff for. acceptance testing procedures. Modify hardware and software errors /problems at no additional cost to the Owner. • I .11. Provide a series of training classes for Owner staff. 12. Setup trending data before and after system acceptance. 13. Attend a series of meetings with the Engineer and Owner to agree on system setup and operating parameters. ( 1 14. Provide detailed documentation of system configuration including control units and all control devices. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC • JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900-1 ' Pr,r, 1,1 07/27/04 - • t SECTION 15900 CONTROLS 1 15. Provide all software (with hardware connections) and software license for district computer as required. 16. Read this section in it entirety for specific details. 17. If the Control Contractor can not comply with any of these specifications, then the Control Contractor must explain in writing the reasons for non - compliance and provide an alternative • approach that satisfies these requirements. 18. Provide all equipment and personnel to complete system commission per previous section and as listed, further in specification. • 1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. The BAS system shall be designed, installed, commissioned, and serviced by qualified contractor. B. Acceptable control system contractors and manufacturers: Johnson Controls Metasys installed by Johnson Controls International, Robert Lloyd Sheet Metal or Northwest Controls only. , • C. All products proposed for this contract shall have been in continuous and successful use for at least two (2) year (not including beta testing). • D. All materials and equipment used shall be standard components, regularly manufactured for this and/or other systems and not custom designed specially for this project. E. The control system shall be forward compatible with future versions of the manufacturer's hardware, firmware, and software. Future versions of the manufacturer's hardware, firmware, and software shall be backward compatible with the installed control system. Forward and backward compatibility shall be guaranteed for at least five (5) years from the time of system acceptance. Any hardware, firmware, or software modifications or replacements required within that period because of incompatibility with new hardware, firmware, or software installed in the same facility - shall be at no cost to the Owner. Note: Equipment (controllers and software) should be provided by single manufacturer. All other products (e.g., sensors, valves, dampers, and actuators) need not be manufactured by the control. • manufacturer. 1.05 CONTROL CONTRACTOR/MANUFACTURER QUALIFICATIONS A. The Control Contractor shall have an established working relationship with the control manufacturer of not less than five years. B. The Control Contractor's or Manufacturer's installer shall have successfully completed control manufacturer's classes on control systems and shall present for review the certification of training. Programmer shall be employed by Johnson Controls International. C. The Control Contractor's or Manufacturer installer for this project shall be: 1. Identified by name. 2. The installer's previous work experiences shall not be less than five years. 3. The installer shall be technically proficient in both control systems and mechanical (air handling units, boiler, and chiller) systems. 4. •Installer's references (including contact names and phone numbers) from all jobs during the past 12 months shall be presented. 5. If proposed installer does not meet minimum competency, the owner has the right to request a different installer and programmer. 6. No installer substitutions will be made without prior approval from the owner. 7. Programmers other than Johnson Controls International personnel will not be accepted. 8. The division of labor between installer and programmer is the responsibility of combination. No delay in providing a complete and operable system due to mis- coordination will be allowed. D. Factory mounted controls are excluded from this section's requirements. 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 1.5900 -2 P 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15900 I CONTROLS 1.06 RELATED SECTIONS 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of Contract, including General and Supplementary Conditions, Mechanical Special Conditions, Electrical Special Conditions and Division - 1 Specification. I B. Sections apply to work of this section: Section 15050, Basic Mechanical Materials and Methods. C. Coordination with Other Trades: 1. This section specifies cooperation of the Control Contractor (the combination of installer I and programmer hence forth) with other trades and including balancing firm to assure proper arrangement of control items. Control valves, dampers, wiring, thermostat wells, and other control devices that are to be built into the field assembled ductwork, piping, or wiring systems shall be furnished by the Control Contractor and installed under other I sections of the specification as directed by the Control Contractor and indicated in other portions of the specifications and drawings. 2. The interface between the existing NCM Johnson DDC system and other equipment is the responsibility of the Control Contractor. The Control contractor shall insure that the DDC system communicates successfully with other equipment (e.g., air handling units, ' packaged rooftop units, heat pumps, motors, actuators, etc.). Note: the equipment supplier is responsible for the proper performance of their equipment (assuming the proper signal are sent/received from the BAS). The control contractor is responsible for • I 3. all system sensors, including those which are factory installed. Electrical Wiring: All wiring required for work under this section of the specification shall be provided under this section of the specification unless otherwise specified. 4. Electrical wiring - power for control panels, control devices, and sensors I a. Power for control units, control devices and sensors shall be coordinated with the air handling manufacturer for the project and /or the Owner. b. Contact locations in starter control circuits. All contacts controlling motor starters, including overload contacts, shall be located on the hot side of the coil pi (ungrounded control power leg). Coordinate this requirement with the air handling manufacturer for the project. c. Extend power to damper actuators. 1) Actuators will be powered at 24 VAC. 2) At each auxiliary panel location, furnish and install a 24 VAC. I transformer with 20 VA of capacity for each actuator installed and served from the panel. 3) Furnish and install a fused terminal in the +24 VAC lead and a disconnecting terminal in the neutral lead of the power cable to each I actuator. 5. Testing, Adjusting and Balancing: If necessary, The Controls Contractor shall operate the BAS to assist the TAB Contractor. 1.07 QUALITY CONTROL — CODES AND STANDARDS A. All work, materials, and equipment shall comply with the rules and regulations of all codes and I ordinances of the local, state, and federal authorities. Such codes, when more restrictive, shall take precedence over these plans and specifications, As a minimum, the installation shall comply with the current editions in effect 30 days prior to receipt of bids for the following codes: 1. National Electric Code (NEC) I 2. 3. Uniform Building Code (UBC), Oregon Structural Specialty Code Uniform Mechanical Code (UMC), Oregon Mechanical Specialty Code 4. Underwriters Laboratories (UL) 5. National Electric Manufacturers' Association (NEMA) I 6. National Fire Prevention Association (NFPA) 7. American Society Of Heating, Refrigeration, And Air Conditioning Engineers (ASHRAE) 8. Instrument Society Of America (ISA) I 9. National Institute of Standards and Technology (NIST). B. Meet all of the local authorities and State Fire Marshal code requirements for normal operating and smoke mode functions. 1 I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -3 Primed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15900 • CONTROLS 1 1.08 SUBMITTALS A. Shop drawing submittals are required for the following, in accordance with Section 15050. The Contractor shall not start the project until the Shop Drawings have been submitted and approved. Shop drawings shall include: 1. All submittals should be provided on paper (with legible font type and size). Pay for or re- produce Phase I drawings. All control submittals for Phase II shall show Phase I work. 2. All drawings should be labeled TC (temperature control) rather than being referenced within the mechanical or electrical divisions. Sheets shall be consecutively numbered 3. • One drawing per air handler or system (e.g., boiler plant). Drawing should include point descriptors (DI, DO, Al, AO), addressing, and point names. Each point names should be unique (within a system and between systems). For example, the point named for the mixed air temperature for AH #1, AH #2, and AH #3 should not be MAT but could be named AH #1 MAT, AH #2 MAT, and AH #3 MAT. The point names could be logical and consistent between systems and AHs. The abbreviation or short hand notation (e.g., MAT) should be clearly defined in writing by the Control- Contractor. Naming standard will be decided on during meeting between Engineer, Control Contractor, and Owner. Convention shall match Phase I work. 4. . Floor plans depicting all BAS control devices (control units, control devices, gateways, LAN interface devices, actuators, sensors, motor control centers, etc.) in relation to mechanical rooms, HVAC equipment, and building footprint. 5. DDC System architecture diagram indicating schematic location of all Control Units, workstations, LAN Interface devices, gateways, etc. Indicate address and type for each Control Unit, Indicate protocol, baud rate, and type of LAN (per Control Unit). 6. For each drawing, include a schematic flow diagram of each air and water system showing fans, coils, dampers, valves, pumps, heat exchange equipment, control devices, etc. Label each control device with setting or adjustable range of control. Label each input and output with the appropriate:range. _ 7. Electrical wiring diagrams shall include both ladder logic type diagrams for motor start, control, and safety circuits and detailed digital interface panel control point termination diagrams with all wire numbers and terminal block numbers identified. Indicate all .4 required electrical wiring. Provide panel termination drawings on separate drawings. Ladder diagrams shall appear on system schematic. Clearly differentiate between portions of wiring that are existing, factory - installed and portions to be field - installed. 8. Show all electric connections of the controls system to equipment furnished by others complete to terminal points identified with manufacturer's terminal recommendations. 9. Control Contractor shall provide one complete drawing that shows the equipment (fan unit, boiler, chiller, etc.) manufacturers wiring diagram with the control contractors wiring diagram superimposed on it. Supply hard copy. 10. ' Provide complete panel drawings that are a. Clearly labeled. b. Drawn to scale c. Show the internal and external component arrangement so that the operators can II identify the components by their position if the labels come off • d. Wiring access routes should also be identified so that Class 1 wiring is separated from Class 2 and 3 and so high voltage wiring is segregated from low voltage • wiring and tubing. 11. Complete identification of all control devices (manufacturer's type, number, and function). 12. Damper schedule should include: a. Action (normally open or closed) b. Direct or reverse actuation c. Manufacturer make and model d. Design pressure drop at full flow e. Leakage rate f. Operating range g. Flow rate h. Actuator requirements i. Actuator spring range J. Special construction features (U.L. listed smoke damper, etc.) 13. A set of drawings showing the details of the valve and valve actuator installation for each valve, required for operation and maintenance manuals only. This should include: a. Action (normally open or closed) 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.T. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -4 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15900 1 CONTROLS b. Manufacturer make and model c. C d d. Close off rating e. Flow rate . f. Actuator spring range I g. Cavitation coefficient (where applicable) h. Special construction features B. Record Documents: I 1. Provide a complete set of control drawings with as-installed equipment and operating sequences on paper and in electronic format (AutoCAD). "As- built" (i.e., as- installed and debugged and after system acceptance) documentation shall include the following as minimum: I a. All data specified in the shop drawings section in its final "as- built" form. b. • Schematic outline of the overall control system for quick reference c. Adequate record of the work as installed, including exact location of control panels and the wiring route (using TC documents, section 1.8 -3). d. Blue prints shall include sequence of operation. e. System hardware specification data which provides a functional description of all hardware components. • f. System engineering information which provides all of the information for the system set -up, definition and application. g. System database information that provides the point names and application data programmed into the system. h. All of the information, data, procedures and drawings shall be supplied in the I form of manuals. 2. Provide as- installed (after system acceptance) control logic diagrams showing all points (real and virtual). 3. DDC systems that use line -based programming must reference line code number with P . control logic diagrams and/or with sequence of operation text. Control Contractor shall discuss final format with owner. 4. Provide licensed electronic copies of all software for each workstation and laptop. This includes, but is not limited to: project graphic images, project database, trouble- shooting • and debugging programs, project - specific application programming code and all other I software required to operate and modify the programming code (including software at system level, primary control units, secondary control units, and all communication software). Any hardware devices (cables, protection devices) required to operate the t/hrare sll o e i I 5. The sof ware Control a dw Contractor ha shall b document provded. deviations from the shop drawing submittals: Documentation should include what equipment was changed and the reason for the change. 6. Provide copy of final test reports. I C. Operating and Maintenance Materials: 1. Provide Operation and maintenance data on all equipment requiring service or adjustment 1 (prior to and after final acceptance). Supplement O &M documents from Phase I for any equipment added, not used in Phase I. 2. Provide user guides and programming manuals for all hardware and software. a. A reference manual shall be furnished and shall contain, as a minimum, an I overview of the system, its organization, the concepts of networking and central site /field hardware relationships. It shall be a complete guide to operating all aspects of the software system, including activating the system, use of the mouse, description of all menus, establishing setpoints and schedules, I downloading or uploading information to or from field hardware, generating or collecting trends, alarms and reports, backing up system software and data files • and interface with third party software. b. Manuals for advanced programming (for each controller type and for all I workstations) shall be provided. 3. Provide a Bill of Materials with each schematic drawing. List all devices /equipment and match to schematic and actual field labeling. Provide quantity, manufacturer, actual product ordering number, description, size, accuracy, operating ranges (voltage, I temperature, pressure, etc.), input/output parameters, etc. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC • JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -5 Printed 07/27/04 1 • . SECTION 15900 CONTROLS 1 4. Field copies of wiring for Primary and Secondary Control Units. (Laminated and permanently affixed in or above controller). 5. For the equipment not manufactured by the Control Vendor, an alphabetical list of system components with the name, address and 24 -hour telephone number of the company responsible for servicing each item during the first two years of operation shall be provided. is 6. Operating and maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment that includes: a. Emergency procedures for fire or failure. b. Start -up, operation, maintenance, disassembly and shutdown procedures. c. Maintenance instructions for each piece of equipment. d. Proper lubricants and lubricating instructions. e. Cleaning, replacement and/or adjustment schedule. f. Product data on each piece of equipment, including damper and valve information noted earlier. • 7. Points list shall include all physical input/output and virtual points. Points list shall be provided in hard copy and shall include: a. Name b. Address c. • Scanning frequency d. Engineering units e. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units • f. High and low alarm values and alarm differentials for return to normal condition g. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting. h. Message and alarm reporting as specified. i. Identification of all adjustable points J. Description of all points 8. Control Logic documentation shall include: a. Drawings documenting control logic for all aspects of the BAS including control - • units, controlled devices, sensors, etc. _ _ b. A detailed sequence of operation (see Part 6) should be submitted on separate sheets for each AH or HVAC system. The text description of the sequence of operation should include: 1) • Logic control statement (i.e., describe control loop process) 2) Setpoints and throttling ranges, deadbands, and differentials for temperature and pressure variables, gains, reset schedules, etc. 3) Limits /conditions and interlocks 4) Measured variables (e.g., mixed air temperature) 5) Variables to communicate to /from the network c. Control diagrams should identify 1) System being controlled (attach abbreviated control logic text) 2) All DO, DI, AO, Al points 3) Virtual points 4) All functions (logic, math, and control) within control loop 5) Legend for graphical icons or symbols — — — — — 6) Definition of variables or point names (e.g., - OAT = outside air temperature) 7) Define values (e.g., 1 = on, 0 = off) 8) Voltage, amperage, or resistance input/output signal for all sensors and controlled devices D. Conformance Certificates: Upon substantial completion of the work, supply and turn over all IIII II required inspection certificates from governing authorities to certify that the work as installed conforms to the rules and regulations of the governing authorities. E. Warranty Certificates: .' 1. Warrant all work as follows: • a. Labor and materials for the control system specified shall be warranted free from defects for a period of 24 months after final completion and acceptance. Control system failures during the warranty period shall be adjusted, repaired, or replaced at no additional cost or reduction in service to the owner. b. The Control Contractor shall respond to the owner's request for warranty service within 24 hours during normal business hours. , 02054 • TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -6 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15900 CONTROLS c. The Control Contractor shall respond to the owner's request for Emergency . service during the warranty period within 4 hours. I 2. Emergency service shall be available 8,760 hours per year. 3. Five (5) non - warranty emergency service calls shall be provided free of charge per year. . 4. Emergency service rates for additional assistance shall be provided. • I a) The contractor shall provide unlimited phone technical support to the owner during the warranty period. If the technical support location of the contractor is outside of the toll free calling area for the customer, the contractor shall have a toll free number or accept collect calls for the purpose of providing technical I b) support. The contractor shall provide technical support bulletin service (if available) for two years. c) During the warranty period and if required by the School District, parts I for the DDC system shall arrive at the School District within 24 hours of placing an order. d) At the end of the final startup, testing, and commissioning phase, if equipment and systems are operating satisfactorily to the Engineer, the I Engineer shall sign certificates certifying that the control system's operation has been tested and accepted in accordance with the terms of the specifications listed in Section 15900 (see 7.3 thru 7.4). The date of acceptance shall be the start of the warranty period. e) All work shall have a single warranty date, even when the owner has received beneficial use due to an early system startup. f) Operator workstation software, project- specific software, graphic software, database software, and firmware updates which resolve I known software deficiencies as identified by the Control Contractor shall be provided at no charge during the warranty period. g) Any hardware or software discovered to incorrectly process, dates • starting January 1, 2000 through the year 2040 shall be replaced by the . . Control Contractor at no cost to the owner. h) Control contractor shall be available for a final check and adjustment of the DDC system before the warranty period ends. The final check will include input from the maintenance staff as well as the Engineer. 1 1.10 DELIVERY AND STORAGE I A. Provide factory. shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device not factory installed. Provide factory applied plastic end caps on each length of pipe and tube. Maintain , cartons and end caps through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent equipment and pipe -end damage, and to eliminate dirt and moisture from equipment and inside of pipe and tubes. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather. 1.11 SURGE PROTECTION A. All equipment shall be protected from power surges and voltage transients. If failure occurs from surges and transients during the warranty period, then the contractor shall repair surge protection equipment and other equipment damaged by the failure at no cost to the owner. I 1. Isolation shall be provided at all peer -to -peer network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients, and shall be consistent with IEEE Standards 587 -1980. I 1.12 DISCREPANCIES A. Any items not included in the specification but referred to in the Appendix and /or Drawings in reference to this project and any other incidentals not referred to but required as a basic element to I the overall performance and /or successful completion of the work shall be installed as part of this contract. 1 i 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -7 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15900 CONTROLS 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.02 BASIC MATERIALS, CONTROL DEVICES, SENSORS 1 A. Installation of some of the equipment in this section may be the responsibility of other contractors (see 1.5). B. All sensors and equipment related to or connected to the DDC system shall be installed according to manufacturer's recommendations. 1 2.03 WIRING, CABLE TRAYS, CONDUIT, AND HANGERS A. To supply, install and connect all conduits, boxes and wires between all the different components related in this section including all line voltage to the equipment. B. Provide all necessary field wiring and devices from the point of connection indicated on the drawings. Bring to the attention of the Engineer in writing, all conflicts, incompatibilities, and /or discrepancies prior to bid or as soon as discovered. C. Field Wiring: It is the intent of these specifications that all systems shall be complete and operable. Refer to all drawings and specifications to determine voltage, phase, circuit ampacity and number of connections provided. D. All wiring and fiber optic cable in the central plant, tunnels, and plenums to be supported by B- line Bridle rings or equal. All wiring and fiber optic cable in the hallways, rooms, and other public areas shall be in conduit. E. All wires in Bridle Rings or conduit shall follow building lines (i.e., wires in plenum space shall run within several inches of the wall and shall NOT run in the middle of the space). F. Wire: 1. Wire and cable of the sizes and types shown on the plans and /or hereinafter specified shall be furnished and installed by the Control Contractor. All wire and cable shall be new soft drawn copper and shall conform to all the latest requirements of the National Electrical Code, IPCEA, and shall meet the specifications of the ASTM. 2. All control wiring to be copper stranded TEW -105, with appropriate gauge in accordance with the Codes. The minimum gauge used to be 16 AWG. 3. Input/Output Wiring: Wiring serving inputs and outputs from the BAS shall be cables consisting of single or multiple twisted individually shielded pairs. Each pair shall have an independent shield with drain wire. Cables installed with out conduit shall be plenum rated and comply with NEC article 725. Where automation input/output wiring is run in cable tray furnish and install conductors or multiconductor cable rated for use in cable trays per NEC articles 340 and /or 725 Conductors shall - be minimum #18 wire gauge. 4. Power Conductors: All feeder and branch circuit wire shall be 600 V insulated of THHN type unless shown or specified to be otherwise. No wire less than No. 12 gauge shall be • used except for control circuits or low voltage wiring. Wire sizes No. 14 to No. 10 shall be solid except where otherwise indicated. Wire sizes No. 8 and larger shall be stranded. All wire sizes shown are American Wire Gauge sizes. Where power conductors are run in cable tray, furnish and install conductors or multiconductor cable rated for use in cable trays per NEC articles 340 and/or 725. 5. All the conductors used for signals from the Controllers and field sensors must be shielded two wire, 18 AWG. with a drain wire. Conductor model 8760 from Belden is to be used or approved alternative by Engineer. 6. All power wiring to be copper stranded RW 90 type, with appropriate gauge in accordance with the Codes. The following color code must be applied: line voltage to be black and /or white, ground to be green. 7. Acceptable Manufacturers: Cable and wire shall be a standard type as manufactured by General Electric Company, National Electric Company, U. S. Rubber Company, Simplex, General Cable Company, Carol, Anaconda, Rome, Southwire, Belden, Alpha, Houston Wire and Cable, or ITT Royal. G. Wiring Installation: 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -8 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15900 I CONTROLS • 1. All wires shall be continuous from outlet to outlet and there shall be no unnecessary slack I 2. in the conductors. All wire terminations will be identified using rail terminal strips (see 5.11) 3. All drain wires must be grounded at the source end. The other end must be protected with a dielectric material (tape). I 4. All control wiring (24 V and more) must be in a separate conduit from the shielded ' conductors. 5. Pull -Box and Junction Box: a) Pull boxes and junction boxes shall be installed where indicated on the drawings I or where required to facilitate wire installation. Locate in conjunction with other trades so as to install without conflict with other materials or equipment. b) A pull -box will be located at every 50'. c) All switch, pull, junction boxes, etc., shall be hot dipped galvanized or sherardized, concrete tight, with interlocking ring or multiple point locking I devices. Connectors shall be three piece. Indentation fittings are not acceptable. d) In suspended ceilings, all boxes must be installed on the structure. e) Boxes shall be attached by fasteners designed for the purpose and shall provide I adequate mechanical strength for future maintenance. f) Junction and pull boxes not dimensioned shall be minimum 4 inch square. 6. Care shall be used to avoid proximity to heat ducts and/or steam lines. Where crossings are unavoidable, conduit shall clear covering of line by at least six inches. I 7. Motor Interlock Wiring: Interlock circuit wiring shall be No. 14 solid or stranded wire. Stranded wire only shall be used where wiring is used for flexible wiring harnesses. Stranded control wire shall be provided with crimp type spade terminators. Interlock . circuit wiring shall be color-coded or numbered using an identical number on both ends of the conductor. Wire numbers shall be installed before conductors are pulled. Where I motor interlock conductors are run in cable -tray, furnish and install conductors or multiconductor cable rated for use in cable trays per NEC articles 340 and /or 725. 8. All splices, taps, and terminations shall be made at outlet, junction, or pull boxes. Wire PI to No.6 gauge shall be spliced using Scotchlok wire nuts. No Bakelite wirenuts shall be used. Wire No. 6 and larger shall be spliced using solderness connectors as manufactured by Penn Union Company. Splices No. 6 and larger shall be insulated by taping with plastic vinyl tape as manufactured by Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company. Splices shall not be permitted in automation input and output wiring with out specific I written authorization from the - Engineer. If such a splice is approved, the location of the splice shall be clearly documented on the "As Built" drawings. Splices in automation wiring, if necessary, shall be made using Thomas &Betts STA -KON connectors installed per the manufacturers directions to maintain NEMA specified voltage drops and wire I 9. retention forces. Grounding: a. The contractor shall extend existing equipment grounding systems. The Contractor shall use only approved grounding clamps and connectors as 1 b. manufactured by Penn- Union, Burndy or O -Z Mfg. Company. The conduit system of the 480/277 and 208Y/120 volt systems shall be continuous and shall be used as the static grounding conductor, except for circuits installed in flexible conduit. Install a green grounding conductor inside all flexible conduits and extend to the nearest outlet or junction box. Install a green grounding conductor inside all non - metallic conduits or raceways. H. Conduit: I 1. Conduit Material: a) All wiring to be in E.M.T. type conduits unless in plenum. b) All conduits to be a minimum of 1/2 ". c) All flexible conduits will not exceed 6' in length and are to be used only in areas I d) where vibrations and/or expansion joints are present. Flexible conduit to be used for connecting any element to its conduit. The length of this flexible conduit will not exceed 24 ". e) Jacketed flexible steel conduit (Sealtite) shall be used where flexible conduit connections are required and at connections to all motorized equipment and motors. f) In damp areas, the conduit and related equipment must be suitable for the • application. I g) Electrometalic tubing shall be installed for all exposed work and for all concealed work in applications where conduit is required. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION/ REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 - TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -9 Printed 07/27/04 • i SECTION 15900 CONTROLS h) Conduit shall be by Allied, Triangle, Republic, Youngstown, Carlon, Rob Roy, or approved equal. • i) For exposed installations where the conduit cannot be run in ceiling spaces, wall cavities or attics, surface- mounted raceway (wire mold) is acceptable. No EMT is allowed in these locations. Provide samples for size and color selection. 2. Conduit Installation: , a) All wiring in mechanical rooms at heights below 12 feet must be run in conduit. Otherwise, wiring in all other open areas must have conduit (at all heights). b) All conduits to be installed in a concealed manner where possible and shall be installed parallel to the lines of the building. c) All exposed conduits shall be installed parallel or at right angles to the building walls or floors. d) Conduit bends shall be made with standard hickeys of proper size; radius of bends to be at least 6 times the diameter of the conduit. Runs between outlets shall not contain more than the equivalent of three quarter bends. Conduit runs shall be continuous from outlet to outlet, outlet to cabinet, etc. e) Conduits shall be installed with pitch toward outlet box wherever possible. All heavy wall conduits shall have two locknuts and a bushing at each termination outlet box, junction box, etc., except where terminated in a threaded hub. Fittings on electrometalic tubing shall be compression type. A bushing shall be used where conduit enters a panel box. Bushing for No. 4 AWG or larger shall be insulated type with provisions for grounding as type. "BL" made by O -Z Electric Company, or approved equal. g) Expansion fittings shall be provided at all conduits across the building expansion joints. Fittings shall be Type "AX" or "TX" as made by O -Z Electric Company, or approved equal. Provide copper bonding jumper at each expansion fitting. - - h) All %" conduit to be supported -every 6', the supports will be located at the connector end of the conduit. i) Exposed conduit shall be securely fastened in place on maximum 5 ft. intervals for 3/4" through 2 -1/2 inch nominal sizes. Supports may be one hole malleable straps or other approved devices. No perforated metal straps will be permitted. L Wireway: 1. Furnish and install at all control panel locations a NEMA 1 lay -in wireway system to bring cable into and out of the panel as detailed on the drawings and specified in this section. Furnish 3 -way wireways at each panel location: one for Class 1 wiring, 1 for Class 2 and Class 3 wiring. Panels at units to be NEMA 3R or better. 2. Wireway systems at locations where cables are to be run without conduit or in a cable tray shall consist of a connection to the control panel with a vertical extension to 8' -0" or the pipe rack or cable tray level, whichever is higher. The vertical section shall terminate in a 90° fitting with a closure plate. The closure plate shall be provided with a conduit —_ — nipple with locknuts and bushings as a wire entry point into the square duct. The conduit nipple shall be one size smaller than the wireway it is associated with. 3. Wireway systems at locations where cables are to be run in conduit shall consist of a horizontal section of wireway with a length equal to the control panel width and located above the control panel and connected to the control panel with three conduit nipples, locknuts, and bushings; one for tubing, one for Class 1 wiring and one for Class 2 and 3 wiring. Conduits for cable runs shall terminate on the wireway. 111 4. The intent of the wireway configurations outlined above is to provide a method for adding input and output wiring to the control panel without having to drill directly into the electronics enclosure after the system is on -line and running and to provide sufficient area to land field conduits while maintaining appropriate circuit segregation for wire entry into the controller enclosure. The installation of wireway shall be made with this consideration in mind. J. Hangers and Anchors: , 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -10 Printed 07/27/04 1 . SECTION 15900 1 CONTROLS 1. Where control system tubing is run on trapezes and /or hangers used by and or installed I by other trades, supports for the trapezes shall be coordinated by all trades using the trapeze to assure that the anchor system is not overloaded and is sufficient for the load imposed including a margin of safety and seismic considerations. Under no circumstances shall a trapeze or hanger system installed by the electrical trades be used to I support work by any other trade, nor shall the electrical trades use the trapezes installed by any of the other trades for the support of electrical equipment, all as required by the National Electric Code. Similarly, under no circumstances shall a trapeze or hanger system installed by the sprinkler trades be used to support work by any other trade, nor I shall the sprinkler trades use the trapezes installed by any of the other trades for the support of sprinkler systems or equipment, all as required by NFPA 13, Standard For The Installation Of Sprinkler Systems. 2. Anchors to be loaded in tension for use in existing concrete structure and anchors loaded I in tension and not cast in place shall be epoxy resin set anchors installed per the manufacturers recommendations for technique, size, loading, embedment, etc. Where anchors are loaded in shear at these locations, suitably sized and installed wedge type anchors may be used. I 3. In all cases, anchor loading shall be based on hanger spacing, weight of the pipe to be supported when full and insulated, weight of any additional loads imposed upon the anchor, wind loading, seismic loading, quality of the material that the anchor is being installed in, etc. The Control Contractor shall verify in the field that the anchors used and the materials that they are being installed in are suitable for the load imposed and shall I bring any problems to the attention of the Engineer in writing immediately and not proceed without direction from the Engineer. 4. Wedge type anchors shall be. Hilti Kwik Bolt II. Adhesive anchors shall be Hilti HVA. I 2.03 . -_ UNIT CONTROL PANELS (INSTALLATION AND FABRICATION) pi A. Enclosed cabinet type with hinged door for mounting all relays, switches, thermometers, and miscellaneous controls not requiring direct mounting on equipment such as sensing elements, valves and damper motors. Provide cabinet for each control unit adjacent to each system. I B. Each panel shall have power conditioners on electrical supply, Crucial Power Product MI Series. C. Control panels shall be fabricated to match the approved shop drawings submitted by the control contractor. Fabrication shall be in a neat and workmanlike manner and shall facilitate repair, maintenance, and adjustment of the equipment contained therein. I D. Control panels shall be fabricated and laid out to incorporate the following features: 1. Identification of all internally and cover mounted devices. Cover mounted labels shall be • engraved labels as specified in this section (5.10). Labels shall be mounted adjacent to the device they are associated with so that replacement of the device does not eliminate the - - - - -- - - - -- label. Provide laminated control diagram at each panel. 2. Electrical wiring shall enter the panel from the top, bottom, and /or side of the left side of the panel or as required by the panel supplier to meet NEC requirements. I 3. All wires entering or leaving the panel shall pass through a rail terminal strip. Where the wires are part of a current loop transmission circuit, the terminals shall be the • disconnecting link type. Terminals shall be identified with a number that corresponds to the terminal number on the job wiring diagram. Rail terminal strip specifications include: I a. General: Terminal rail assemblies shall be fabricated from components selected from the product line of one manufacturer. Sizes (heights, widths, and profiles) of each terminal shall be selected to be compatible with the other terminals on the rail. Terminal units located at the end of a rail or adjacent to terminals with I a different profile (for example, where disconnecting terminals are located next to resistor terminals) shall be provided with end caps to completely close off the terminal unit interior components from the local environment. End stops shall be provided for on all rails to secure the terminals located on the rail in place. I 4. All internal wiring and tubing shall be run inside plastic wiring /tubing duct as manufactured by Tyton. Wire duct shall be sized to hold the required number of wires and tubes without crimping the tubes and with sufficient space to allow wiring and tubing to be traced during troubleshooting operation. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -11 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15900 CONTROLS 1 5. Wires that pass from the panel interior to cover mounted devices shall be provided with a flex loop that is anchored on both sides of the hinge. Wiring running to cover mounted II devices shall be bundled using cable ties. 6. Provide strain relief type cord and cable connectors for all cables that leave the panel as individual cables not in conduit. 7. All control panels shall be provided with removable sub panels to allow the panel enclosures to be installed at the job site during rough in while the panels are fabricated off -site for later installation. 8. Provide one under cabinet type fluorescent light with switch mounted internally in the control panel. Panels with external light hoods will also be acceptable if the light will illuminate the panel interior with the door open. 9. Provide one duplex outlet mounted inside the control panel and separately fused with a I non -time delay fuse at 15 A at any panel location containing electronic or electrical control components. This receptacle may be served from the control panel 120 VAC I power source. • 10. Each control panel shall be provided with a control power disconnect switch located and wired so as to disconnect all control power in the panel. The leaving side of this switch shall be wired to the panel and field components through a fuse or fuses sized and applied • to protect both the components of the system as well as the wire and as required for code compliance. 11. Power to the following equipment will be have a fuse rated for applicable current and voltage. Fuses will be on rail terminal strips. Equipment includes: a. Each control unit I b. Control devices c. Panel light d. Receptacle loads (e.g., modems, laptops) 12. All control panels containing electrical equipment shall be NEMA rated for the location in which they are installed. Cover mounted components, tubing penetration, and conduit penetrations shall be made in a manner consistent with the NEMA rating. . 13. All wiring leaving the panel shall be separated by classification; i.e., Class 1 circuits shall . • not be run with Class 2 circuits, etc. Segregation shall be maintained inside the panel to the fullest extent possible. Where low voltage wires carrying low level ac and dc signals cross wires containing power and high level ac signals, the wires shall cross at a 90° angle. E. Control panels shall be shop fabricated and tested prior to installation in the field. The panels I shall be inspected and approved by the Engineer at the assembly location prior to installation in the field. The Engineer shall be given the opportunity to witness the testing of the panels. F. Panel Location: 1 1. Each control panel is to be located for convenient servicing. 2. Mount panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration isolation. • - 2 - .04 CONTROL VALVES AND ACTUATORS A. Provide adequate size and number for modulating or two - position action. I B. - Provide positive positioning devices where shown or where sequencing cannot be accomplished by using standard spring ranges. • C. Valve Sizing: 1. Modulating valve sizing shall be based on the following conditions. a. Water Valves: 1) Minimum pressure drop - 2 psi or equal to the water side pressure drop of the coil it is associated with, which ever is greater. 2) Maximum pressure drop - 3 psi b. Flow rates for valve sizing shall be based upon the flow rates indicated on the equipment schedules on the drawings. I c. Valve sizing shall consider the valve cavitation coefficient. In no case shall a valve be sized so that the pressure drop through the valve causes cavitation with fluid temperatures and pressures encountered in the system during start up or normal operation. d. Valves on heating systems to be normally open. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC Il JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -12 Printed 07 /27/04 . 1 I SECTION 15900 CONTROLS D. Valves: I 1. Equip with custom flow control modulating ball valve. 2. Two position valves shall be the full size of the pipe that they are associated with unless otherwise specified. 3. Two -way valve actuators shall be sized to close off tight against the full pump shut off I 4. head on the system upon which they are installed. Three -way valve actuators shall be sized to close off tight in both directions against 2.5 times the valve pressure drop at full flow. 5. Valves shall close against differential pressures. Water control valves, acting as pressure I control or pressure relief valves, shall be capable of closing against a differential pressure equal to 150% of rated pump head of each application. 6. Provide spring returns on valve operators so that the valves fail safe during electrical power failure in normally open or closed position as specified and/or shown on drawings. I NOTE: the actuator shall be wired to close the valve using the electric motor only. Spring return is to be used only in the advent of an electrical power failure. 7. Two - position steam valves. • a. Steam control valves shall be single seated with equal percentage flow I characteristics. If required for equal percentage flow characteristics, multiple valves may be used. b. Valve discs shall be composition type with stainless steel trim for steam pressure • greater than 35 psi. I 8. Screwed ends on valves 2- inches and smaller. Flanged ends on valves 2 -1/2 inches and larger. 9. Three-way valves where indicated on Drawings, otherwise two -way valves. I E. Valve Actuators: 1. Electronic actuators shall be manufactured by Belimo for all valves. For valves smaller -- than 3/4", Siemens 599 series acceptable or Approved. P • - 2. Torque shall be rated at twice the required load. 2.05 SENS . 1 A. All sensing inputs shall be provided industry standard signals. B. Temperatures, humidities, differential pressure signals, and all other signal inputs shall be: 1. 4 -20mA I Provide signal transmitters for temperature sensors as required. All other devices shall be direct 4- 20mA C. All signal inputs shall be compatible with the controllers used and with the requirement for readout of variables as specified. D. - _ _ rf sensors are not linear,, then software will linearize sensor output. • 1 E. Controls and sensors for VAV boxes to be provided to VAV manufacturer for installation at the factory. F. Minimum sensor accuracy (as compared to a test standard) and range are listed in Table. I Accuracy is not the same as resolution (the ability of the DDC to measure incremental change). Resolution is specified in "Part 3. DDC Hardware." 1. All accuracy values should be combined effect numbers taking into account thermal drift, interchangeability, hysteresis, etc. Sensor Type Range Min. Accuracy Duct/Air Handling I Unit Temperature 40 — 130 °F ± 0.5 Degree F Room Temperature 50 85 °F ± 1 Degree F Outside Air Temperature - 20 to 120 °F ± 0.5 Degree F Chilled Water Temperature 32 — 80 °F ± 0.1 to ± 0.5 Degree F I Hot Water Temperature 80 — 220 °F ± 0.1 to ± 0.5 Degree F Water flow Sized for application ± 5% of reading 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC • JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -13 Printed 07 /27/04 . 1 SECTION 15900 CONTROLS 1 Humidity 0 to 100% RH ± 3% RH • Duct Static Pressure 0 to 3" w.c. ± 1% full scale per 50 °F I Space Static Pressure - 0.25" to 0.25" w.c. ± 1% full scale per 50 °F • High Limit Static 0 -5" w.c. ± 1% full scale per 50 °F Steam Pressure Sized for application ± 1 % full scale Current Sensor Sized for application ± 1% full scale Power (kWh) Sized for application ± 2.5% full scale (at 0.5 PF ) . ± 2% full scale (at 1.0 PF) Air flow 700 to 4,000 fpm ± 2% full scale CO sensors 0 to 2,000 PPM ± 3% full scale Propane/Natural Gas Sized for application ± 5% Freeze Stat 34 °F to 68 °F ± 1 °F Sensors shall not drift more than 1% of full scale per year 2.06 TEMPERATURE SENSORS/THERMOSTATS 1 A. All sensors shall be completely electronic. B. Duct/ Air Handling Unit type temperature sensor (mixed, discharge /supply, and return air): 1. The probe of the duct sensor shall be 12" in length, and be made of Stainless Steel. Applications where the smallest dimension of the duct is less than 24 ", the probe shall be sized to reach the center of the duct. 2. Large systems above 9 s quare feet may require an averaging probe if sufficient mixing of • the air stream is not possible. 3. Mount the sensor far enough downstream to allow mixing of the air stream, this is most important on Hot and Cold Deck applications where the coil is placed after the fan. 4. Sensors for mounting on insulated ducts or casings are to be equipped with brackets for mounting clear of the isolation. - 5. Do not locate sensors in dead air spaces or in positions with obstructed air flow. • 6. Provide separate duct flange for each sensing element. • 7. Temperature sensing elements shall be thermally isolated from brackets and supports. 4 8. Securely seal ducts where elements or connections penetrate duct. 9. Mount sensor enclosures to allow for easy removal and servicing without disturbance or removal of duct insulation. C. Immersion• Type Temperature Sensor: 1 1. The probe of the sensor shall be constructed of stainless steel and pressure rating consistent with system pressure and velocity. 2. The well shall be constructed of stainless steel and sized to reach into the center of the I pipe. Pipes with small diameters shall have the well mounted at a 90 degree elbow to allow sufficient contact with the fluid. 3. - Locate wells to sense continuous flow conditions. 4. Do not install wells using extension couplings. 5. — Wells shall not restrict flow area to less than 70 percent of line - size -pipe normal flow_ - __ area.- Increase piping size as required to avoid restriction. 6. Provide thermal transmission material within the well. 7. Provide wells with sealing nuts to contain the thermal transmission* material and allow for I easy removal. D. Room Type Temperature Sensor: 1. All thermostat locations shall be submitted for approval before installation. i 2. Provide all sensors with blank wall plate, vandal -proof covers that are flush with wall. Mamac TE -205 -P series are equal. 3. Coordinate sensor location with light switches, and mount 60" above the floor. Verify location before installation, so that no direct sunlight or influences from heat and cooling I sources will be imposed on the sensor. 4. Unless otherwise indicated or specified, provide one discharge and one space temperature sensor for each VAV Terminal Control Unit. 5. Metal guards shall be provided as shown on Drawings. I 6. Insulation shall be installed between the temperature sensor and open conduit to eliminate false temperature readings due to cold drafts. E. Freeze Stat: 20' element (copper capillary), manual reset, SPDT Device. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL – T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD – TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -14 Printed 07/27/04 SECTION 15900 1 CONTROLS 2.07 TRANSFORMERS 1 A. Transformers selected and sized for appropriate VA capacity and installed and fused according to applicable Codes. I 2.08 CO SENSORS A. Sensor output shall be 4 -20 mA which is proportional over the specified range. I B. The transmitter shall be capable of operating from an unregulated 18 -30 VDC power supply. C. Sensors shall be field adjustable via the DDC system. I D. Self - calibrating sensors are preferred. Manual calibrated sensors should not require annual calibration but may require calibration every 3 — 5 years. Allow for easy calibration with test gas. E. Provide CO2 calibration tool with system. Turn over to owner after calibration and provide 111 instructions on use. 2.09 CURRENT SWITCHES 1 A. The status of all non —VFD fan and, pump motors and all VFD fan and pump motors less than 20 HP shall ONLY be detected using current switches. I B. The current switch shall be provided for electrical equipment status applications only. C. Switch should attach directly to the conductor and have a mounting bracket for installation P flexibility. D. The current switch shall be 100% solid state electronics. E. The current switch shall be induce powered from the monitored load I 2.10 CURRENT SENSORS /TRANSFORMERS A. The status and amperage of all VFD motors for fan and pumps greater than 20 HP shall be I B. detected using current sensors ONLY. The Amp signal shall be provided on operator screen. 1 C. The scale used must be selected in order to obtain normal operating readings at the mid -point of the scale. D. The scale used must be selected in order to detect changes in current flow resulting from motor belt or coupling loss, belt slippage, and other mechanical failures and should be able to distinguish I low load conditions. 2.15 SURGE PROTECTION I A. All equipment shall be protected from power surges and voltage transients. If failure occurs from surges and transients during the warranty period, then the contractor shall repair surge protection equipment and other equipment damaged by the failure at no cost to the owner. I B. Isolation shall be provided at all peer -to -peer network terminations, as well as all field point terminations to suppress induced voltage transients, and shall be consistent with IEEE standards 587 -1980. I 2.11 FACTORY MOUNTED DEVICES A. Sensors as required shall be provided by Control contractor to the manufacturer for installation. All materials and labor beyond this is the responsibility of the Control contractor. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -15 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15900 CONTROLS 1 2.12 LIGHT OVERRIDE SWITCHES: A. Commercial series 24 volt rated Honeywell EL 5551- EL5554 series. ' PART 3 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS — HARDWARE 3.01 SYSTEM ARCHITECTURE - A. Local Area Network (LAN) linking the primary, secondary, and application control units with the host computers for central reporting and system communication. B. Existing Host computers shall be located in District Maintenance services office (remote) and in • the Custodian's office (local). • C. System to expand existing Johnson Control LAN and Metasys M5/NCM control system. ' • 3.02 SECONDARY CONTROL UNITS A. Secondary control units are able to control HVAC equipment per specified by the sequence of 1 operation. 1. Each controller shall be capable of performing specified control functions. The secondary control unit shall directly control all units, fans, dampers and control devices. All control software shall be implemented in the secondary control unit. The sequence of operation precisely identifies all points of monitoring and control. 2. Each controller shall monitor specific analog and digital inputs, process the data received, and produce analog or digital outputs to control the systems specified. , B. Minimum specifications include: 1. Microprocessor -based controllers, fully equipped with power supply, input and output • terminals. 2. Modular multi tasking based direct digital controller with minimum of 2048 bytes of EEPROM and RAM memory. 3. Minimum 8 bit Analog -to- Digital (A/D) converter. 4. Minimum 10 bit Digital -to- Analog (D /A) converter. 5. Controllers shall have unused physical points available for future add -ons. The number of spare points shall equal 20% of all physical points or two spare points whichever is greater. 6. Shall include all control strategies listed in "Part 4: DDC Software." 7. Each control loop shall be fully definable in terms of inputs and outputs that are a part of the control strategy. 8. Each secondary control unit shall be equipped with a RS232C communication interface connection, minimum of 16 universal analog or digital inputs or outputs, and shall 111 - -- communiEate- via -the: LAN -to the host computer: Each- control - units- shall- be- eapable -of- - - -- - proper operation in an ambient environment of between 32 °F and 11.0 °F and from 10% to 90% RH. 9. Control units provided for outside installation shall be capable of proper operation in an ambient environment of 0 °F to 120 °F, and 5 to 95% RH. If such hardware is not available, locate hardware in an accessible indoor location or as approved by the Engineer. • C. Local Area Network (LAN) linking the secondary control unit with the primary control unit for central reporting and system communication. Communication with primary control unit shall be within acceptable time limits to ensure continuous operation of all control strategies. Reporting shall be in real time. D. Secondary control unit. Secondary control units are microprocessor -based devices that are less programmable and will be used on: 1. Small unitary equipment (flow rate less than 2,000 CFM) 2. Fan coil units 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -16 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15900 1 CONTROLS PART 4 - DIRECT DIGITAL CONTROLS — SOFTWARE 1 4.01 SYSTEM SOFTWARE A. System software shall be fully licensed to the owner for all Host computer(s). Update software at I host computer and all controllers to current version. Existing Johnson Control software to remain in use with updates. All trending, schedules, reports data archiving and security from Phase I shall remain in operation and extended for Phase II. I PART 5 - SYSTEM SETUP . 5.01 RESPONSIBILITIES OF INSTALLER AND PROGRAMMER 1 A. This section further defines the responsibilities of the installer and programmer. B. The following features shall be incorporated into the final delivered product. I 5.02 PASSWORDS A. Passwords and security levels set in Phase I shall remain unchanged for Phase II. 5.03 POINTS A. All points (DI, DO, AI, and AO) will,have unique alphanumeric names and addresses. Installer I and programmer will determine: scanning frequency (rate), units, scaling factors, high and low alarm values, alarm differentials, default values, and ranges in coordination with engineer and Owner staff. p . - B. Provide the following minimum programming for each analog input: 1. Name 2. Address 3. Scanning frequency I 4. Engineering units 5. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units 6. High and low alarm values and alarm differentials for return to normal condition 7. High and low value reporting limits (reasonableness values) which shall prevent control I 8. logic from using shorted or open circuit values. Default value to be used when the actual measured value is not reporting. This is required only for points that are transferred across the primary and /or secondary networks and used in control programs residing in control units other than the one in which the ' point resides. Events causing the default value to be used shall include failure of the control unit in which the point resides, or failure of any network over which the point • valuessiransferred_. 9. Selectable averaging function which shall average the measured value over a user I C. selected number of scans for reporting. Provide the following minimum programming for each analog output: I 1. Name 2. Address 3. Output updating frequency 4. Engineering units - I 5. Offset calibration and scaling factor for engineering units 6. Output Range 7. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting. I D. Provide the following minimum programming for each digital input: 1. Name 2. Address 3. Scanning frequency I 4. Engineering units (on /off, open /closed, freeze /normal, etc.) 5. Debounce time delay 6. Message and alarm reporting as specified. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -17 Printed 07/27/04 1 • SECTION 15900 • CONTROLS 1 7. Reporting of each change of state and memory storage of the time of the last change of . state. I 8. Totalization of on time (for all motorized equipment status points), and accumulated number of off -to -on transitions. E. Provide the following minimum programming for each digital output: • 1. Name 2. Address 3. Output updating frequency 4. Engineering units (on/off, open/closed, freeze /normal, etc.) I 5. Direct or Reverse action selection 6. Minimum on time 7. Minimum off time 8. Status association with a DI and - failure alarming (as applicable) I 9. Reporting of each change of state and 10. Reporting of memory. storage of the time of the last change of state. 11. Totalization of on time (for all motorized equipment status points), and accumulated number of off -to -on transitions. • 1 12. Default value to be used when the normal controlling value is not reporting. 5.04 ALARMS • A. The Control Contractor in coordination with the owner and design engineer shall specify values I that trigger alarm conditions. B. The Control Contractor in coordination with the owner and design engineer shall specify the alarm level that requires on- screen operator acknowledgement. 1 . _ C. Provide five alarm levels. - - -- - - _. 1. Level 1 alarm (smoke and/or fire) • 2. Level 2 alarm (equipment failure /damage imminent) 4 3. Level 3 alarm (equipment requires hardware or software reset) 4. Level 4 alarm (equipment requires servicing and/or energy is being wasted) 5. Level 5 alarm (temperature setpoints are out of bounds) • D. Provide five locations for reporting of alarms. 1 1. Level 1: Send Level 1 alarm to F.A.C.P., to security monitor 2. Level 2: Send Level 2 alarm to central control monitor I 3. Level 3: Send Level 3 alarm to central control monitor 4. Level 4: Send Level 4 alarm to maintenance shop monitor and printer 5. ' Level 5: Send Level 5 alarm to printer only • E. All alarm reports shall include the point's English language description, point address, an alarm message io more full�escnbe tfie alarm condition and/or direct perator response, an the time -- — ---- i and date of occurrence. 5.05 DATA TRENDING f A. Data trending will be set for the start -up period and after system acceptance. B. Date trended during system start -up and before system acceptance shall include all real and virtual data points. Data will be collected and stored every one minute unless otherwise noted on blueprints or in appendices. . 111 C. Establish data trended (every 15 minutes) of the following points after system acceptance: 1. Outside Air Temperature 2. Outside Air Enthalpy 3. Occupancy schedule 4. For each air handler a) On /Off status • b) Damper position (as determined by BAS) I c) Damper Output Signal 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -18 Printed 07/27/04 , 1 SECTION 15900 I CONTROLS d) Damper position (as determined from actuator output) I e) f) Cooling Setpoint Heating Setpoint g) Discharge Air Temperature for each zone h) Discharge Air Temperature setpoint for each zone I i) Mixed Air Temperature j) Mixed Air Temperature setpoint • k) Return Air Temperature 1) Return Air Enthalpy I m) n) Heater status Heater stages o) DX status • p) DX stages ' 5. 6. Space Temperatures and temperature setpoints Percent heating and Cooling Load for each zone D. All data will be saved on the hard drive for at least one year. 5.06 SCHEDULES A. Schedule will be installed using time parameters provided by owner or obtained on drawings. 5.07 GRAPHIC SCREENS A. Graphic screens shall match those of Phase I in presentation, quality and content. 1 5.08 ON- SCREEN SENSOR RESOLUTION Sensor Type Resolution (displayed on screen) Temperature 0.1 °F Pressure 0.01 inches w.c. Actuators (damper and valve) 1% of full range I Humidity 0.5% RH Air Flow 10 CFM CO sensors 20 PPM Current Sensor 0.1 kW 1 5.09 OVERRIDES I A. _ The DDC system should recognize the override and report to the screen and printer._ I B. The manual overrides for all system shall be in one location as specified by the Engineer. C. Software shall have adjustable time limits for each override. I D. Provide override switches (see drawings for location of panel for each unit). Each momentary switch with lockout and light (green for "on," red for "off') to activate an override of unit(s) as programmed through software. Each override to have adjustable time.setting and revert to previous mode of operation at time's end. I E. See Drawings for building shut -off switch. Switch to shut off all air handling equipment. 5.10 SAFETY CIRCUITS A. All safety circuits shall be hard wired circuits with independent manual reset type switches. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -19 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15900 CONTROLS 1 5.11 LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION A. All devices relating to the work or systems included herein, including controllers, valves, motors, relays, etc., shall be identified with a unique identification number or name on the submitted engineering drawings. This identification number or name, along with the service of the device • (discharge air controller, mixed air controller, etc.), shall be permanently affixed to the respective device. B. All field devices will be supplied with a nameplate indicating its name, number, address, and all other pertinent information. I C. If the field device is too small for the nameplate to be "adhered" to or on another piece of equipment near it (e.g., nameplate on air handling unit at wire penetration for mixed air temperature sensor), then attach the nameplate via nylon ties. I D. Tagging shall be computer generated. For input/output wiring, cabling, or tubing, the panel side of the terminals shall be labeled with the automation panel circuit board and terminal numbers associated with the point. The field side shall be labeled with the point number. Cable, wiring and I tubing not specifically associated with an input or output shall be labeled with a number and function. E. All wiring, tubing, and cabling both inside and outside of control panels shall be labeled at both I ends using Thomas and Betts EDP printable wire and cable markers using style WSL self - laminating vinyl. Input and output cables and wiring shall be labeled with the point number and the point description, such as: CPDPS005 I Primary Heating Water • . - Pump #1 On/Off Status - . - F. Cable and wiring not specifically associated with an input or output shall be labeled with a number and a function description such as: 120 VAC '4 Panel # 5.12 REPORTS I A. At a minimum, the system shall allow the user to easily print the following types of reports. 1. General listing of all points in the network 2. List of user accounts and access levels I 3. List of all points currently in alarm . 4. List of all off -line points 5. List of all points currently in override status 6. List of all disabled points 7. List of all points currently locked out g: List of ali Weekly 9. List of all Holiday Programming 10. List of Limits and Deadbands, throttling ranges, gains, etc. 11. List of all adjustable and virtual points PART 6 - SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 6.01 LEVEL OF DETAIL A. Major changes in provided sequence of operation must be approved of in writing by the owner and the Engineer. B. The Control Contractor shall provide two types of documentation for each system (e.g., boiler plant, VAV system, etc.). The two types of documentation include: I 1. Control Logic . a. Control logic shall be a series of statements providing, for each system, the following items: 1) Identification of control process 2) Narrative of control loop or logic algorithm 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -20 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15900 1 CONTROLS 3) Control parameters such as setpoints and differentials (e.g., throttling I 4) range, gains) reset schedules, and adjustable parameters for all points Identification of all constraints, limits, or interlocks that apply to control loop 5) Identification of all DO, DI, AO, AI points that apply to system I 6) Identification of all communication needs (data points from outside control unit) 2. Logic Diagrams . a. For each control logic system, a logic diagram shall show the actual interaction 1 of the points (real and virtual) and the logic algorithm.. b. The diagram should identify 1) System being controlled (attach abbreviated control logic text) I 2) All DO, DI, AO, Al points 3) Virtual points 4) All functions (logic, math, and control) within control loop 5) Legend for graphical icons or symbols I 6) Definition of variables or point names (e.g., OAT = outside air temperature) 7) Define values (e.g., 1 = on, 0 = off) c. See figure below for example of logic diagram). 1 1 HW Valve P _ co • D n o B CD Oil ' SP DA Q o - 5VDC I 0 I NO ' 0 DA =Do air temperature -� RESET =Zone Zone tam temperature CD A CD = Control device Jam' lam. Direct acting (DA) PID !/ NO = Normally open 1 The discharge air temperature 0 ZT4 is reset based on coldest zone I temperature. 6.02 STANDARDIZATION 1 A. All control loops will be standardized throughout the programming code. 6.03 PROGRAMMING GUIDELINES . I A. All adjustable setpoints shall be developed as software points stored at memory locations so that setpoints can be changed by recommending the data stored at the memory location rather than by entering the program and changing parameters and lines in program code. I B. Where reset schedules are specified or required the schedules shall be set up so that the operator enters the following points into memory locations. 1. Two points for the independent variable on the reset schedule. 2. Two points for the dependent variable on the reset schedule. I The computer system shall then use these values as input parameters to the appropriate program or programs and calculate the reset schedule based on these values. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -21 • Printed 07/27/04 • 1 SECTION 15900 CONTROLS C. Where several analog outputs are to be controlled in sequence by one control loop, software shall be arranged so that the sequence is guaranteed regardless of the spring range of the actuators and to prevent simultaneous heating and cooling. D. Programs controlling several pieces of equipment as one system shall reside in one control unit. Where programs use data points that reside in other control units the programs shall employ logic (either in software, firmware, hardware, or a combination of all three) to detect loss of communications with the remote control units containing the required data. When such a failure is detected, the program logic shall revert to a safe operating mode that will allow the controlled systems to remain in operation until normal system communication resumes. A pilot light on the control unit shall be illuminated when such a failure mode exists. In addition, an alarm shall be sent to the HOST computers (alarm level 4). The software shall track this type of alarm and report if communication failure is higher than expected (this condition shall generate an alarm level 3, with descriptive text, at the HOST computer). All safe operating modes shall be approved by the Engineer prior to implementation. E. Control sequences that use outdoor air conditions to trigger certain specific operating modes shall use data generated by one outdoor air temperature sensor and one outdoor humidity sensor. In other words, the data from one pair of sensors shall be shared by the entire system. F. All safety circuits shall be hard wired circuits using standard snap acting electric or pneumatic switches as required by the function, and shall be totally independent of the DDC system controllers. This includes interlocks that return dampers and valves to some normal, fail -safe position when the system they are associated with shuts down. It is the intent of this paragraph that the systems have the capability to be operated manually complete with safeties and fail safe • interlocks even if the DDC system is off line. G. Provide hours of operation accumulation and lead /lag sequencing of equipment based on hours of operation for all equipment with proof of operation inputs. • H. Global point name changing: 1. The system shall provide an easy means to allow the operator to change a point name such that the point will automatically be referenced everywhere in the system by the new name. 2. If a point name is removed from the database, any program code where the name appears must show an appropriate error signal for undefined point when the program is viewed, edited, or printed. 1 I. Synchronization of real -time clocks between all control panels shall be provided. 6.04 GENERAL SEQUENCE OF OPERATION GUIDELINES A. Control of all central fan systems, boilers, DX units, heaters, and pumping stations shall be based on run requests, heating requests or cooling requests from zone controls. ' B. Reset of supply air temperature and hot water temperature shall be based on zone temperature conditions via the zone's percentage of heating or cooling load. C. Unless otherwise indicated, all control loops will use PID loops. The coefficient for the derivative component is zero (0) unless otherwise indicated. D. All HVAC system controls shall be designed such that simultaneous heating and cooling, reheating, and recooling are minimized. This applies as well to non - mechanical treatment of mixed air (e.g. outside air, heat recovery, etc.) which must then be mechanically reheated or recooled. E. Alarms: Except as directed otherwise by the Owner, all alarms will be registered at the building 1 operator's terminal as well as at the Maintenance Building remote operator's station. Alarms are to be registered with a message explaining the nature of the alarm and which building /location the alarm is in. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -22 Printed 07/27/04 .' SECTION 15900 CONTROLS F. Whenever a setpoint is referred to as "adjustable" in these standards, the setpoint is to be easily I and directly adjustable at the operator's terminal and Maintenance Building remote operator's station, and is not to require any code modification. This may require assigning virtual points to all adjustable setpoints. Frequently adjusted points, including space temperature setpoints, shall be adjustable from the graphics screen (e.g., floor plan screen). I G. There are many interlocks and limits within each control loop or algorithm that may not be obvious or stated in this specification. The Control Contractor is responsible for identifying and programming these interlocks and limits into the software. The CO Demand Ventilation Control I algorithm is a good example of the complexity of the control loop with interlocks and limits. . The Control Contractor will replace any and all equipment (actuators, chillers, etc) that fail due to programming errors. Such errors include, but are not limited too: moving actuators a couple I fractions of a degree every second or so in response to some infinitesimal change in a measured variable or repeatedly turning equipment on/off within a short time period. The Control Contractor will avoid these problems by incorporating time delays, dead bands, and other programming techniques into the sequence of operation. I I. Programmable time -of -day (start/stop) control shall be implemented for all HVAC equipment, except for: 1. equipment that is interlocked with other equipment under direct start/stop control (e.g. 1' exhaust fans interlocked with an -air handling unit) 2. equipment that must run continuously for reasons of safety 3. as otherwise noted in these standards J. Auto- tuning algorithms will not be used to initially tune control loops. II • - - 6.05 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION 01 A. This specification is intended to refine or elaborate on the sequence of operations provided by the Engineer. Note: there are many issues that may make any of these standard sequences inapplicable to a specific situation: thus, the Control Contractor should obtain written approval by the Engineer to implement the sequence of operations contained in this specification. I B. The Control Contractor shall adhere to all applicable specifications, unless they submit written exceptions to. the Owner and Engineer and such exceptions are approved in writing. Written exceptions shall state the specification's sequence of operations, the Control Contractor's I proposed sequence of operations, and the reasons why the proposed sequence specifications are preferable to the sequences in this specification or those provided by the Engineer. C. It is the Control Contractor's responsibility to improve upon these specified sequences of I operations if necessary. All improvements will be provided in writing to the Engineer for his /her written approval. D. The Control Contractor is responsible for accurately controlling and communicating with all 1 packaged fan units or air handling units. 6.06 PACKAGE EQUIPMENT OPERATION I A. Rooftop Cooling / Heating Non -VAV Units: 1. Sequence of Operation for Gas Pack Control: 1 1 1 11 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900-23 Printed 07/27/04 • • • SECTION 15900 CONTROLS a. Package roof mounted heating and cooling unit with gas heat system or heat pumps to be enabled and disabled by DDC BAS time signal. b. On a signal to enable unit to operate under package controls (operate fans, heating and ventilation) based on space sensor signal. c. Fan status, space temperature, and discharge air temp to be reported to DDC • system for remote monitoring and adjustment. d. Space temperature to be set at 72 degrees F heating (adjustable) and 75 degrees • F cooling (adjustable). Economizer to act as first stage of cooling where applicable. e. Space exhaust fan(s) to operate when rooftop unit starts. f. Provide economizer with CO2 sensor to control as follows: i. On CO2levels below 1000 PPM minimum OSA damper position to be at 10% (adjustable). ii. On signal of CO2 levels above 1000 PPM open economizer damper to 100% position until CO2 level drops below 1000 PPM. iii. Standard economizer function to operate under 1000 PPM operation. iv. Carrier, Micro Metl Discover, or Approved Equal. g. • For unit serving multiple spaces with multiple thermostats, control unit to satisfy greatest deviation from setpoint. As ,an example, if cooling setpoint is 75° F, one space is 77° F and one space is at 74° F, operate in cooling mode. 6.07 DIAGNOSTICS A. In addition to the standard alarm limits specified for all sensed points, BAS shall provide the following diagnostics for each AH and VAV terminal box. B.. While heating valve is closed, if the temperature increase across the heating coil exceeds 2 °F - continuously for 30 minutes, or the discharge air temperature is more than 5 °F above setpoint for more than 30 minutes continuously, then send the following level 4 alarm: ,41 "Energy waste: An unexpected temperature rise is occurring across the heating coil at (AH /zone name). Please check for leaking valve or faulty controls" C. While cooling valve is closed, if the temperature decrease across the cooling coil exceeds 2 °F continuously for 30 minutes, or the discharge air temperature is more than 5 °F below setpoint for more than 30 minutes continuously, then send the following level 4 alarm: "Energy waste: An unexpected temperature drop is occurring across the cooling coil at (AH/zone name). Please check for leaking valve or faulty controls" D. A level 4 alarm message should be sent if: The mixed air temperature is less than 55 °F or greater than 80 °F Level 4 alarm message is "Energy waste: An unexpected mixed air temperature at (AH). indicates a possible problem with the economizer damper controls. Please check for faulty • dampers or controls" E. A level 4 alarm message should be sent if: The mixed air temperature, discharge air temperature, and the outside air temperature are not equal when the system is operating at 100% outside air and the heating and cooling valve coils have been fully closed for at least two hours (adjustable). Note: Include in comparison the temperature difference caused by fan energy as it relates to discharge air temperature. If differential between sensors is greater than 0.3 °F, then send alarm. Level 4 alarm message is "Mixed air temperature, discharge air temperature, and the outside air 111 temperature are out of calibration at (AH)." F. A level 4 alarm message should be sent if: Any equipment operates for 24 consecutive hours. Level 4 alarm message is "The has operated 24 consecutive hours. Check software and manual overrides." 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -24 P rinted 07/27/04 1 • SECTION 15900 I CONTROLS G. A level 4 alarm message should be sent if: Any VFD controlled motor operates at full speed for I 24 consecutive hours. Level 4 alarm message is "The motor has operated 24 consecutive hours at full speed. Check software and manual overrides'" . I H. A level 4 alarm message should be sent if: The temperature difference between the refrigerant supply and return is greater than 8 °F (set value using manufacturer documentation). I I. Level 4 alarm message is "The refrigerant charge should be check to help avoid compressor failure or lost efficiency." PART 7 - SYSTEM COMMISSIONING AND TRAINING 1 Air and water balancing shall be completed (and discrepancies resolved) before Control Contractor's final system check and before the acceptance test to be conducted in the presence of the Engineer. I 7.01 PRE- COMMISSIONING TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND CALIBRATION REQUIREMENTS A. • Prior to acceptance, the following steps will be used by the Control Contractor to produce a testing 11 and pre - commissioning report by system to be submitted for approval by the Engineer or Owner. B. Work and/or systems installed under this section shall be fully functioning prior to Demonstration, Acceptance Period and Contract Close Out. Control Contractor shall start, test, adjust, and I calibrate all work and/or systems under this contract, as described below: 1. Verify proper electrical voltages and amperages, and verify all circuits are free from grounds or faults. - 2. Verify integrity /safety of all electrical connections. 3. Verify proper interface with fire alarm system. 4. Coordinate with TAB subcontractor to obtain control settings that are determined from balancing procedures. Record the following control settings as obtained from TAB contractor (and note any TAB deficiencies): • 1 Minimum outside air damper settings for air handling units and CFM values. 5. Test, calibrate, and set all digital and analog sensing, and actuating devices. a. Calibrate each instrumentation device by making a comparison between the DDC display and the reading at the device, using a standard traceable to the I National Bureau of Standards, which shall be at least twice as accurate as the device to be calibrated (e.g., if field device is +/ -0.5% accurate, test equipment • shall be +/- 0.25% accurate over same range). Record the measured value and displayed value for each device in the Pre- Commissioning Report. I b. All analog input points are to be tested by comparing the reading obtained through the workstation and through an independent reading device (meter). c. - Check- each- analogue - output by making - a- comparison between the control. command at the DDC controller and the status of the controlled device. Check I each output point by making a comparison of the state of the sensing device and the Host computer display. Record the results for each device in the Pre - Commissioning Report. • 1) All analog output points are to be tested using a command from the • I workstation modulating the output in 10% increments and recording the associated voltage /amps sent to the controlled device. 6. Check each digital input/output point by making a comparison between the control command at the DDC controller and the status of the controlled device. Check each I digital point by making a comparison of the state of the sensing /control device and the Host computer display. Record the results for each device in the Pre - Commissioning Report. a. ON /OFF commands from the workstation should be performed in order to verify 1 its true operation. • 1 t ' 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC - JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -25 Printed 07 /27/04 • 1 SECTION 15900 CONTROLS I 7. Check and set zero and span adjustments for all actuating devices. Manually activate damper and valve operators to verify free travel and fail condition. Check valve or I damper to insure that•it shuts off tight when the appropriate signal is applied to the operator. Adjust the operator spring compression as required. If positioner or volume booster is installed on the operator, calibrate per manufacturer's procedure to achieve spring range indicated. Check split range positioner to verify proper operation. Record I settings for each device in the Pre - Commissioning Report. 8. Verify proper sequences of operation. Record results and submit with Pre- , Commissioning Report. Verify proper sequence and operation of all specified functions by adjusting input variable to determine if sequence of operation is operating as specified. I 9. Tune all control loops to obtain the fastest stable response without hunting, offset or overshoot. Record tuning parameters and response test results for each control loop in the Pre - Commissioning Report. Except from a startup, maximum allowable variance from set point for controlled variables shall be as follows: I a. Air temperature: ± 0.5 degrees F b. Water temperature: ± 1 degrees F c. Duct pressure: ± 0.05 inches we C. Pre - Commissioning Testing, Adjusting, and Calibration shall be completed prior to Substantial I Completion. D. Provide Pre- Commissioning Test Report for approval by the Engineer and Owner before system demonstration. 1 7.02 DEMONSTRATION A. Prior to acceptance, the control system shall undergo a series of performance tests to verify operation and compliance with this specification. These tests shall occur after the Control Contractor has completed the.installation, started up the system, and performed its own tests - (outlined in 7.2 and to be submitted in writing). B. The tests described in this section are to be performed in addition to the tests that the Control 10 Contractor performs as a necessary part of the installation, startup, and debugging process. The Engineer will be present to observe and review these.tests. The Engineer shall be notified at least 10 days in advance of the start of the testing procedures. C. Demonstration shall not be scheduled until all hardware and software submittals, and the. Pre - Commissioning Test Report are approved by the Engineer. D. Verifying compliance of equipment operation and sequence of operation with this specification I through all modes of operation. 1.. If more than 10 percent of the demonstrated equipment operation and sequence of operation fails to operate per the submittals, the demonstration test will be rescheduled after the control contractor takes corrective action. 2. If the Control Contractor fails to demonstrate proper equipment operation and sequence of operation in the second round of tests, the Engineer's costs for witnessing all further I demonstration may be assigned to the Control Contractor by the Owner as a deduct to their contracted price. Note: The Control Contractor will not be responsible for costs related to poor design or to other factors beyond their control, though it is expected to call any design concerns and other factors beyond their control that might cause system • failure to the attention of the Engineer and the Owner. E. Programming changes for correction of improperly programmed sequences will not be considered legitimate reasons for change orders. I F. Demonstration /Commissioning Software: 1 • 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -26 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15900 I ' CONTROLS 1. Provide fully licensed copy of the required BAS workstation graphic software to be used by the Engineer on a remote computer (not included in contract) for accessing the BAS network via modem. This software copy shall be used only for the purpose of commissioning this project. The Owner agrees that the commissioning BAS software license shall become null and void upon termination of the Contract Warranty Period. I The software shall be returned to the Control Contractor within one year after system acceptance. . Software shall be fully configured to view project specific database and shall include trend logs, specified graphic screens, alarms, and reports. I 3. Provide assistance by telephone upon request if required to assist Engineer in setting up software on Engineer `s remote computer. 4. Submit one complete set of programming and operating manuals for all graphics software packages concurrently with the commissioning software. This set will be returned to the 1 Control Contractor within one year after system acceptance. G. The Control Contractor shall provide at least two persons equipped with two -way communication, and shall demonstrate actual field operation of each controlled and sensing point for all modes of I operation including day, night, occupied, unoccupied, fire /smoke alarm, seasonal changeover, and power failure modes. The purpose is to demonstrate the calibration, response, and action of every point and system. Any test equipment required to prove the proper operation shall be provided by and operated by the Control Contractor. 1 H. As each control input and output is checked, a log shall be completed showing the date, • technician's and Engineer's initials, and any corrective action taken or needed. I. The system shall be demonstrated following the same procedures used in Pre - Commissioning i (Section 7.2) J. - - Demonstrate that all points specified and shown'can be interrogated and/or commanded (as Pi applicable) from all workstations. K. At a minimum, demonstrate correct calibration of input/output devices using the same methods specified for the pre - commissioning tests. A maximum of [10] percent of I/O points shall be selected at random by Engineer for demonstration. Upon failure of any device to meet the - 1 specified accuracy, an additional [ 10] percent of I/O points shall be selected at random by Engineer for demonstration. This process shall be repeated until 100 percent of randomly selected I/O points have been demonstrated to meet specified accuracy. I L. The Contractor shall demonstrate that the panels' response to LAN communication failures meet the requirements of these Specifications. M. Demonstrate that required trend graphs and trend logs are set up per the requirements. Provide a I sample of the data archive. Indicate the file names and locations. N - Demonstrate successful communication of point v between the BAS and other HVAC equipment (e.g., rooftop unit). I O. Demonstrate complete operation of Operator Interface such as graphic screens, trend logs, alarms, etc. 1 P. Additionally, the following items shall be demonstrated: 1. DDC Loop Response. The Control Contractor shall supply trend data output in a graphical form showing the step response of each DDC loop. The test shall show the I loop's response to a change in set point that represents a change of actuator position of at least 25% of its full range. The sampling rate of the trend shall be from 1 second to 3 minutes, depending on the speed of the loop. The trend data shall show for each sample the set point, actuator position, and controlled variable values (e.g., VFD frequency or I Amperage). Any loop that yields unreasonably under - damped or over - damped control • shall require further tuning by the Control Contractor. 2. Optimum Start/Stop. The Control Contractor shall supply a trend data output showing the capability of the algorithm. The 5 minute trends shall include the operating status of I all optimally started and stopped equipment, as well as temperature sensor inputs of affected areas. ,I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL – T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD – TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -27 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15900 CONTROLS 1 3. Operational logs for each system that indicate all set points, operating points, valve positions, mode, and equipment status shall be submitted to the Engineer. These logs shall cover three 48 -hour periods and have a sample frequency of not more than 10 minutes. The logs shall be provided in both printed and disk formats. 4. The DDC and HVAC systems will be shut down for 15 minutes and then re- started. Within 15 minutes, the DDC system shall start and obtain stable control of the HVAC I systems without safety trips, alarms, or excessive deviations in temperature and pressure (as defined by the Engineer). Q. System acceptance shall occur within 120 days of substantial. completion. Any delay beyond this I period of time shall initiate liquidated dampers unless waived by owner. Failure or delays on engineers / owners part shall not be included in 120 day count. • 7.03 ACCEPTANCE I • A. All tests described in this specification shall have been performed to the satisfaction of both the Engineer and Owner prior to the acceptance of the control system as meeting the requirements of this document. B. The system shall not be accepted until all forms and checklists completed as part of the I demonstration are submitted and approved. C. The warranty period starts when the engineering accepts the system and provides this acceptance in written from the Owner and the Control Contractor. I • D. Any tests that cannot be performed due to circumstances beyond the control. of the Control Contractor may be exempt from the Completion requirements if stated as such in writing by the - Engineer. The Owner shall then perform such tests no later than 3 months after the building is occupied. The costs for these additional tests will be incurred by the Control Contractor. ,41 7.04 SPARE PARTS A. The Control Contractor shall provide two spare fuses of the correct size and capacity for each I fuseholder located in all the installed control systems and the Control Contractor's related equipment. B. The Control Contractor shall provide two spare pilot lights for each control unit that contains one I • or more pilot lights. 7.05 TRAINING A. Provide a minimum of four separate 4 -hour on -site training sessions after system acceptance and at the owner's request. The initial training session will occur after the as -built drawings and in submittals have been provided and the Engineer has accepted the system. The other training sessions will occur up to 12 months after the first training session and at the owner's request. B. Training shall be a mix of classroom instruction, test exercises, and actual keyboard entry and I • screen viewing at the operator's terminal. Hands -on experience and problem solving shall be emphasized. C. If during any training session, the trainer debugs more than two (2) items, the training session will be immediately terminated. The session will be rescheduled for another date. The re- scheduled training session will be carried out for the full four hours at no additional cost to the Owner. D. The first training shall be oriented to making the owner self sufficient in the day to day use and .' operation of the DDC system. Additionally, the training shall include: 1. System start -up, shutdowns, power outage and restart routines, alarms, security levels, changing setpoints, changing schedules and other parameters, overrides, freeze protection, manual operation, return to automatic operation, and resetting equipment. 1 2. All screens shall be discussed (allow time for questions). 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -28 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15900 CONTROLS 3. Information specifically focused on showing the owner methods of troubleshooting the I mechanical systems using the BAS. 4. Use of laptop and hand -held operator interface device. 5. Creating, modifying, viewing, downloading, and reloading, trend logs. School District staff shall set up at least six trends during training. 6. Remote access to the system via Web, network, and /or phone lines. E. The other training sessions shall be oriented toward answering specific questions from School g P District staff. F. The trainer must be well grounded in both DDC system operation and in mechanical systems service and should be the programmer. G. The owner may specify another site for training if desired. H. Factory Training: Provide training at a Manufacturer's Factory Training Center on the operation of the system for two School District staff. Minimum 4 days of training. Control Contractor shall pay travel, lodging and meal costs, and registrations fees. I.. Factory training shall include, at a minimum: 1. Creating and modifying the sequence of operation. 2. Generating graphics. 3. Field programming (with hand -held interface). END OF SECTION • O 1 1 1 1 1 1 • 1 II • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15900 -29 Printed 07/27/04 SECTION 15990 1 �, TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION � A. Work Included: After completion of the work of installation, test and regulate all components of the new heating, air conditioning and ventilating systems to verify air volumes and heating- cooling • flow rates indicated on the Drawings. B. Balancing Organization: 1. Balancing of the Heating and Air Conditioning Systems: Performed by a firm providing this service established in the State of Oregon. 2. Balancing Organization: Approval by'Architect. Air Balancing Specialties, Neudorfer Engineers, Northwest Engineering Services, or approved. 3. Provide all necessary personnel, equipment, and services. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Balancing of the Heating and Air Conditioning Systems: Agency shall be a current member of NEBB or AABC specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems specified with a minimum of 10 years documented experience. B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing shall be performed under direct field supervision of a Certified NEBB Supervisor or a Certified AABC Supervisor. 1.03 SUBMITTALS A. See Section 01300, Administrative Requirements, for submittal procedures. Pi B. Submit name of adjusting and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract. - C. Field Reports: Indicate deficiencies in systems that would prevent proper testing, adjusting, and balancing of systems and equipment to achieve specified performance. 1. Submit under provisions of Section 15050. 2. Prior to commencing work, submit report forms or outlines indicating adjusting, balancing, and equipment data required. 3. Submit draft copies of report for review prior to final acceptance of Project. Provide final copies for Architect and for inclusion in operating and maintenance manuals. 4. Provide reports in soft cover, letter size, 3 -ring binder manuals, complete with index page I and indexing tabs, with cover identification at front and side. Include set of reduced drawings with air outlets and equipment identified to correspond with data sheets, and indicating thermostat locations. 5. Include detailed procedures, agenda, sample report forms, and copy of AABC National I Project Performance Guaranty or other certifying agency prior to commencing system balance. 6. Test Reports: Indicate data on AABC MN -1 forms, forms prepared following ASHRAE 111, NEBB forms, or forms containing information indicated in Schedules. 7. Include the following on the title page of each report: a. Name of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency. b. Address of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency. c. Telephone number of testing, adjusting, and balancing agency. d. Project name. e. Project location. f. Project Architect and Owner. • g. Project Engineer. h. Project Contractor. i. Project altitude. J. Report date. I D. Project Record Documents: Record actual locations of flow measuring stations and balancing valves and rough setting. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15990 -1 P.,....l (Y7/)7/04 • 1 SECTION 15990 • TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING • E. Provide a list of equipment, air supply, return and exhaust, heating water, and chilled water systems not in compliance with tolerances subsequently specified. PART 2 - PRODUCTS NOT USED PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 EXAMINATION • 1 A. Verify that systems are complete and operable before commencing work. Ensure the following ' conditions: 1. Systems are started and operating in a safe and normal condition. 2. Temperature control systems are installed complete and operable. 3. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment. 4. Final filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media in addition to final filters. 5. Duct systems are clean of debris. 6. Fans are rotating correctly. 7. Fire and volume dampers are in place and open. 8. Air coil fins are cleaned and combed. 9. Access doors are closed and duct end caps are in place. 10. Air outlets are installed and connected. = 11. Duct system leakage is minimized. 12. Hydronic systems are flushed, filled, and vented. ill 13. Pumps are rotating correctly. 14. Proper strainer baskets are clean and in place. 15. Service and balance valves are open. B. Submit field reports. Report defects and deficiencies noted during performance of services which + prevent system balance. C. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions. 1 3.02 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES A. Air Handling Systems: Adjust to within plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent of design for supply systems and +/- 10 percent of design for return and exhaust systems. B. Air Outlets and Inlets: Adjust total to within plus 10 percent or minus 5 percent of design to space. Adjust outlets and inlets in space to within +/- 10 percent of design. C. Hydronic Systems: Adjust to within +/- 10 percent of design. 3.03 ADJUSTING i. A. Ensure recorded data represents actual measured or observed conditions. B. Permanently mark settings of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops. C. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that such disruption has been rectified. D. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors, closing doors to electrical switch boxes, and restoring thermostats to specified settings. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15990 -2 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 15990 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING E. At final inspection, recheck random selections of data recorded in report. Recheck points or areas I as selected and witnessed by the Owner. 3.04 AIR SYSTEM PROCEDURE A. Adjust air handling and distribution systems to provide required or design supply, return, and exhaust air quantities. B. Make air quantity measurements in ducts by Pitot tube traverse of entire cross sectional area of I duct. C. Measure air quantities at air inlets and outlets. D. Adjust noise distribution system to obtain uniform space temperatures free from objectionable li.' drafts and noise. E. Use volume control devices to regulate air quantities only to the extent that adjustments do not create objectionable air motion or sound levels. Effect volume control by duct internal devices such as dampers and splitters. F. Vary total system air quantities by adjustment of fan speeds. Provide drive changes required. Vary branch air quantities by damper regulation. t • G. Provide system schematic with required and actual air quantities recorded at each outlet or inlet. H. Measure static air pressure conditions on air supply units, including filter and coil pressure drops, I and total pressure across the fan. Make allowances for 50 percent loading of filters. • I. • Adjust outside air automatic dampers; outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers for design 01 conditions. J. Measure temperature conditions across outside air, return air, and exhaust dampers to check leakage. 1 K. Where modulating dampers are provided, take measurements and balance at extreme conditions. Balance variable volume systems at maximum air flow rate, full cooling, and at minimum air flow rate, full heating. I L. Measure building static pressure and adjust supply, return, and exhaust air systems to provide required relationship between each to maintain approximately 0.05" (12.5 Pa) positive static pressure near the building entries. I M. For variable air volume system powered units, set volume controller to air flow setting indicated. Confirm connections are properly made and confirm proper operating for automatic variable air volume control Adjust drives to maximum for Allow VFD to regulate airflow per specification. Ig■ 3.05 WATER SYSTEM PROCEDURE • A. Adjust water systems to provide required or design quantities. Coordinate with control contractor to determine pressure setpoint for new differential pressure sensor in new construction. ' B. Use calibrated Venturi tubes, orifices, or other metered fittings and pressure gauges to determine flow rates for system balance. Where flow metering devices are not installed, base flow balance I on temperature difference across various heat transfer elements in the system. C. Adjust systems to provide specified pressure drops and flows through heat transfer elements prior to thermal testing. Perform balancing by measurement of temperature differential in conjunction with air balancing. D. Effect system balance with automatic control valves fully open to heat transfer elements. I E. Effect adjustment of water distribution systems by means of balancing cocks, valves, and fittings. Do not use service or shut -off valves for balancing unless indexed for balance point. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15990 -3 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING ;Il F. Where available pump capacity is less than total flow requirements or individual system parts, full flow in one part may be simulated by temporary restriction of flow to other parts. 3.06 SCHEDULES A. Equipment Requiring Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing: 1. Plumbing pumps s P 2. HVAC pumps 3. Forced air furnaces • ,� 4. Air cooled water chillers 5. Packaged rooftop heating /cooling units - 6. Air coils 7. Air handling units 8. Fans ,11 9. Air filters • 10. Air terminal units 11. Air inlets and outlets B. Report: 1. Summary Comments: a. Design versus final performance ?� b. Notable characteristics of system c. Description of systems operation sequence d. Summary of outdoor and exhaust flows to indicate amount of building pressurization e. Nomenclature used throughout report - - f. Test conditions • _ -- 2. Instrument List: _ - a. Instrument b. Manufacturer c. Model number d. Serial number e. Range f. • Calibration date C. Electric Motors: 1. Manufacturer 2. Model /frame 3. HP /BHP 4. Phase, voltage, amperage; nameplate, actual, no load 5. RPM - - 6- Service factor ... 7. Starter size, rating, heater elements 8. Sheave make /size /model D. V -Belt Drives: 1. Identification/location 2. Required driven RPM 3. Driven sheave, diameter, and RPM 4. Belt, size, and quantity 5. Motor sheave diameter and RPM 6. Center to center distance, maximum, minimum, and tested E. Refrigerant Cooling Coils: 1. Identification /number 111, 2. Location 3. Service 4. Manufacturer 5. Air flow, design and actual 6. Entering air DB temperature, design and tested 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15990 -4 Printed 07/27/04 1 • SECTION 15990 • TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 7. Entering air WB temperature, design and tested 8. Leaving air DB temperature, design and tested 9. Leaving air WB temperature, design and tested 10. Air pressure drop, design and tested 11. Saturated suction temperature, design and tested 1 G. Heating Coils: 1. Identification/number 2. Location 3. Service . 4. Manufacturer 5. Air flow, design and tested 6. Water flow, design and tested • ti 7. Water pressure drop, design and tested 8. Entering water temperature, design and tested . 9. Leaving water temperature, design and tested 10: Entering air temperature, design and tested 11. Leaving air temperature, design and tested . 12. Air pressure drop, design and tested H. Air Moving Equipment: 1. Location • 2. Manufacturer 3. Model number 4. Serial number S. Arrangement/Class /Discharge • 6. Air flow, specified and tested 01 7. Return air flow, specified and tested 8. Outside air flow, specified and tested 9. Total static pressure (total external), specified and tested 10. Inlet pressure 11. Discharge pressure . 12. Sheave make /size /bore 13. Number of Belts/Make /Size 14. Fan RPM • I. Return Air /Outside Air: 1. Identification/location 2. Supply air flow, design and tested 3. Return air flow, design and tested 4. Outside air flow, design and tested - 5. Return - air - temperature . 6. Outside air temperature 7. Mixed air temperature, design and tested J. Duct Traverses: 1. System zone/branch 2. Duct size 3. Area 4. Design velocity I 5. Design air flow 6. Test velocity 7. Test air flow 8. Duct static pressure I 9. Air temperature 10. Air correction factor K. Terminal Unit Data: 1. Manufacturer I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15990 -5 Prrinwd 07/27/04 • SECTION 15990 TESTING, ADJUSTING AND BALANCING 1 2. Type, constant, variable, single, dual duct 3. Identification/number 4. Location 5. Model number • 6. Size 7. Minimum static pressure 8. Minimum air flow, design and tested 9. Maximum air flow, design and tested 10. Inlet static pressure, design and tested • L. Air Distribution Tests: 1. Air terminal number 2. Room number/location 3. Terminal type 4. Terminal size 5. Area factor 6. Design velocity 7. Design air flow 8. Test (final) velocity 9. Test (final) air flow 10. Percent of design air flow 3.07 DETAILED REQUIREMENTS A. Adjusting and Balancing: • 1. Adjust and balance all portions of the mechanical systems to produce indicated results �1 • . - - within limits of minus 5 or plus 10 percent or as subsequently directed by the Architect. 2. Balancing data may be spot checked with instruments similar to that used by the balancing firm. 3. If, in the judgment of the Architect, the discrepancies warrant additional adjustment, readjust and rebalance the systems at no additional project cost. END OF SECTION • 1 • 1 . 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC 1 JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15990 -6 v.P l mnYrnn SECTION 16050 • BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 11 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Drawings and g eneral provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. B. The provisions of the General Requirements, Supplementary Requirements, and Division 1 apply to the electrical work specified in this Section. C. The requirements of this Section apply to the electrical systems specified in these Specifications and in other Division 16 sections. D. Provide all items, articles, materials, equipment, operations and /or methods listed, mentioned, shown and /or scheduled on the Drawings and/or in these Specifications, including all labor, supervision, services, permits, fees, and incidentals necessary and required to provide a complete and operable facility with complete systems as shown, specified, and required by applicable codes: 1 E. The work shall include, but not be limited to, the following systems: 1. Complete lighting and power systems, including branch circuits, devices, lighting fixtures, etc. 1.11 2. Extension of existing fire alarm system. • 3. Connection of electrical equipment furnished under other Divisions of this Specification. 1 4. Wiring to and connection of electrical equipment or appliances furnished outside of these Specifications and Contract but described on the Electrical Drawings. ■ 5. Special systems as specified herein. . 6. Grounding. • Oil • 7. Rough -in provisions for data, telephone, and CATV systems. 8. Extension of existing intercom/paging system. F. Advise subcontractor, suppliers, and vendors involved in the work specified in this Section of the applicable requirements. I , . G. Temporary electrical service, Division 1. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE 1 A. All work and materials shall conform to all applicable local and state codes and all federal, state and other applicable laws and regulations. All clarifications and modifications which have been cleared with appropriate authorities are listed under the applicable sections. All electrical products shall bear the UL label. B. Wheneverfife requirements of the Specifications or Drawings exceed those of the applicable code or standard, the requirements of the Specifications and Drawings shall govern. ,� C. Codes and Standards: Comply with the current provisions of the following referenced codes, standards and specifications: 1. Institute of Electrical and Electronic Engineers (IEEE) 2. Federal Specifications (FS) I. 3. American National Standards Institute (ANSI) 4. National Electrical Manufacturer's Association (NEMA) 5. National Fire Protection Association (NFPA) 6. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) 7. Factory Mutual (FM) • 8. Uniform Building Code (UBC) with State and Local Amendments • 9. National Electrical Code (NEC) with State and Local Amendments ,,I 10. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) 11. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) 12. Uniform Fire Code (UFC) with State and Local Amendments 13. National Electrical Contractors Association (NECA) 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -1 Printed 07/27/04 1 • SECTION 16050 • BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS \1 D. Each piece of equipment furnished shall meet all detailed requirements of the Drawings and Specifications and shall be suitable for the installation shown. Equipment not meeting all requirements will not be acceptable, even though specified by name. Where two or more units of the same class of equipment are furnished, use product of the same manufacturer; component parts of the entire system need not be products of same manufacturer. Furnish all materials and equipment, new and free from defect and of size, make, type and quality herein specified or • approved by the Architect. All materials shall be installed in a neat and professional manner. E. All apparatus shall be built and installed to deliver its full rated capacity at the efficiency for which it was designed. F. The Drawings and Specifications are complementary. What is called for by one shall be as though called for by both. 1.03 WORK OF OTHER CONTRACTS A. Work under this contract shall be conducted in a manner to allow for the future installations of such equipment or items, and include the wiring and /or devices shown on the Drawings or listed in other sections of this Specification. Also see "Equipment Connections." 1 L04 WORK OF OTHER DIVISIONS A. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with the installation of such equipment or items as specified in other Divisions. B. Control devices and control wiring relating to the heating and air conditioning systems are specified under other Sections of these Specifications except for provisions or items specifically noted on the Drawings or specified herein. • C. Consult all Drawings and Specifications in this project and become familiar with all equipment to be installed. Coordinate all aspects of the construction with the other trades on the job to ensure that all work and materials required to provide a complete and operational facility are included in the bid. D. All sections of Division 16 are interrelated and shall be considered in their entirety when interpreting any material, method, or direction listed in any section of Division 16. Individual sections are not written for specific subcontractors or suppliers but for the general contractor. 1.05 SHOP DRAWINGS, PRODUCT DATA, AND SAMPLES A. Submit in accordance with Division 1 full technical and descriptive shop drawing data on proposed materials and equipment as detailed in each section. B. The Contractor shall verify that all equipment submitted can be delivered and installed within the _ —. time constraints ofthe construction period. — -- C. Include the manufacturer, type, style, catalog number, complete specification, certified dimensions, and description of physical appearance for each item and option submitted. Reproduction of catalog data sheets shall be clean and legible to show all details, including gauge of metal used. D. Include only information on exact equipment to be installed, not general catalogs of the manufacturer. Where sheets show proposed equipment as well as other equipment, identify proposed equipment with rubber stamp arrow or similar concise method. E. Submit with each copy a transmittal letter verifying that all included equipment submittals have been carefully considered for quality, dimensions, function, and have been coordinated with the Drawings and Specifications. Guarantee that proposed materials will meet or exceed the quality and function of those specified. F. Include wire run and connection diagrams for all signal and /or low voltage systems, including floor plans. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -2 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 16050 I BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS • G. Submittal Review: The submittal review process is a means to determine quality control. The action noted to be taken (or where conflicts with the contract documents are not noted) shall not be interpreted by the Contractor as automatic "change orders." Approval of the data for substitution and shop drawings shall not eliminate the contractor's responsibility for compliance with Drawings or Specifications, nor shall it eliminate the responsibility for freedom from errors of any sort in the data discovered prior to or after the review process. Deviations, discrepancies, and conflicts between the submittals and the Contract Documents shall be called to the Architect's attention in writing at the time of transmittal of the data. H. Unless otherwise directed by Division 1, submittal data shall be in a 3 -ring plastic .binder with a I clear plastic sleeve and a project identification sheet inserted. Arrange submittals numerically with specification sections identified on divider tabs. All required sections shall be submitted at one time. 1.06 PRODUCT SUBSTITUTION - A. Unless otherwise note, material other than those specified may be approved for this project providing a written request is submitted to the Architect prior to bid in accordance with Instructions to Bidders. Requests shall include complete specifications, dimensions, manufacturer II and catalog number for each item for which approval is desired. If, in the opinion of the Architect, the material is not complete or if it is not an acceptable substitute, he may reject it. The Architect's • evaluation will be based solely on the material submitted. ' 1.07 CHANGE ORDERS . A. All supplemental cost proposals by the Contractor shall be accompanied by a complete itemized breakdown of labor and materials without exception. At the Architect's request, the contractor's estimating sheets for the supplemental cost proposals shall be made available to the Architect. _Labor must be separated and allocated for each item of work. PI 1.08 RECORD DOCUMENTS A. Maintain a set of record drawings as directed in Division 1. B. Keep Drawings clean, undamaged, and up to date. C. Record and accurately indicate the following: 1. Depths, sizes, and locations of all buried and concealed conduits /cables. 2. Changes, additions, and revisions due to change orders, addenda, obstructions, etc. :11 Eradicate extraneous information. • D. Make Drawings available when requested by Architect for review. 1 E. Submit as part of the required Project Closeout documents as indicated in Division 1. F. Use standards set in contract documents. Note field modifications, all addenda and change order items on project record drawings. If deficiencies are found in either the quality or the accuracy of the drawings, they will be returned unapproved. Additional review of subsequent submissions li shall be at the contractor's expense. 1.09 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE DATA A. Upon completion of Contract and after no further action is noted as being required on catalog data submitted for review, submit multiple sets of Operating and Maintenance Manuals for inclusion in - Owner's Maintenance Brochure as specified in Division 1. Operation and maintenance manuals shall include descriptive and technical data, maintenance and operation procedures, wiring diagrams, spare parts Lists, service representatives, supplier for replacement parts, etc. Bind each set of Operating and Maintenance Manuals in 3 -ring, vinyl or canvas covered, loose leaf binders organized with index and thumb -tab marker for each classification of equipment or data. 1 /� 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -3 Pr inted 07/27/04 • 1 SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1 1.10 OPERATING AND MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS A. At the completion of the project, at a time scheduled by the Owner, assemble key mechanics, subcontractors, vendors, factory representatives and similar personnel required to explain all facets of maintenance and operation of the installed system to the Owner's personnel. Instructions shall include actual operation of systems and methods of maintenance. 1.11 ALTERNATE BIDS A. Refer to Division 1 for possible effect upon Work of this Division. • - 1.12 WARRANTY A. Furnish, prior to application for final payment, three copies of written and signed guarantee effective a period of one year from date of completion and acceptance of entire project; agree to correct, repair and/or replace defective materials and/or equipment or the results of defective workmanship without additional expense to the Owner. Where no response satisfactory to the Owner has occurred within three working days from the written report of a warranty covered defect, the contractor shall agree to pay for the cost of repair of the reported defect by a contractor of the Owner's choice. • B. Where the manufacturer's guarantee exceeds one year, the longer guarantee shall govern and include the Contractor's labor. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 MATERIALS 1 A. All electrical products installed in this project shall be listed by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or be approved in writing by the local inspection authority as required by governing codes and ordinances. B. All material shall be new and bear manufacturer's name, model number, electrical characteristics and other identification, and shall be the standard product of manufacturer regularly engaged in production of similar material. C. All materials shall be of manufacturer's latest design, and of the best quality. The materials shall be manufactured in accordance with applicable standards listed under Quality Assurance. 2.02 ACCESS PANELS A. Provide panels of adequate size for equipment requiring service and installed above plaster or gypsum board ceilings, behind walls or in furring. Furnish complete with correct frame for type of • building construction.mvolved7Size, number and location of access panels is not necessarily shown on Drawings. Use no panel smaller than 12" x 12" for simple manual access, nor smaller than 16" x 20" where personnel must pass through. Milcor Style A, K, L, or M panels or equivalent Bilco or Potter - Roemer as required by construction. Access panels shall maintain ceiling fire rating. 2.03 PAINTING A. The work of this Division includes painting of the electrical items. All exposed conduits, boxes, surface raceways, etc. shall be painted per the Architect's direction. See Division 9 for additional painting requirements. 2.04 FIRE RATINGS • A. Electrical items (light fixtures, boxes, etc.) recessed into fire rated walls or ceilings shall be alcoved in gypboard enclosures or be UL listed to maintain the fire rating. 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -4 Printed 07/27/04 :1 • SECTION 16050 .BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS PART 3 - EXECUTION f 3.01 LAYOUT AND COORDINATION A. The Contractor shall inspect the job site prior to bidding and become familiar with existing conditions which'will affect his work. The Drawings are diagrammatic indicating approximate location of outlets, lighting fixtures, electrical equipment, etc. Consult the Architectural, Structural and Mechanical Drawings to avoid conflicts with equipment, structural members, etc. When • required, make all deviations from Drawings to make the work conform to the building as constructed, and to related work of others. Minor relocations ordered prior to installation may be III made without added cost to the Owner. B. Obvious omissions from Drawings or Specifications or differences between Drawings and Specifications shall be called to the Architect's attention at least ten (10) days prior to the bid date for clarification. Failure to do so will be construed as the willingness of this Contractor to supply 1 all necessary materials and labor required for the proper completion of this work in a manner approved by the Architect. C. Call to the attention of the Architect any.error, conflict or discrepancy in Drawings and/or Specifications. Do not proceed with any questionable items of work until clarification of same has been made. D. Supplementary details and plans may be supplied as required and they will become a part of the Contract Documents. E. Work under this Division shall be conducted in a manner to cooperate with all other trades for proper installation of all items of equipment. • F. Coordination of work with other crafts employed on the project is mandatory. Arrange work to reduce interruption of existing services to minimum. When interruptions are unavoidable, consult 01 Architect and utilities involved and agree in writing, with copy to the Architect, upon a mutually satisfactory time and duration. G. Verify the physical dimensions of each item of electrical equipment to fit the available space and I promptly notify the Architect prior to roughing -in if conflicts appear. Coordination of equipment . to fit the available space and the access routes through the construction shall be the•Contractor's liability. H. Locations of items shown on the Drawings as existing are partially based on record and:other drawings which may contain errors. The Contractor shall verify the correctness of the information shown prior to bidding and provide such labor and material as is necessary to accomplish the intent of the Drawings. I. Install equipment such that code - required working clearances are maintained, and allow clearances for future maintenance. 3.02 PROTECTION OF WORK I A. Protect electrical work, wire and cable, materials and equipment installed under this Division against damage by other trades, weather conditions or any other causes. Equipment found damaged or in other than new condition will be rejected as defective. B, Switchgear, panels,.light fixtures and electrical equipment shall be kept covered or closed to exclude moisture, dust, dirt, plaster, cement, or paint and shall be free of all contamination before acceptance. Enclosures and trims shall be in new condition, free of rust, scratches or other finish defects. Properly refinish in a manner acceptable to the Architect if damaged. ,Il C. Including products of other Sections, clean, repair and touch -up or replace when directed, products which have been soiled, discolored or damaged. D. Provide for dehumidification of equipment during construction when directed by Architect. E. Remove debris from project site upon completion or sooner if directed. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -5 Pruned 07/27/04 • • 1 • SECTION 16050 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 3.03 GENERAL INSTALLATION METHODS A. Provide raceways and conduits for all electrical system wiring as specified herein. Class II or III systems wiring installed per Article 725 of NEC will be required to be installed in raceway unless otherwise indicated. When open wiring is permitted, raceways will be required in insulated walls and in other inaccessible areas. Low voltage wiring installed in return air plenums shall utilize plenum rated cable. B. The extent of,the branch circuiting and control wiring shown shall not be changed. C. Cross or hash marks on power and lighting conduit runs indicate quantity of No. 12 minimum • copper branch circuit conductors unless otherwise noted. Where such marks do not appear, provide conductors as required to provide an operable system, sized per local codes. D. Repair surfaces damaged during installation to match adjacent undisturbed areas. Surface preparation, including cleaning and priming, shall be in accordance with the paint manufacturer's requirements. E. In general, the mounting heights shall be as noted on the Drawings or as listed below. Where no heights are indicated, request clarification from the Architect. Consult the Architectural, Structural, and Mechanical Drawings to avoid conflicts prior to roughing in. All dimensions are to the center of the device above finished floor unless specified otherwise. Lighting dimensions are to the bottom of suspended fixtures; mount panelboards 72" to top handle; mount devices above counters, 12" above counter or 4 -1/2" above backsplash, whichever is greater; and receptacles in unfinished areas 48 ". F. All raceways and wiring shall be concealed where possible. All wiring devices, recessed light fixtures, etc., shall be flush mounted unless otherwise noted: G. Relays, panels, cabinets and equipment shall be level and plumb and installed parallel with structural building lines. All equipment and enclosures shall be suitable for the environmental conditions in which they will operate. H. The Drawings do not indicate all items necessary. Provide associated equipment, materials, and labor as required for complete and operable systems. 3.04 CUTTING AND PATCHING A. Under no conditions are beams, girders, footings or columns to be cut for electrical items unless so shown on Drawings or written approval obtained from the Architect. B. Cutting, patching and repairing for the proper installation and completion of the work specified, including plastering, gypsum board, masonry work, concrete work, carpentry work and painting shall be performed by workers skilled in their respective trades. C. Follow requirements specified in Division 1. 3.05 SLEEVES AND CHASES A. Provide necessary rigid conduit sleeves, openings and chases where conduits or cables are required to pass through floors, ceilings or walls. Seal all openings around conduits against leaks and in a manner to maintain the fire rating of the structure penetrated. Prevent unnecessary cutting in connection with the finished work. Make all repairs and seals in a manner acceptable to the Architect. 3.06 NOISE CONTROL 1 A. The entire electrical system apparatus shall operate at full capacity without objectionable noise or vibration. B. Outlet boxes at opposite sides of partitions shall not be placed back-to-back, nor shall straight - through boxes be employed, except where specifically permitted on the Drawings by note, to minimize transmission of noise between occupied spaces. • 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -6 pr imed 07 /27/04 I • SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS C. Contactors, transformers, starters, and similar noise - producing devices shall not be placed on walls I which are common to occupied spaces unless specifically called for on the Drawings. Where such devices must be mounted on walls common to occupied spaces, they shall be shock mounted or isolated in such a manner as to effectively prevent the transmission of their inherent noise to the occupied space. D. Ballasts, contactors, starters, transformers, and like equipment which are found to be noticeably noisier than other similar equipment on the project will be deemed defective and shall be replaced. 3.07 EQUIPMENT CONNECTIONS • A. Provide complete electrical connections for all items of equipment requiring such connections, including incidental wiring, materials, devices and labor necessary for a finished working I A installation. B. Verify the rough -in and wiring requirements for all equipment provided under other Divisions of the work and requiring electrical connections with equipment supplier and installer prior to rough- in. Check the voltage and phase of each item of equipment before connecting. Motor connections shall be made for the proper direction of rotation. Pump motors shall not be test run until liquid is in the system and proper lubrication to all bearings in unit is checked. Minimum size flex for mechanical equipment shall be 1/2 ". Exposed motor wiring shall be jacketed metallic flex. . C. Conduit, wire and circuit breaker sizes for mechanical equipment and equipment furnished under 1 other Divisions are based on the equipment ratings of one manufacturer. The equipment actually furnished may be of a different brand with different electrical characteristics. Conduit, wire and circuit breakers shall not be ordered or installed until exact electrical requirements are obtained. Responsibility for this coordination shall rest with the Contractor. 108 TESTS .. - - - Ill A. Complete each system as shown or specified herein and place in operation except where only roughing -in or partial systems are called for. Each system shall be tested and left in proper operation free of faults, shorts, or unintentional grounds. B. After the interior wiring system installation is completed, and at such time as the Owner may direct, the Contractor shall conduct an operating test for approval. The equipment shall be demonstrated to operate in accordance with the requirements of the Specification. The test shall be performed in the presence of the Owner or an authorized representative. The. Contractor shall ,�' furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests, and the .Owner will furnish the necessary electric power. The Contractor shall submit in writing to the Owner upon completion of the project the measured ground resistance of each ground rod, indicating the location of the rod, the resistance, and the soil conditions at the time the measurements were made. 3.09 DEMOLITION AND REMODELING NOTES A. Keep all systems functioning with minimum system interruptions. Power, telephone, -and life - safety system interruptions shall be coordinated with the Owner. B. The Contractor shall have the option to reuse existing raceways as far as practical, provided it remains code accessible, concealed by new work, and not in conflict with demolition. I C. The Electrical Drawings are not wiring diagrams but schematic plans prepared to aid the Contractor in bidding the electrical revisions and additions shown. It is intended that the Contractor shall visit the job site prior to bidding to verify all existing conditions which will be I affected by or will have affect upon the required revisions and additions, prepare a wiring diagram, secure all permits and accomplish the work, securing approval from the Architect for deviations from the schematic plan. D. Remove all unused lighting fixtures from remodel area prior to completion of the work. E. All removed lighting fixtures and other electrical devices accumulated during the demolition process not scheduled to be reused or turned over to the Owner shall become the property of the Contractor and shall be removed from site prior to completion of work. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 231 16050 -7 Printed 07 /27/04 '1 SECTION 16050 BASIC ELECTRICAL MATERIALS AND METHODS 1 F. Remove all existing fixtures, clocks, horns, switches, receptacles, and other wiring devices from surfaces scheduled for remodeling. Replace devices as required following application of remodeling finishes, installing box extensions where required. G. If abandoned outlets serve as feed - through boxes for other existing electrical equipment which is being retained, new conduit and wire shall be provided to bypass the abandoned outlets. If existing conduits pass through partitions which are being removed or remodeled, new conduit and wire shall be provided to route around the wall and maintain service to the existing load. H. Where devices are removed from a wall to remain, provide blank cover plate similar to other cover / plates in that area. Connect each new device or item of equipment to existing or new branch circuit wiring. It is the general intent that new devices shall be connected, reusing existing circuits wherever possible. I. The contractor shall trace the remaining load on existing branch circuits, remove all unused wiring, • make code approved circuit consolidations (where possible) to conserve and update use of existing capacity, and provide new updated panel schedules. Provide copies of resulting panel schedules and transmit with the electrical record drawing set, on which the contractor shall also note "as- • built" circuit number assignments. J. Where existing electrical items are scheduled for removal, also remove associated raceways, boxes, conduits, etc. as far as practical. • END OF SECTION • • • • 1 -- 1 • • 1 1 • • r 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16050 -8 Primed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 16110 1 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS ' I PART 1- GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION • A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. B. Provide all raceways and fittings of specified type required for complete project. Install all 1 1; systems in raceways unless specifically noted otherwise. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed and NEC approved. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING A. Deliver raceways with Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., label and bearing manufacturer's name on each length. 1 B. Deliver fittings in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged packages with labels legible and intact. 1.04 APPLICATION 1 A. Areas of use: Underground PVC Within poured Concrete (except GRC, IMC, PVC slab -on grade) Dry concealed locations GRC, IMC, EMT Dry exposed locations, subject to GRC, IMC damage Dry exposed locations, not subject GRC, IMC, EMT to damage Hazardous Class I or II GRC, IMC • B. Underground conduit shall be minimum 3/4 trade size. PVC shall not be used inside building. Unless otherwise approved, all conduits shall be installed under reinforcing steel. It • - - - - - - - -- G. Where-the contractor-elects to utilize PVC in lieu of GRC, - the - contractor - shall - provide -- - - - - - -- supplemental ground bus in terminating switch and panelboards, and green ground wire in conduit according to code rules. D. For the purposes of this section, poured concrete slabs on grade and under - the - building slabs are not classified as dry locations. E. Flexible metal conduit will be permitted only where flexibility is necessary. Exceptions are connections to recessed light fixtures. Flexible metal conduit shall be used for connection to all equipment subject to movement or vibration such as motors, transformers, etc. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit shall be used when moisture may be present and for exposed motor and • equipment connections. F. Surface raceway may be used only where specifically called for on the Drawings or in the Specifications. II G. Aluminum conduit is not permitted. 1.05 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION I A. Submit product data for surface raceway and wireway. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16110 -1 Printed 07/27/04 SECTION 16110 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS 1 PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Allied Tube & Conduit, Western Tube & Conduit, Triangle, Carlon, Western Plastics, Alflex, or approved substitute. Wiremold, Walker, or approved substitute. • 2.02 CONDUITS A. Galvanized Rigid Conduit (GRC) shall be hot -dip zinc, galvanized inside and out, mild steel pipe 'manufactured in.accordance with UL -6 and ANSI C80.1. All threads shall be galvanized after cutting. • B. Electrical Metallic Tubing (EMT) shall be steel only and shall comply with UL -797 and ANSI C80.3. Exterior shall be hot -dip zinc galvanized and interior protected by a corrosion- resistant lubricating coating. C. Intermediate Metallic Conduit (IMC) shall comply with UL -1242 and ANSI C80.6. Exterior shall be hot -dip zinc galvanized and interior protected by a corrosion- resistant lubricating coating. D. Rigid non - metallic conduit (PVC) polyvinyl chloride, schedule 40, shall comply with UL -651 and NEMA TC 2. E. Surface raceway shall utilize snap -in cover and fittings as recommended by the manufacturer and shall comply with UL 5 standard. F. Flexible metal conduit shall be steel and comply with UL 1 and ANSI standards. Liquid -tight flexible metal conduit shall comply with UL 360 and ANSI standards. 2.03 WIREWAYS • A. Gutters: Steel, painted, square in cross section, preformed knockouts on standard spacing, screw cover, suitable for environment. B. Fittings and Accessories: Include couplings, offsets, elbows, expansion joints, adapters, hold- down straps, end caps, and other fittings to match and mate with wireways as required for a complete system. 2.04 FITTINGS 11 A. GRC and IMC shall be coupled and terminated with threaded fittings. Ends shall be bushed with insulating bushings equal to T &B 1220 or 1230 series. B. Connectors and couplings for EMT shall be steel concrete tight compression type or set screw type withinsulated throats on connectors: Indent type connectors shall not be used. C. Conduits piercing a building waterproof membrane shall be provided with O -Z type FSR fittings. D. Flexible metal conduit shall utilize screw -in type connectors. Couplings and set -screw type connectors are not permitted. E. Seal -offs with filler fiber, compound, large removable cover. All components shall be of the same manufacturer. F. Expansion Couplings: 1. Exposed Conduit Runs: Expansion couplings shall be weatherproof with external bonding jumper, providing at least 4" longitudinal movement with bushed conduit ends. 2. Concealed Conduit Runs: Expansion couplings shall be water tight with an internal bonding jumper and neoprene construction. The fitting shall allow 3/4" movement in any direction or deflection of 30 degrees from normal. G. Locknuts shall be galvanized steel. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T:I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16110 -2 Printed 07/27/04 • 1 SECTION 16110 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Ends of metal conduits shall be reamed and left free of burrs. I B. Provide pull boxes or vaults where shown or required to limit the number of bends in any conduit to not more than three 90 degree bends, or to ease pulling tension. Use boxes of code - required size with removable covers, installed so that covers will be accessible after work is completed. C. Conceal all wiring in finished spaces so far as practicable. Exposed conduit shall be used only in unfinished spaces. D. Exposed raceways shall be parallel or at right angles to structural lines, and shall be neatly offset into boxes. E. Conduit stubbed from a concrete slab or wall to serve an outlet mounted on a table or to supply a machine shall have a rigid conduit coupling flush with the surface of the slab. Provide plug where 11 conduit is to be used in future. F. Keep conduit and raceway closed with suitable plugs or caps during construction to prevent entrance of dirt, moisture, concrete or foreign objects. Raceways shall be clean and dry before installation of wire and at the time of acceptance. G. Remove all foreign matter from raceways and pull mandrel through conduits larger than 1 -1/2" I prior to installing conductors. H. Where no conduit size is noted on the Drawings, conduit may be the minimum code permitted size for the quantity of type THHN conductors installed, but in no case smaller than 1/2" trade 01 diameter. Conductor quantities indicated in conduits do not include ground wire unless otherwise noted. Adjust conduit sizes accordingly. I. Where the contractor elects to combine branch circuit runs shown as separate runs on the Drawings, provide a minimum 3/4" conduit or increase raceway size to provide a minimum of 25 percent spare capacity for future conductors. Feeder runs shall not be combined. I J. All conduits installed in concrete construction, underground, or under the building slab shall be minimum 3/4 ", unless otherwise noted. 11 ' K. Assemble, glue and seal PVC conduit in straight lengths prior to installation in trench. L. Seal -offs shall be installed in all conduits which route from warm areas into refrigerated areas. M. Install PVC conduit in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Cut the conduit ends square and apply an approved solvent to clean the joint. Apply an approved cement andallow to set 24 hours before installing conductors. II N. Conduits shall be fastened to all sheet metal boxes and cabinets with two locknuts where required by the National Electrical Code, where insulating bushings are used, and where bushings cannot be brought into firm contact with the box; otherwise, a single locknut and bushing may be used. I O. A pull wire shall be inserted into each empty raceway in which wiring is to be installed by others. The pull wire shall be of No. 15 AWG zinc - coated steel, or of plastic having not less than 200 - pound tensile strength. Not less than 10" of slack shall be left at each end of the pull wire. S' P. Raceway shall not be installed under the fire pits of boilers and furnaces and shall be kept 6" away from parallel runs of flues, steam pipes and hot water pipes. . Q. Changes in direction of runs shall be made with symmetrical bends or cast -metal fittings. Field- ' made bends and offsets shall be made with an approved hickey or conduit - bending machine. Crushed or deformed raceways shall not be installed. a R. Expansion fittings complete with grounding jumpers shall be installed where raceways cross . expansion joints, construction joints, sawed joints, and where shown. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16110 -3 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16110 CONDUITS, RACEWAYS AND FITTINGS , S. Where conduit is shown stubbed into a telephone, computer or communication terminal area, *� conduit shall be stubbed up 6" above floor or 12" below ceiling and terminated with insulating bushings. T. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure adequate head room, working clearance, and access to both boxes and other equipment. U. The end of a conduit stub shall have an insulated bushing. V. Pack spaces around conduits with polyethylene backing rods and seal with polyurethane caulking to prevent entrance of moisture where conduits are installed in sleeves or block -outs penetrating partitions. W. Install intumescent material around ducts, conduits, etc., to prevent spread of smoke or fire where installed in sleeves or block -outs penetrating fire -rated barriers. An alternate method utilizing intumescent materials in caulk and/or putty form may be used. S END OF SECTION • 1 I 1 • 1 1 .1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16110 -4 Punted 07/27/04 .II SECTION 16120 I CONDUCTORS I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. I B. Provide all conductors, cables, connectors, lugs, cable ties, and terminations for all systems. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All conductors shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed. Materials omitted here but necessary to complete the work are to be of comparable quality. 1.03 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE & HANDLING • I A. Deliver conductors and cables in complete c_ oils with UL label and bearing manufacturer's name, wire size, and type of insulation. B. Store and handle materials so as not to subject them to corrosion or mechanical damage and in a II manner to prevent damage from environment and construction operation. C. Deliver conductors No. 10 and smaller in manufacturer's original unopened and undamaged I cartons with labels legible and intact. 1.04 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. None required. . PART 2- PRODUCTS ;' 2.01 CONDUCTORS A. Conductors No. 10 AWG and smaller shall be soft - drawn, or solid copper. Conductors larger than %I No. 10 AWG shall be stranded, soft -drawn copper. B. Insulation for new conductors installed in raceways shall be "THWN" for conductors No. 8 AWG or smaller, and "THWN" or "THHN" for conductors No. 6 AWG or larger, or as noted. C. Where adverse conductor exposure exists, code - approved insulation suitable for the conditions encountered shall be used unless . shown otherwise on. the Drawings___________ D. All wire and cable for feeder circuits shall conform to the latest requirements of the current edition '111 of the NEC and shall meet all ASTM Specifications. Wire and cable shall be new and have wire size, grade of insulation, voltage, and manufacturer's name permanently marked on outer covering at regular intervals. I E. Sizes shall not be less than indicated. Branch circuit conductors shall not be smaller than No. 12 AWG. Class I remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 14 AWG. Class 2 low energy remote control and signal circuit conductors shall not be less than No. 18 AWG. I F. All insulation shall be rated 600 volts unless noted otherwise. G. Acceptable Manufacturers: General Electric, Hatfield, Anaconda, Rome Cable, Belden, West ,I Penn, or approved. • 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16120 -1 Printed 07/27/04 1 . SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS 1 • 2.02 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. All connectors shall be solderless pressure type, properly taped. All taped joints shall be with .1 plastic tape, "Scotch 33," applied in half -lap layers without stretching to deform. B. Splices shall utilize Scotch "Hyflex" or "Ideal" wing nut connector installed properly. Splices for No. 8 and larger wires shall be made with tin or silver plated copper compression sleeves. • C. Terminate feeder conductors with indent/compression lugs. Set screw lugs are not permitted. D. Splices made in handholes and manholes, or underground splices, shall be made water tight with epoxy resin -type splicing kits. E. Ground the shield of twisted, shielded pairs at one end only. . II PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 CONDUCTORS - A. Insulation shall be removed with a stripping tool designated specifically for that purpose. All I. conductors shall be left nick -free. B. UL listed pulling compounds may be used with the residue cleaned from the conductors and raceway entrances after the pull is made. C. Raceway shall be complete, clean and free of burrs before pulling conductors. • D. - Wire shall not be left extending out of exposed conduit stubs or incomplete raceways where subject to mechanical injury. 4 E. Pulleys or blocks shall be used for alignment of the conductors when pulling. Pulling shall be in accordance with manufacturer's specifications regarding tensions, bending radii of the cable and. compounds. • F. Conductors shall be terminated as required. , G. Conductor sizes for special systems shall be as recommended by the equipment manufacturer except as noted. H. Stranded conductors shall not be terminated with post and screw unless compression spade /ring lug is utilized. I. 120 -volt homeruns over 80 feet in length shall be minimum #10 conductor. 3.02 LABELING g - - A. Provide color coding of building wiring consistent throughout the work as listed herein, unless required otherwise by local code authority. Band feeder conductors not available in colors where clearly visible at each termination, tape or splice using two full wraps of 3/4" adhesive vinyl tape or equally visible color marking corresponding to the following table. Less than 250V between phases ' 251 to 600V btwn phases ' Phase A - Black Phase A - Brown Phase B - Red Phase B - Orange Phase C - Blue Phase C - Yellow Neutral - White Neutral - Gray Ground - Green Ground - Green B. Switch legs, travelers, etc., to be consistent with the above phases to which they are connected or .1 may be any other color distinctive from those listed above. Complex control circuits may utilize any combination of colors but the identification shall be by labels throughout. Labeling shall be accomplished by using computer - generated heat shrink labels suitable for the wire size used. In no case will hand lettering or wraparound labels be accepted. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16120 -2 Pruned 07 /27/04 SECTION 16120 CONDUCTORS • C. Phase color code to be consistent at all feeder terminations, A -B -C left to right or A -B -C top to bottom. D. Conductor identification shall be provided within each enclosure where a tap, splice, or termination is made. * E. Control circuit terminals of equipment shall be properly identified. Terminal and conductor identification shall match that shown on approved shop drawings. Hand lettering or marking is not acceptable. 3.03 SPLICES AND TERMINATIONS A. Splices are to be made up completely promptly after wire installation. Single wire pigtails shall be provided for fixture and device connections. Wire nuts may be used for fixture wire connections to single wire circuit conductor pigtails. 3.04 CONNECTORS A. Control and special systems wires shall be terminated with a tool- applied, spade -flared lug when terminating at a screw connection. B. All screw and bolt -type connectors shall be made up tight and be retightened after an eight -hour period. C. All tool- applied compression connectors shall be applied per manufacturer's recommendations and physically checked for tightness. D. Check terminations in all panelboards, switchgear, motor control centers, etc., six months after completion of installation. Supply a confirming letter to the Owner at completion of test. 3.05 TESTS A. Perform insulation resistance tests on all feeders and circuits over 100 A, 480 volt and below, with a 1,000 volt megger. The written test report listing the results of the test to be included in the Operating and Maintenance Manuals. Equipment which may be damaged by this test shall be disconnected prior to the test. 1 END OF SECTION • • 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16120 -3 Printed 07 /27/04 SECTION 16130 BOXES I PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. B. The requirements of this section apply to electrical boxes. Provide all outlet boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes and special boxes required for pulling of wires, making connections, and mounting of devices or fixtures. i 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. All boxes shall be Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed. Where special fabrication is required, the work shall be performed by a listed facility in accordance with UL 50, and all products of I manufacture shall bear a label. Outlet and junction boxes shall be sized in accordance with NEC requirements for "THHN" wire or as noted on Drawings. 1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION I A. Submit product data for floor boxes. Submit shop drawings for nonstandard boxes, enclosures, and cabinets. Include layout drawings showing components and wiring. • PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 BOXES A. Boxes for use with raceway systems shall not be less than 4" square and 1 -1 /2" deep except where . shallower boxes required by structural conditions are approved. • B. Flush and Concealed Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel with screw ears, knock -out plugs, mounting holes, fixture studs if required. C. Surface Outlet Boxes: Galvanized stamped steel same as above for use on ceilings and walls above 14 feet. . I D. Boxes shall be of the cast -metal hub type when located in normally wet locations and when surface mounted on outside of exterior surfaces. • E. Boxes installed for concealed wiring shall be provided with suitable extension rings or plastic I, . covers as required. F. Cast -metal boxes installed in wet locations and boxes installed flush with the outside of exterior ' surfaces shall be gasketed. G. Provide boxes suitable for the intended environment and sized as required to accommodate the equipment within. I H. Pull boxes of not less than the minimum size required by the National Electrical Code shall be constructed of code -gauge aluminum or galvanized sheet steel except where cast -metal boxes are required in locations specified above. Boxes shall be furnished with screw- fastener covers. Where several feeders pass through a common pull box, the feeders shall be tagged to indicate clearly the I electrical characteristics, circuit number, and panel designation. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 MOUNTING A. Outlet boxes shall be designed for the intended use. Flush outlet boxes shall be installed flush with finished surface lines. 1 . 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16130 -1 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16130 BOXES .� B. Outlet boxes on flex connected fixtures shall be installed within five feet of conduit knock -out in fixture. 3.02 INSTALLATION • A. Coordinate layout and installation of raceway and boxes with other construction elements to ensure 1 adequate head room, working clearance, and access to both boxes and other equipment. OF SECTION 1 END O N S C O 1 • 1 . • • 1 1 1 f 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC 1 JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16130 -2 Pruned 07 /27/04 • SECTION 16140 . 1 WIRING DEVICES 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. I B. Provide all wiring devices and finish plates as required unless specifically indicated otherwise. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed and NEC approved. B. Wiring devices shall be specification grade, with special devices as noted on the Drawings. Should the Drawings indicate a device other than those listed herein, such device shall be of same I grade and manufacture as specified below. C. . All lighting switches and duplex receptacles installed shall be from the same manufacturer and have identical appearance characteristics. 1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Submit product data for wiring devices and cover plates. . PART 2 - PRODUCTS 10 2.01 MATERIALS A. Wall Switches: 20 ampere, 120/277 volt AC, quiet type, Hubbell 1221 Series, color to follow Owner's standards. Single pole, double pole, 3 -way, locking, or other type as indicated. • ' B. Receptacles: Single and duplex receptacles shall be rated 20 amperes, 125 volts, two -pole, three- wire, grounded type, Hubbell 5362 Series. Receptacles shall have nylon faces, one -piece brass mounting strap with integral ground contacts and bypass power contacts; color to follow Owner's standards. C. Receptacles with ground fault interrupters shall be in accordance with UL requirements. D. Special purpose or heavy duty receptacles shall be of the type and of ratings and number of poles indicated or required for the anticipated purpose. Contact surfaces may be either round or rectangular, One appropriate straight or angle-type plug shall be furnished with each receptacle.._ Locking facilities, where indicated, shall be accomplished by the rotation of the plug. ,I E. Device plates of the one -piece type shall be provided for all outlets and fittings to suit the devices installed. Plates on unfinished walls and on fittings shall be of zinc - coated sheet steel, cast metal, or impact resistant plastic having rounded or beveled edges. Plates on finished walls shall be stainless steel. g F. Receptacles in wet locations shall be in a weatherproof enclosure, the integrity of which is not affected when the receptacle is in use. 1 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS A. Hubbell, Cooper, P &S, and Leviton. !1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 1 A. Devices and finish plates to be installed plumb with building lines. I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16140 -1 Printed 07/27/04 SECTION 16140 WIRING DEVICES B. Finish plates and devices not to be installed until final painting is complete. Scratched or splattered finish plates and devices will not be accepted. C. Wall mounted receptacles shall be installed vertically at centerline height shown on the Drawings unless otherwise specified. D. Plates shall be installed with all four edges in continuous contact with finished wall surfaces without the use of mats or similar devices. Plaster fillings will not be permitted. Plates shall be installed with an alignment tolerance of 1/16 inch. E. All outlets shall have a cover plate. Provide blank cover plate to match surrounding area if none other is specified. F. Devices shall be `back wired' when installed. 1 3.02 TESTS A. Test all receptacles for, line to line, line to neutral, line to ground, and neutral to ground, opens or shorts, and correct defective wiring. 3.03 LABELING A. See Section 16195, Electrical Identification. 1 END OF SECTION • • • • 1 • • r .� 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16140 -2 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 16170 CIRCUITS AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION • 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. I B. Provide disconnect switches as indicated on the Drawings, in the Specifications, and where required by the National Electrical Code, even though not indicated. Provide fused or unfused switches as required by equipment manufacturer or circuit requirements. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE A. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., listed. • 1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Provide outline drawings with dimensions, and provide equipment ratings for voltage, amperage, horsepower, and short circuit. I PART 2 - PRODUCTS I 2.01 DISCONNECTS A. Enclosed safety switches shall be horsepower. Switches shall disconnect all ungrounded conductors. B. Safety and disconnect switches shall be NEMA type HD (heavy duty), quick -make, quick- break, dual rated with electrical characteristics as required by the system voltage and the load served. Switches shall be equipped with a defeatable cover interlock. Operating handles shall be located I to side of switches. C. Enclosures shall be NEMA 1 for indoor use,unless specifically noted otherwise, NEMA 3R where installed exposed to the weather or designated by the subscript "WP," and explosionproof where designated with the subscript "EP" or as required by the environment. I D. Disconnects shall be fusible or non - fusible. Equip all fusible disconnects with dual element fuses required by the equipment served. Coordinate fuse sizes at the time equipment is connected. Adjust fuse sizes if necessary to accommodate actual equipment installed. In no case shall fuses be sized smaller than the starter heaters on motor circuits. E. For single -phase motors, a single - or double -pole toggle switch, rated only for alternating current will be acceptable for capacities less than 30 amperes, provided the ampere rating of the switch is I at least 125 percent of the motor rating. F. All disconnects shall be of same manufacturer. . 1 G. Switches identified for use as service equipment are to be labeled for this application. 2.02 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Square D, Siemens, Cutler- Hammer/Westinghouse, and GE approved. 1 ,1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16170 -1 1 SECTION 16170 CIRCUITS AND MOTOR DISCONNECTS 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION 1 A. Install safety and disconnect switches where indicated, in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions, the applicable requirements of NEC and the National Electrical Contractors Association's "Standard of Installation," and in accordance with recognized industry practices to ensure that products serve the intended function. B. Install disconnect switches used with motor- driven appliances, motors, and controllers within sight of the controller position and within 25 feet. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.T. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16170 -2 I SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION . 1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. I B. Provide all electrical equipment and wiring with adequate supports of specified type required for a complete installation. • 1.02 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION 1 • A. Submit shop drawings indicating details of fabricated products and materials. • PART 2- PRODUCTS 2.01 FASTENERS I A. Fastenings shall be by wood screws or screw -type nails to wood; by toggle bolts on hollow masonry units; by expansion bolts on concrete or brick; by machine screws, welded threaded studs, heat - treated or spring steel tension clamps on steel work; for new concrete installation use cast -in- concrete inserts. Kindorf D -255 or approved. I B. Hammer- driven and trigger -fired anchors may be used only after obtaining specific written authorization from the Architect. III 2.02 OUTLET BOX SUPPORTS A. Wood Stud Walls: Adjustable bar hangers with "C" channel cross section Steel City 6010 series, or approved, or mounted on solid blocking. 4 -inch square boxes adjacent to wood studs may be I B. side nailed and back braced with Steel City No. 50 box brace. Light steel construction, bar hangers with 1 -inch long studs between metal studs or metal stud "C" brackets snapped on and tab - locked to metal studs. 1 C. Concrete or masonry walls where boxes are not cast in place. Flush anchors or concrete inserts. D. Flush Ceiling Outlets: Steel City 6010 series or equal bar hangers. 2.03 CONDUIT SUPPORTS A. One Hole Malleable Straps: Steel City, Appleton, T &B, Diamond, Raco, or approved. 1 B. Conduit Clips: Caddy, Raco, or approved. C. Nail -Up Straps: 1/2" through 1 ", Raco 2252, 2253, 2254, or approved. I D. Adjustable Hangers for Conduits 1 -1/2" and Larger: Steel City C -149 with threaded steel rod of proper size. E. Adjustable trapeze hangers to support groups of parallel conduits; Steel City B -905 steel channel, I H -119 square washer, C -105 strap, threaded rod. Components of Unistrut, Globe Strut, Harvey Alstrut, Kindorf, or approved. 2.04 HANGER ROD ATTACHMENTS III A. • Side Beam Connector, Kindorf E -244; 90 degree fitting, Kindorf B -916; clamp type anchor clips Kindorf Type "C," Unistrut P2675 or approved, spot type concrete insert Kindorf B -255 with "Galv -Krom" finish. 1 . 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16190 -1 • Printed 07/27/04 i SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES . 1 • 2.05 SUPPORT CHANNELS A. Conduit: Kindorf B -905 with Galv -Krom finish, and C -105 single bolt channel pipe straps. 1 B. Lighting: Kindorf B -900 with G -969 closure strip and G -977 swing connector. C. Recessed in Concrete: Kindorf D -980 with D -982 anchored end caps and D -983 joiner clips. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION ill A. Every fastening device and support for electrical equipment (includes fixtures, panels, outlets, conduits, and cabinets) shall be capable of sustaining not less than four times the ultimate weight of the object or objects. Fasten support to the building or a building structural member. B. Provide independent supports to the building or building structural member for electrical fixtures, . materials, or equipment installed in or on ceiling, walls, or in void spaces and /or over the furred or suspended ceilings. Chain or additional ceiling wires may be used for light fixture supports. C. Other crafts' fastening devices shall not be used for the supporting means of electrical, equipment, materials, or fixtures. D. Supports and /or fastening devices shall not be used to support more than one particular item. E. Vertical support members for equipment and fixtures shall be straight and parallel to building walls. F. Examine all equipment locations to determine type of supports required. G. Raceways or pipe straps shall not be welded to steel structures. 4 H. Holes cut to a depth of more than 1 -1/2" in reinforced concrete beams or to a depth of more than 3/4" in concrete joists shall avoid cutting the main reinforcing bars. Holes not used shall be filled.. 3.02 BOXES A. Boxes and pendants for surface - mounted fixtures on suspended ceilings shall be supported independently of the ceiling supports. B. In open overhead spaces, cast metal boxes threaded to raceways need not be separately supported except where used for fixture support; cast metal boxes having threadless connectors and sheet it metal boxes shall be supported directly from the building structure or by bar hangers. C. Where bar hangers are used, the bar shall be attached to raceways on opposite sides of the box and the raceway shall be supported with an approved fastener not more than 24" from the box. ii 3.03 RACEWAYS A. Support conduits within 18" of outlets, boxes, panels, cabinets, couplings, elbows, and deflections. Maximum distance between supports shall not exceed ten (10) foot spacing. B. Conduit up to and including 1" EMT may be supported from ceiling fixture wires by conduit clips or other approved devices only with written approval of the installer of the ceiling support system. All other conduit runs shall be secured to the structure by two -hole straps or supported on Kindorf or Unistrut hangers. Wire will not be permitted for supporting conduit. All visible conduit runs will be parallel to the building structural lines. C. Anchor conduit installed in poured concrete to the steel reinforcing with No. 14 black iron wire. D. In partitions of Tight steel construction, sheet metal screws may be used, and bar hangers may be attached with saddle- suspended ceiling construction only. Lighting system branch circuit raceways shall be fastened to the ceiling supports. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16190 -2 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16190 SUPPORTING DEVICES I E. Support suspended feeder conduits by metal ring or trapeze hangers with threaded steel rods. Wire ties to prevent displacement, using not less than No. 14 iron wire, may be used only for concealed runs in concrete for conduit up to 1 -1/4 ". F. At main distribution and surface mounted branch panels and cabinets where conduit exits from the I top, provide support channels on wall 24" above panel and at 6' -0" intervals from there on for support of conduits. END OF SECTION . 1 1 1 Ilk • II 1 1 1 I • I 1 • 1 I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16190 -3 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1 PART 1 - GENERAL • • 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 - General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. i . B. Clearly and properly label the complete electrical system to indicate the loads served or the function of each item of equipment connected under this work. 1.02 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. None required. I. PART2- PRODUCTS 2.01 IDENTIFICATION MARKERS I A. Unless otherwise specified, all identification nameplates shall be made of laminated three -ply plastic in accordance with Fed. Spec. L -P -387 equal to "Lamicoid." Nameplates shall be minimum 1/16" thick, with black outer layers and a white core, red outer ply for all emergency applications. Edges shall be chamfered. I B. Provide identification nameplates for starters, switchboards, safety switches, panelboards, motor control centers, transformers, equipment (air handling units, exhaust fans, pumps, etc.), with a 01 minimum of 1/4" high letters. C. Provide identification nameplates for control power transformers, control devices (relays, contactors, etc.), with a minimum of 1/8" high letters. D. Where switches control remote lighting, exhaust fans, or power outlets, or where switches in the same gang (two or more) serve different purposes, such as light, power, intercom, etc., or different areas, such as corridor and outlet, furnish engraved cover plates with 1/8" black letters indicating function of each switch or outlet. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 LABELING A.._______. Major - items -of- electrical equipment.and -major components . shall -be- permanentl -y- mar -ked- with -an ......_. . identification nameplate to identify the equipment by type or function and specific unit number as shown on the Drawings. I B. Provide typewritten branch panel schedules with protective clear, transparent covers accounting for every breaker installed. Use actual room designations assigned by name or number near completion of the work, and not the designation on the construction drawings. Minimum panel I schedule width shall be 4" with 1/4" height allowed for each circuit line. Panel schedules shall be the type which install in a metal frame or pocket. Panel schedules shall be of the odd /even sequence (1- 3- 5- 7 -9... and 2- 4- 6- 8- 10...). C. Identify service entrance and distribution switchboards with engraved nameplate corresponding I with the plans, mounted on the face of the switchboard. Identify each feeder, breaker, and switch with engraved nameplate corresponding with the plans. `I D. Identify branch panels with engraved nameplate corresponding with the main or subdistribution panel labeling, mounted on the face of the door. No brand labels or other markings shall be on the outside of the panels. I E. Label all disconnect switches, relays, contactors, starters and time switches indicating voltage, amperage, power panel source, circuit number and equipment served with laminated plastic label. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16195-1 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16195 ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION 1 F. All junction boxes are to be labeled with a `high quality' label maker. G. All receptacle covers are to be labeled with panel and circuit number. Use `high quality' label maker. H. `High quality' label maker to be approved for use by Owner. 1 • END OF SECTION 1 • 1 1 S 1 1 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16195 -2 PI lilted 1 SECTION 16450 1 GROUNDING 1 PART 1 - GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. B. Provide ground system as specified herein, as shown on the Drawings, and as required by NEC and other rules and regulations pertaining to grounding. 1.02 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. None required. PART 2 - PRODUCTS 2.01 GROUND CONDUCTORS A. Equipment or grounding conductors shall be soft drawn copper, stranded and, if insulated, shall have green insulation. 2.02 GROUNDING BUSHINGS/WEDGES • A. Sufficient ampacity with grounding conductor set screw connection. 2.03 CONNECTOR - A. Cast, setscrew or bolted type. 2.04 GROUN RODS A. Copper -clad steel, not less than 3/4" in diameter, 8' long, driven full length into the earth. PART 3 - EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION • A. All grounding conductors shall be sized in accordance with Article 250 of the NEC. B Except where specifically indicated otherwise, -all - exposed -non= current - carrying metallic. parts of .. electrical equipment, metallic raceway systems, and neutral conductor of the wiring system shall he grounded. C. The ground connection shall be made at the main service equipment and shall be extended to the point of entrance of the metallic water service. Connection to the water pipe shall be made by a suitable ground clamp. If flanged pipes are encountered, connection shall be made with the lug bolted to the street side of the flange connection. D. Where the metallic water service is used, it shall be grounded as described by Article 250 of the I NEC. E. Generally, all supplemental grounding electrodes shall be ground rods. F. All ground wire connections below finished grade, cast in concrete, or bonding solid wire shall be exothermically welded. G. Where there is no metallic water service to the building, ground connections shall be made to driven ground rods on the exterior of the building. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16450 -1 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16450 • GROUNDING H. The maximum resistance measured in accordance with IEEE Standards of a driven ground shall not exceed 25 ohms under normally dry conditions. If this resistance cannot be obtained with a single rod, additional rods shall be installed not less than 6' on centers, or if sectional -type rods are used, additional sections may be coupled and driven with the first rod. If the resultant resistance exceeds 25 ohms measured not less than 48 hours after rainfall, the Engineer shall be notified immediately. Grounding conductor connectors shall be made up tight and located for future servicing and to ensure low impedance. J. The Contractor shall submit in writing to the Owner upon completion of the project the measured ground resistance of each ground rod, indicating the location of the rod and the resistance and the soil conditions at the time the measurements were made. K. Where new circuits are to be served by existing panels with no ground bus, provide supplemental copper ground bus in panel. • END OF SECTION • 1 1 1 — — 1 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL – T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD – TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16450 -2 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16500 1 LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION .1 A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and other Conditions and other Division 1 — General Requirements sections, apply to the work specified in this Section. I B. Provide all lighting outlets indicated on the Drawings with a fixture of the type designated and appropriate for the location. Outlet symbols on the Drawings without a type designation shall have a fixture the same as those used in similar or like locations. I C. Provide lamps for all fixtures. D. Coordinate installation of fixtures with the ceiling installation and all other trades to provide a total system that is neat and of orderly appearance. 1 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE . A. Fixtures shall conform to the following specifications. 1 B. The lighting designated for this project was based on fixture types and manufacturers as specified. C. Manufacturers specified are indicative of the general type and performance desired and are not I intended to restrict selection to fixtures of any particular manufacturer. Fixtures of similar designs and equivalent light distribution and brightness characteristics, and of equal finish and quality will be acceptable if approved by the Architect prior to the bid. 01 D. Equality shall be determined by comparisons of performance, construction, installation ease, maintenance, and appearance. E. All light fixtures shall be UL listed and labeled. I 1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION A. Submit product data describing fixtures, lamps, ballasts, and emergency lighting units. Arrange product data for fixtures in order of fixture designation. I B. Include data on features and accessories and the following information. 1. Outline drawings of fixtures indicating dimensions and principle features. ' 2. Electrical ratings and photometric data with specified lamps and certified results of II laboratory tests. 3. Data on batteries and chargers of emergency lighting units. C. Submit shop drawings from manufacturers detailing nonstandard fixtures and indicating I dimensions, weights, methods of field assembly, components, features, and accessories. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.01 FLUORESCENT FIXTURES A. Ballasts shall be as follows: I 1. Physically interchangeable with standard core /coil electromagnetic ballast. 2. Provided with integral leads, color -coded to ANSI standard. 3. High frequency electronic integrated circuit, solid -state type compatible with lamps and lamp combinations to which connected. I 4. Ballast output frequency shall be greater than 20kHz and less than 30kHz or greater than 42kHz. Ballast output shall not be between 30kHz and 42kHz for any lamp combination. 5. Ballast THD shall be <I0% for all Lamp types. 6. Ballast power factor shall be >99 %. I 7. Ballast shall start the lamp at a minimum temperature of 0 degree F. 8. Ballast shall be Programmed Start. II 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16500 -1 Panted 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16500 ' LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS 9. Ballast shall have a lamp current crest factor <1.5 for F32T8 lamps. 10. Ballast shall operate from a normal line voltage of (120, 277) volts, 50 /60Hz. 120V ballast shall operate from 90V -145V: 277V ballast shall operate from 200V -305V. 11. Ballast shall maintain constant light output for a line voltage variation of 10 %. 12. The electronic ballast shall support a sustained short to ground or open circuit of any output leads. 13. The electronic ballast shall have an audible noise rating (Class A) or better. 14. Ballast shall meet the requirements of the Federal Communications Commission rules and regulations for non- consumer equipment. 15. The electronic ballast shall meet. ANSI standards • for harmonic distortion. . 16. Ballast shall meet ANSI for transient protection. 17. The electronic ballast shall comply with all applicable state and federal efficiency standards. 18. The electronic ballast shall be UL listed (class P) and CSA certified where applicable. 19. Ballast shall meet FCC Class A (non- consumer) specifications for EMI/RFI. 20. Minimum five year ballast and complete replacement labor warranty by manufacturer. . 21. Approved manufacturers: Advance `Mark V', Universal, GE. B. Recessed troffers shall be as follows: 1. Diffusers 12" X 48" and larger shall be pattern 12 extruded clear acrylic plastic, 0.125" II overall thickness, unless otherwise specified in the fixture schedule by catalog number or • remarks. Door shall be securely closed by use of enclosed spring - loaded cams. 2. Finish shall be white baked enamel, unless otherwise specified with a minimum average reflectance of 85% on all exposed and light reflecting surfaces. Steel components shall be prepared for finishing with a 5 -step zinc phosphatizing process. The fixtures shall not be pre - painted. 3. Housing shall be 22- gauge minimum. Overall depth shall be 4 -1/2" minimum. Spacing from bottom of lamp to top of lens shall be 1 -7/8" minimum. . • C. Lamps shall be as follows: 1. 4' linear fluorescent shall be as follows: a. 32 watt, "T -8," rapid start. 4 b. Minimum 2900 lumens. c. 3500 K color temperature. . d. 85 CRI. e. 20,000 hours average rated life. f. For general use with other types as required by the fixture specified. g. Shall have low mercury content, meeting the EPA's Toxic Characteristics Leaching Procedure (TCLP), for disposal as non- hazardous waste 2. Fluorescent lamp approved manufacturers: General Electric, Osram/Sylvania, Philips. E. Miscellaneous: 1. All surface - mounted fluorescent lighting fixtures shall have low density label. 2.. All recessed fluorescent - lighting installed in ceilings shall be with fire- __ rated protective covers per UL standards. 3. All fixtures mounted outdoors or in unheated spaces shall have 0 degree ballasts. 4. Conform to UL. 1 2.02 RECESSED FIXTURES A. In insulated ceilings, recessed fixtures to be equipped with "IC" rated housing or with a field I fabricated fireproof box (metal, sheet rock, etc.), complying fully with all clearance requirements. ' 2.03 FIXTURES A. See Drawings for Fixture List. t PART 3 EXECUTION 1 3.01 INSTALLATION . 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16500 -2 Printed 07/27/04 ii SECTION 16500 I LIGHTING FIXTURES AND LAMPS • A. Lamps of the proper type, wattage, and voltage rating shall be delivered to the project in the 1 original cartons and installed in the fixtures just prior to the completion of the project. Provide lamp type as recommended by the fixture manufacturer. B. Fixtures shall be left clean at the time of acceptance of the work with every lamp in operation. If fixtures are deemed dirty by the Architect at completion of the project, the Contractor shall clean them. C. Fixtures shall be carefully aligned, leveled in straight lines, and located as shown on the Architectural reflected ceiling plan. The final decision as to adequacy of support and alignment I shall be made by the Architect. The fixtures shall be supported and fastened to the ceiling system. D. Verify all ceiling conditions and provide all lighting fixtures complete with factory furnished in stems, balls, aligners, and canopies as required for a complete installation. E. Recessed fluorescent troffers installed in suspended T -bar ceiling shall be independently supported on two opposite corners by #12 gauge steel wire attached to structure, per UBC Standard. F. Surface mounted light fixtures shall be securely fastened to the building surface via factory- created holes in the fixtures. Attachment of fixture merely to recessed outlet box is not sufficient. G. Lighting fixtures in any single enclosed room shall be connected using a common (one) circuit, I except in cases where the loading requires a second circuit. H. Accessories such as straps, mounting plates, nipples, or brackets shall be provided for proper installation. END OF SECTION 1 I � . • 1 1 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16500 -3 Pruned 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16723 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION •I A. The Contractor shall provide modifications to the existing Simplex 4020 fire alarm system as specified herein and as indicated on the Drawings. I B. The modifications shall include signal initiating devices, audible and visual alarm devices, remote power supplies, battery back -up, a conduit and wiring system, and all accessory devices required to provide a functional system. Wiring and system connections to fire alarm equipment furnished and installed by the other divisions are included to the extent that device locations are shown on the I Drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. The system shall comply with the applicable provision of the National Fire Protection Association Standard Number 70, "National Electrical Code," Standard Number 72, "National Fire Alarm Code," and meet all requirements of the local authorities having jurisdiction. I B. All equipment and devices shall be listed by the Underwriters Laboratories, Inc., or approved by Factory Mutual Laboratories and shall meet Federal Specification Standards. C. All material and equipment shall match existing system. 1 D. All equipment located on the exterior of the building shall be weatherproof. 1.03 SUBMITTALS • - A. In addition to the items outlined in Section 16050, include the following: 1. Shop Drawings shall include complete wiring and schematic diagrams for equipment furnished, equipment layout, battery calculations, and other details. I 2. Product data for system components. Include dimensioned plans and elevations showing minimum clearances and installed features and devices. 3. Include performance field test reports with operation and maintenance manuals. PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 INITIATING DEVICES t_ A. Low profile_ photo electronic-type smoke detectors shall be self - restoring _( not requiring resetting or ____ readjustment after actuation to restore them to normal operation). Detector and associated encapsulated electronic components shall be mounted in a module that connects to a fixed base I with a twist - locking plug connection. The plug connection shall require no springs for secure mounting and contact maintenance. Terminals in the fixed base shall accept building wiring. Shall have a visual indicator connected to indicate the detector has operated. I B. Manual Pull Station: Semi -flush, red enamel finish, single action. Station to be keyed the same as the fire control panel. Addressed at the time of installation. Provide clear Lexan shield which requires lifting to access pull station. Shield shall have a warning horn I C. Thermal heat detectors shall be low- profile, combination rate -of -rise and fixed temperature, 135° F, normally open contacts. A common key to reset the manual stations and to open all fire alarm cabinets shall be provided. I D. E. Duct smoke detector shall be photo electronic -type, with sampling tube of design and dimensions as recommended by the manufacturer for the specific duct size and installation conditions where applied. Detector shall include relay and/or auxillary contacts as required for fan shutdown and I smoke damper operation. Housing shall be suitable for the environment in which it is located, and shall be accessible for maintenance purposes. Provide remote indicator light for detectors hidden 111 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC . JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16723 -1 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16723 FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEM behind construction. 2.02 AUDIBLE VISUAL ALARM DEVICES 1 A. Horns shall be of sufficient number so that an alarm shall be clearly audible to all occupants of the building and/or fire area, as required by these specifications. Mounting height shall be 96" inches to the centerline of the unit above the finished floor. Locations where ceilings prevent the installation at 96 "inches centerline, the centerline of the unit shall be 6" inches below the ceiling. . B. Audible alarm signals shall produce a sound level at least 15 dBA above the average ambient sound level or 5 dBA above the maximum sound level having a duration of at least 60 seconds (whichever is greater) measured 5 feet above the floor in each occupiable area. The average ambient sound level is the root mean square, a weighted sound pressure measured over a 24 -hour period. C. Strobes shall be installed as shown on the drawings in accordance with the requirements of the UL I 1971 standard and NFPA 72. Where multiple visual notification appliances can be seen from any location, circuitry shall be incorporated for the synchronization of flash rate. 1. . Strobes shall produce a flash rate of one (1) flash per second minimum over the listed 1 input voltage (20VDC — 31 VDC) range. 2. Strobes shall incorporate a Zenon flashtube enclosed in a rugged Lexan lens or equivalent with solid state circuitry. 3. Strobe intensity shall be rated per UL 1971 for 15/75, 30/75, 60/75, 75 or 110 Candela. Dual listing strobes of 15/75 intensity for UL 1971 /near -axis requirements shall be used where acceptable. 4. Strobes shall be available for semi -flash or surface mounting and in conjunction with I audible appliances as required. 2.03 APPROVED EQUIPMENT • A. Manufacturers: Shall match existing Simplex 4020 system. 4 2.04 WIRING A. Provide all required wiring in accordance with local and national. Unless otherwise specified, minimum wire size shall be 16 gauge for audible /visual alarm circuits, and 18 gauge for signal initiating circuits. B. Wiring in accessible locations (i.e. above removable ceiling tiles) may be open fire alarm cable. Wiring in inaccessible locations (i.e. walls, above gyp ceilings) shall be in a conduit raceway system. The contractor has the option to re -use the existing fire alarm raceway, system if applicable and found to be in good condition. All conductors installed in existing raceway shall be THHN. Verify wiring with equipment supplier and increase conduit size where required. PART 3 EXECUTION 3.01 INSTALLATION A. The contractor shall install the entire system per the supplier or manufacturer's instructions. The I equipment supplier shall provide supervision of final installation. B. The equipment manufacturer shall be represented by a local service organization and the name of • this organization shall be furnished to the Owner. C. The contractor shall include in the basic bid all installation charges rendered by the supplier. 3.02 TESTING AND SERVICE 1 A. The contractor shall notify the Owner 30 days before the performance and acceptance tests are to be conducted. A factory trained representative of the manufacturer shall supervise the final testing 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16723 -2 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 16723 I FIRE ALARM AND DE 1'1 CTION SYSTEM of the system and it shall be subject to the approval and acceptance of the Owner. I B. Prior to final inspection, test, clean and calibrate the entire system. All control equipment, manual stations, audible alarms, remote lights, flow switches, etc., must be installed and wired. I C. The Contractor shall furnish all instruments and personnel required for the tests. Tests shall be conducted for the following: 1. Verify that the system is free of grounds or open circuits. 2. Verify that all horns, stations, transmitters, automatic detectors, and supervisory devices I are functioning as specified. 3. Reconducted to verify correction of any defect found in the initial testing. D. After completion of all the tests and adjustments listed above, the Contractor shall submit the I following information to the Owner: 1. As- installed conduit layout diagrams including wire color code and tag number. 2. Complete as- installed wiring diagrams. I 3. Detailed catalog data on all installed system components. 4. Manufacturer's operation and maintenance manuals. 5. Copies of the technician's certified report (as above). 6. Provide the above in bound manual. See section of this Specification covering Record I Information. 3.03 GUARANTEE I A. The Contractor shall guarantee all equipment and wiring free from inherent mechanical or electrical defects for one year from date of Owner acceptance. 0 3.04 SERVICE AGREEMENT A. The manufacturer shall furnish gratis to the Owner a one year contract effective from date of acceptance for maintenance and inspection service of the manufacturer's equipment with a minimum of two inspections during the contract year, the final inspection to occur no sooner than I 30 days prior to warranty expiration. 3.05 INSTRUCTIONS A. After the system is complete and all tests are made, the system manufacturer's representative shall I instruct the operating personnel as designated by the owner giving them instructions and information as to the system operation and minor servicing. This period of instruction to be not less than 4 hours. , B. The operating personnel shall be shown the location of each item of equipment installed including equipment panels, cabinets,, etc. 1 END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16723 -3 Printed 07/27/04 • • 1 SECTION 16730 I INTERCOM AND PAGING SYSTEM 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION I A. Provide all equipment, accessories, and materials in accordance with these specifications and the drawings to provide a complete and operating Intercom and paging System extension, consisting of speakers, baffles, back- boxes, intercom call -in switches, conduit, wiring, and programming. Existing I system manufacturer is Rauland. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE I A. Products shall be UL listed and labeled. B. Comply with FCC regulations. . I C. Comply with the NEC and local amendments. D. All items of equipment including wire and cable shall be designed by the manufacturer to function as a complete system and shall be accompanied by the manufacturer's complete service notes and I E. drawings detailing all interconnections. The contractor shall be an established communications and electronics contractor that has had, and currently maintains, a locally run and operated business for at least five years. The contractor shall be a duly authorized distributor of the equipment supplied with full manufacturer's warranty 1 privileges. F. The contractor shall show satisfactory evidence, upon request, that he maintains a fully equipped service organization capable of furnishing adequate inspection and service to the system. The contractor shall maintain at his facility the necessary spare parts in the proper proportion as recommended by the manufacturer to maintain and service the equipment being supplied. 1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION 1 A. Product data sheets shall be submitted on all items including cable types. B. Submit outline drawings of equipment including dimensions and mounting provisions. 1 C. Submit wiring diagrams showing typical connections for all equipment. , D. Submit a certificate of completion of installation and service training from the system manufacturer. - _ 1.04 SERVICEAND MAINTENANCE I A. The contractor shall provide a one year warranty of the installed system against defects in material and workmanship. All labor and materials shall be provided at no expense to the owner during normal working hours. The warranty period shall begin on the date of acceptance by the owner /engineer. I B. The contractor shall, at the owner's request, make available a service contract offering continuing factory authorized service of the system after the initial warranty period. I C. The system manufacturer shall maintain engineering and service departments capable of rendering advice regarding installation and final adjustment of the system. 1.05 SINGLE SOURCE RESPONSIBILITY I A. Except where specifically noted otherwise, all equipment supplied shall be the standard product of a single manufacturer of known reputation and experience in the industry. The supplying contractor shall have attended the manufacturer's installation and service school. A certificate of this training shall be provided with the contractor's submittal. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16730 -1 Primed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16730 INTERCOM AND PAGING SYSTEM 1 PART 2 PRODUCTS 2.01 MANUFACTURERS 1 A. Intercom: Match existing Rauland system. • 2.02 BACK BOXES . 1 . A. Suitable for indicated mounting method. B. Equip with knockouts and hanger straps for designated device. 1 2.03 SIGNAL DEVICES A. Signaling devices shall match existing, and match existing master control unit for power supply and signal type. B. Outdoor Signal Equipment: Weatherproof models listed for outdoor use. 2.04 SPEAKERS, BAFFLES, BACK -BOXES AND INTERCOM CALL -IN SWITCHES I A. Provide equipment compatible with existing system. 2.05 WIRING 1 A. Size and type of conductors /cables as recommended by system manufacturer. 1 PART 3 EXECUTION - 3.01 INSTALLATION 0 A. - Install the equipment in accordance with the manufacturer's installation instructions. B. Wiring in accessible locations (i.e. above removable ceiling tiles) may be open cable. Wiring in i inaccessible Locations (i.e. walls, above gyp ceilings) shall be in a conduit raceway system. The contractor has the option to re -use the existing raceway system if applicable and found to be in good condition. Verify wiring with equipment supplier and increase conduit size where required. C. Refer to applicable sections of these specifications for raceways, boxes, supports, etc. 1 D. All wiring shall be in accordance with the NEC and local amendments. E. _.. Make splices, taps, and terminations on numbered terminal strips in junction, pull and outlet boxes terminal cabinets, and equipment - enclosures. F. Color -code conductors and apply wire and cable marking tape to designate wires and cables so they are uniformly identified and coordinated with system wiring diagrams throughout the system. G. Communication circuits give off RE noise. Maintain at least an eighteen inch distance from all other communication circuits, where possible. in H. Wiring within enclosures: Provide adequate length of conductors. Bundle, lace and train the II conductors to terminal points with no excess. Provide and use lacing bars. in I. Provide weatherproof enclosures for items to be mounted outdoors or exposed to weather. 3.02 GROUNDING III A. Ground programming equipment, intercom equipment, conductor and cable shields to eliminate I shock hazard and to minimize ground loops, common mode returns, noise pickup, cross talk, and other impairments. • 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16730 -2 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16730 1 INTERCOM AND PAGING SYSTEM 3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL I A. Manufacturer's Field Services: Provide services of a factory - authorized service representative to supervise the field assembly and connection of components and system pretesting, testing, adjustment, and programming. I B. Programming: Set system so signal devices operate on required schedules and are activated for durations selected by the Owner. Program relay output circuits to suit Owner's operating schedule for the equipment controlled. I C. Pretesting: Adjust the system and perform pretesting to verify conformance with specified requirements. Correct deficiencies by replacing malfunctioning or damaged items with new items. Retest until satisfactory performance and conditions are achieved. 1 D. Provide at least 10 day's notice of acceptance test performance schedule. 1. Operational Test: Perform operational system tests to verify conformance with specifications. Include operation of all modes of clock correction and all programming I and manually programmed signal and relay operating functions. 2. Inspection: Verify that units and controls are properly labeled and interconnecting wires and terminals are identified. 3. Retesting:. Correct deficiencies and retest until the total system meets the requirements of I the Specifications. 4. Prepare test and inspection reports. • . 3.04 DEMONSTRATION • 1 A. Train Owner's operating personnel in the programming and operation of the system. Train Owner's maintenance personnel in the procedures and schedules involved in programming, IIII operating, troubleshooting, servicing, and providing preventative maintenance for the system. Provide a minimum of 4 hours of instruction. B. Schedule training with at least 7 days' advance notice. I 3.05 ADJUSTMENT A. Adjust sound output level of adjustable signal devices to suit Owner's requirements. B. Occupancy Adjustments: When requested within 1 year of date of substantial completion, provide I on -site assistance in adjusting and reprogramming to suit actual occupied conditions. Provide up to 2 visits to the site for this purpose without additional cost. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 1 1 i 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16730 -3 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16735 111 GPS WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM 1 PART 1 'GENERAL 1.01 SUMMARY I A. Section Includes: Division 1 applies to this section. Provide GPS wireless clocks, complete. Transmitter and GPS receiver are existing. 1 B. Related Work Specified Elsewhere: 120 volt grounded electrical outlet at transmitter location. 1.02 DEFINITIONS A. GPS: Global Positioning System, a worldwide system that employs 24 satellites in an integrated I network to determine geographic location anywhere in the world, and which employs and transmits atomic time, the most accurate and reliable time. I 1.03 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION A. GPS wireless clock system shall continually synchronize clocks throughout the facility, and shall be capable of clock readouts in multiple time zones where desired. I B. The system shall synchronize all clocks to each other. The system shall utilize GPS technology to provide atomic time. The system shall not require hard wiring. Clocks shall automatically adjust for Daylight Savings Time. • I C. Analog Clocks shall be synchronized to within 10 milliseconds 6• times per day, and the system shall have an internal oscillator that maintains plus or minus one second per day between synchronizations, so that clock accuracy shall not exceed plus or minus 0.2 seconds. IIII D. The system shall include an internal clock reference so that failure of the GPS signal shall not cause the clocks to fail in indicating time. E. The system shall incorporate a "fail- safe" design so that failure of any component shall not cause I , failure of the system. Upon restoration of power or repair of failed component, the system shall resume normal operation without the need to reset the system -or any component thereof. F. Clock locations shall be as indicated, and clocks shall be fully portable, capable of being relocated I at any time. 1.04 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS 1 A. Equipment and components furnished shall be of manufacturers latest model. B. System shall be installed in compliance with add state authoritie axing jurisdiction. I 1.05 SUBMITTALS A. Product Data: Submit complete catalog data for each component, describing physical characteristics and method of installation. Submit brochure showing available colors and finishes I of clocks. 1.06 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING I A. Deliver all components to the site in the manufacturer's original packaging. Packaging shall contain manufacturer's name and address, product identification number, and other related information. I B. Store equipment in finished building, unopened containers until ready for installation. .PROJECT SITE CONDITIONS I A. Clocks shall not be installed until painting and other finish work in each room is complete: • • I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16735 -1. Printed 07 /27/04 • 1 SECTION 16735 GPS WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM 1 1.08 SYSTEM STARTUP A. At completion of installation and prior to final acceptance, turn on the equipment, ensure that all I equipment is operating properly, and that all clocks are functioning. PART 2 PRODUCTS 1 2.01 MANUFACTURER A. GPS wireless clock system shall be manufactured by Primex Wireless, Inc., N3211 County Road H, Lake Geneva WI 53147 (800) 537 -0464 FAX (262) 248 -0061 www.primexwireless.com. 2.02 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION • I A. Transmitter Operation: When power is first applied to the transmitter, it checks for and displays the software version, then it checks the position of the switches and stores their position in memory. The transmitter then looks for. the GPS time signal. Once the transmitter has received the I GPS time, it sets its internal clock to that time. The transmitter then starts to transmit its internal time once every second. The transmitter updates its internal clock every time it receives valid time data from the GPS. . B. Analog Clock Operation: i 1. When the batteries are inserted into the clock: A) Press the red button when the red second hand is at the 12:00 position. At this time the microprocessor will lock in the location of the second hand. a. After the red second hand has passed over the minute hand (first second hash I mark after minute hand), press and release the red button. At this time the microprocessor will lock in the location of the minute hand. The microprocessor then assumes the location of the hour hand. . 2. After the red button has been pressed twice, the micro processor will start searching the channels. It will start at channel No. 1 and proceed one by one until it either decodes a valid signal or reaches channel No. 16. If no signal is detected the receiver will be shut off 0 and will try again later. If a signal is received, the micro processor will store the channel number, set the clock to the receive the time. For the next minute the clock will beep I every time that it receives a valid time signal. If the clock is in a good signal area it will beep once a second. If the clock beeps every few seconds, the clock is in a marginal signal area. Analog clocks can operate in marginal signal areas, but battery life will be about 25 percent shorter. • 3. After initial set, the clock will shut off the receiver. On a pre - scheduled basis, the microprocessor will turn the receiver back on and starting with the stored channel, it will again look for a valid time signal. However, the beeper will not operate. 4. If the clock not decoded a valid time signal for seven days, then it will go back to a — — double -step mode. Non- signal reception can be caused by low battery voltage. If this occurs, replace the batteries. • 2.03 EQUIPMENT - A. General: The clock system shall include a transmitter, a roof or window mounted GPS receiver, indicating clocks, and all accessories for complete operation. B. Existing Transmitter: Primex Wireless Model FM -72, consisting of wireless transmitter with GPS I receiver. Unit shall obtain current atomic time from satellite. The clock system shall transmit time continuously to all clocks in the system. • C. Existing GPS Receiver: Model Number Q11695, GPS roof mounted, with cable attached. Contractor to provide cable length as required. E. Traditional Analog Clocks: Match existing Primex Wireless analog clocks, 12 -1/2 inch diameter or 16 inch diameter as selected, color and finish as selected from manufacturer's standard colors and finishes. Analog clocks shall be wall mounted, and 12 -1/2 inch diameter clocks shall have polycarbonate frame and polycarbonate lens. Face shall be white. Hour and minute hands shall be black. Analog clocks shall be provided with.red sweep second hand. 1. 12 -1/2 inch analog clocks shall be battery- operated, and shall have 5 -year battery life. 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL – T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD – TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16735 -2 Printed 07/27/04 1 • SECTION 16735 I GPS WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM , 2. Analog clocks shall be capable of automatically adjusting for Daylight Saving Time. An I on -off switch located on the transmitter shall disable this function if desired. 3. Time shall be automatically updated from the transmitter 6 times per day. 4. Analog clocks shall remember the tine during changing of batteries. 5. 12 -1/2 inch analog clock lock: Tamper - proof /theft resistant hangers and slots in the backs I of the analog clocks. 6. Provide 2 alkaline D -cell batteries with each 12 -1/2 or 16 -inch analog clock. 7. Analog clock receivers shall be as follows: a. Receiver sensitivity: > -110 dBm b. Receiver power: two alkaline D -cells I c. Antenna type: internal d. Antenna gain: -7 dBd 8. If transmitter stops transmitting valid time signals due to power failure, the clocks will continue to function as accurate quartz clocks until a valid time signal is decoded. I 9. Analog clock faces shall bear Owner's logo as indicated. F. Wire guards: Provide as indicated on the drawings. 1. Model No. 14131, 14 by 14 inch size, for nominal 12 -1/2 inch diameter analog clocks. I 2. Model No. 14123, 18 by 18 inch size, for 16 inch diameter analog clocks. G. Cable Connection Sealant: Radio Shack Coaxial Cable Connector Sealant 278 -1645, or approved electrical grade silicone sealant. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.01 EXAMINATION A. Verify that construction is complete in spaces to receive equipment and that rooms are clean and 0 dry: 3.02 INSTALLATION A. Analog clocks: Perform the following operations with each clock: I 1. Install D -cell batteries. 2. • Set clock to correct time in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. 3. Observe analog clock until valid signals are received and analog clock adjusts itself to correct time. I 4. Install the analog clock on the wall in the indicated location, plumb, level and tight against wall. If using 12 -1/5 inch clock, attach using clock -lock hanging method and suitable fasteners as approved by clock manufacturer. , B. Wire guards: Secure to wall, using approved theft - resistant fasteners. 1 3.03 ADJUSTING • A. Prior to final acceptance, inspect each clock, adjust as required, and replace parts which are found I defective. 3.04 CLEANING I A. Prior to final acceptance, clean exposed surfaces of clocks, using cleaning methods recommended by clock manufacturer. Remove temporary labels from clock faces. Do not remove labels from backs of clocks. 3.05 DEMONSTRATION . I A. Provide training to Owner's representative on setting and adjusting clocks, replacing batteries and routine maintenance. I 3.06 PROTECTION A. Protect finished installation until final acceptance of the project. 1 i 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16735 -3 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16735 .GPS WIRELESS CLOCK SYSTEM 1 END OF SECTION • 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 • 1 • • • • 1 1 1 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16735 -4 Printed 07/27/04 SECTION. 16740 1 1 DATA, TELEPHONE, AND CATV SYSTEMS 1 PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION • I A. Provide the system of conduits, pull boxes, outlet boxes, and other associated equipment specified herein and as shown on the Drawings for data, telephone, and CATV systems. I B. All wiring, instruments, terminal equipment, etc., will be provided by others. PART 2 PRODUCTS I 2.01 MATERIALS A. Outlet Boxes: 4" square, 2 -1/8" deep minimum with 2 -gang device ring. 1 B. Data/Telephone Conduits: 1" minimum size with larger sizes as indicated on the Drawings. C. CATV Conduits: 3 /4" minimum size with larger sizes as indicated on the Drawings. PART 3 EXECUTION I 3.01 INSTALLATION A. Conduit bends shall be large radius field bends. No run shall have more than 270 degrees of total III bend radius. B. Where conduits are stubbed into a terminal cabinet area, conduits shall be stubbed up 6" above floor or 12" below ceiling and terminated with insulating bushings. Provide 80# test polypropylene pull line in all conduits. I C. Provide 3/4" raceway and #6 copper wire with green insulation from data/telephone rack to main service ground bus. Provide blank cover plate at all outlet locations, finish to be brushed stainless steel. I D. - E. Data, telephone, and CATV outlet boxes shall not be multiple gang boxes. END OF SECTION 1 1 1 r 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 15740 -1 Printed 07 /27/04 f SECTION 16900 LIGHTING CONTROLS • PART 1 GENERAL 1.01 DESCRIPTION • A. Provide lighting control equipment complete and operable as specified herein and as shown on the Drawings. 1.02 QUALITY ASSURANCE ' A. All lighting control equipment shall be UL listed and labeled and shall comply with the NEC. B. Comply with FCC Regulations of Part 15, Subpart J, for Class A. 1.03 SUBMITTAL AND RECORD DOCUMENTATION ' A. Submit product data for lighting control equipment and systems components, including dimensions and data on features and components. Include elevation views of front panels of control and indicating devices. Include data on ratings. B. Submit wiring diagrams detailing specific systems tailored to this Project and differentiating between factory- installed and field - installed wiring. C. Submit maintenance data for lighting control equipment and systems components to include in the operation and maintenance manual specified in Division 1. PART 2 - PRODUCTS • 2.01 TYPE 1 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. The passive infrared sensor shall be a completely self contained control system that replaces a standard toggle switch. Switching mechanism shall be a latching air gap relay, compatible with electronic ballasts, compact fluorescent, and inductive loads. Triac and other harmonic generating devices shall not be allowed. Sensor shall have ground wire and grounded strap for safety. B. Sensor shall be capable of detecting presence in the control area by detecting changes in infrared ' energy. Small movements shall be detected, such as when a person is writing while seated at a desk. C. Sensor shall utilize advanced control logic based on RISC (Reduced Instruction -Set Circuit) microcontroller. D. Detection Signature Processing (DSP) shall be used to avoid false offs and false activations and to provide immunity to RFI and EMI. ' E. Continuously adjusting Zero Cross relay control shall be used to guarantee reliable operation with non - linear loads (electronic, PL lamp ballasts) even with temperature changes and product aging. This increases the WA -200 product longevity. F. Sensor shall utilize SmartSetTM technology to optimize the sensor behavior to fit occupant usage patterns and adjust sensitivity and time delay to changing conditions. The use of SmartSet shall be selectable by user with' a DIP switch. G. Sensor shall have a time delay that is adjusted automatically (with the SmartSet setting) or shall have a fixed time delay of 5, 10, 15, 20 or 30 minutes, walk - through mode, or test mode, set by DIP switch. In walk - through mode, lights shall turn off 3 minutes after the area is initially occupied if no motion is detected after the first 30 seconds. H. Sensor shall have the choice of light flash alert and / or audible alert of impending light shut off, selectable with DIP switch. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16900 -1 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 16900 LIGHTING CONTROLS I I. Sensor shall have sensitivity adjustment that is set to either automatic (Smart Set setting) or reduced sensitivity, and is set with DIP switch. I J. Sensor shall have a built -in light level feature selectable with DIP switch. During setup of light level control, sensor shall learn desired hold -off level, requiring only one step. K. Sensor shall have automatic -ON or manual -ON operation adjustable with DIP switch. 1 L. Sensor shall operate at universal voltages of 100, 120, 230, or 277 VAC; 50/60 Hz. M. Sensor shall have no minimum load requirement and shall be capable of switching 0 to 800 watts fluorescent/incandescent or 1/6 hp at 100 /120VAC, 50/60 Hz; 0 to 1200 watts fluorescent or 1/6 i hp at 230/277VAC, 50/60 Hz. N. Sensor shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual element sensor, and a multi- element Fresnel lens. O. . For vandal resistance, Fresnel lens shall be made of hard, 1.0mm Poly IR 2 material that offers greater sensitivity to motion and superior detection performance. Lens shall have grooves facing I in to avoid dust and residue build up which affects IR reception. P. To assure detection at desktop level uniformly across the space, sensor shall have a 2 level, 28 segment, multi - element Fresnel lens system. Q. Sensor shall cover up to 300 square feet for waling motion, with a field of view of 180 degrees. R. Adjustments and mounting hardware shall be concealed under a removable, tamper resistant cover I to prevent tampering of adjustments and hardware. S. For safety, sensor shall have a 100% off switch with no leakage current to the load. T. Sensor shall not protrude more than 3/8" from the wall and shall blend in aesthetically. li U. To ensure quality and reliability, sensor shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified manufacturing facility and shall have a defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1 %. V. Sensor shall have standard 5 year warranty and shall be UL and CUL listed. W. Manufacturers: Watt Stopper WA -200 or approved equal. 2.02 TYPE 2 OCCUPANCY SENSORS A. The passive infrared ceiling- mounted sensor shall be capable of detecting presence in the floor area to be controlled by detecting changes in the infrared energy. Small movements shall be detected; such as when a person is writing while seated at a deskwithin 8 feet sensor: B. The sensor shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual - element sensor and a multi - element Fresnel lens. 1 C. The sensor shall have a daylight filter which ensures that the sensor is insensitive to short - wavelength infrared waves such as those emitted by the sun. I D. Fresnel lens shall be a Poly IR 2 based material to offer superior performance in the infrared wavelengths. Lens shall have grooves facing inward to avoid dust and residue build -up which affects IR reception. E. The sensor shall not protrude more than 0.36" from the ceiling and shall blend in aesthetically. 1 F. The sensor shall have one occupancy -based output. G. The sensor shall have a digital time delay, adjustable from 15 seconds to 30 minutes. 1 H. Sensitivity adjustment with DIP switch shall be adjustable from minimum to maximum. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16900 -2 Printed 07/27/04 1 SECTION 16900 • I LIGHTING CONTROLS I. Adjustments and mounting hardware shall be concealed under a removable cover to prevent tampering with adjustments and hardware. J. Sensor shall cover 360° and up to 1200 square feet for walking motion when mounted at a ceiling height of 12 feet. I K. The sensor shgall have normally open, normally closed, and common outputs rated at 1 amp at 24 VDC and 1/2 amp at 120 VAC. . 1 L. The sensor shall operate on 24 VDC with a current draw not to exceed 15 mA. M. Multiple sensors shall be capable of parallel wiring to allow coverage of large areas. 1 N. The sensor shall have a standard five -year warranty. O. The sensor shall be UL listed and labeled. 1 P. Manufacturers: Watt Stopper CI -200 series with an `isolated relay' or approved equal. 2.03 TYPE 3 OCCUPANCY SENSORS I A. The Dual Technology sensor shall be capable of detecting presence in the control area by detecting Doppler shifts in transmitted ultrasound and passive infrared heat changes. B. Sensor shall utilize Dual Sensing Verification Principle for coordination between ultrasonic and I PIR technologies. Detection verification of both technologies must occur in order to activate lighting systems. Upon verification, detection by either shall hold . lighting on. C. Sensor shall have a retrigger. feature in which detection by either technology shall retrigger the lighting system on within 5 seconds of being Switched off. D. Ultrasonic sensing shall be volumetric in coverage with a frequency of 40 KHz. It shall utilize Advanced Signal Processing which automatically adjusts the detection threshold dynamically to I compensate for constantly changing levels of activity and air flow throughout controlled space. E. Detection shall be maintained when a person of average size and weight moves only within or a maximum distance of 12 inches either in a horizontal or vertical manner at the approximate speed I of 12 inches per second. The sum of this distance, volume and speed represent the average condition a dual technology sensor must meet in order for the lights to remain on when a person is reading or writing while seated at a desk. • I F. Sensor shall be capable of corner mounting to a wall or ceiling in order to eliminate detection through open doorways and outside of controlled area. To provide superior small motion detection and activation upon entry, coverage of both technologies must - be cuiuplete - acrd • overlapping throughout the controlled area. I G. To avoid false ON activations and to provide high sensitivity to minor motion, Pulse Count Processing and Detection Signature Analysis shall be used to examine the frequency, duration, and amplitude of a signal, to respond only to those signals caused by human motion. I H. Sensor shall utilize mixed signal ASIC (application- specific integrated circuit) technology, which combines analog and digital processing into one chip package, to provide immunity to RFI and EMI. I I. The PIR technology shall utilize a temperature compensated, dual element sensor and a multi - element Fresnel lens. The lens shall be Poly IR4 material to offer superior performance in the infrared wavelengths and filter short wavelength IR, such as those emitted by the sun and other I visible light sources. The lens shall have grooves facing in to avoid dust and residue build up which affects IR reception. 1 I 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL - T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD - TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16900 -3 Printed 07 /27/04 1 SECTION 16900 LIGHTING CONTROLS • 111 • J. To ensure high sensitivity to small motion at the desktop, the standard lens shall be 30 element with 15 layers horizontally and 4 layers vertically and shall cover up to 2000 square feet for walking motion when mounted at a ceiling height of 10 feet. K. DT -200 sensors shall have an additional single -pole, double throw isolated relay with normally open, normally closed and common outputs. The isolated relay is for use with HVAC control, data , logging, and other control options. • . L. The DT -200 shall have two outputs; one based on occupancy only and one based on occupancy with a hold OFF and an internal photocell setting when a minimum light level is present , (adjustable from 2 to 200 footcandles). DT -205 shall have only an occupancy based output. 1 M. For accuracy, sensor shall have a DIP switch controlled, digital time delay of 30 seconds to 30 • minutes. N. Sensor shall have a DIP switch override -ON function for use in the event of a failure. O. Each sensing technology shall have an independent sensitivity adjustment and LED indicator that remains active at all times in order to verify detection within the area to be controlled. ' P. Sensor shall incorporate field - selectable logic configurations which allows for space utilization changes and / or other special field conditions. Q. To ensure quality and reliability, sensor shall be manufactured by an ISO 9002 certified 1 manufacturing facility and shall have a defect rate of less than 1/3 of 1 %. R. Sensor shall have standard 5 year warranty and shall be UL and CUL listed. I S. Manufacturers: Watt Stopper DT -200 series or approved equal. . 2.04 OCCUPANCY SENSOR POWER PACK fill A. Power pack shall provide 24 VDC operating voltage to occupancy sensors and be capable of, switching 20 amps of electrical load. B. Power pack shall consist of a transformer and high- current relay in a single small package. C. Power pack shall be available in 120, 240, and 277 volt supply voltage. D. Power pack shall have a plastic enclosure. E. Power pack shall be able to externally mount through a 1/2" knock -out on a standard electrical ' enclosure. F. Power pack leads shall be Teflon- coated for use in plenums. G. Manufacturers: Watt Stopper or approved equal. 1 PART 3 - EXECUTION I 3.01 • INSTALLATION A. It shall be the contractor's responsibility to locate and aim sensors in the correct location required I for a complete and proper volumetric coverage within the range of coverage of controlled areas per the manufacturer's recommendations. The contractor shall provide the quantity of sensors necessary to properly and completely cover each room indicated to have occupancy sensing. B. The contractor shall provide power packs as required to accomplish the occupancy sensing ' indicated. 1 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL — T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC I JULY 04 TIGARD — TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16900 -4 Printed 07 /27/04 • . - SECTION 16900 ' LIGHTING CONTROLS C. Mount power packs to junction boxes in accessible locations and per the manufacturer's instructions. D. Mount the sensors with adapters and/or swivels per the manufacturer's instructions. E. It is the contractor's responsibility to arrange a pre - installation meeting with the manufacturer's U factory authorized representative, at the Owner's facility, to verify placement of sensor and installation criteria. F. Proper judgment must be exercised in executing the installation so as to ensure the best possible installation in the available space and to overcome local difficulties due to space limitations or • interference of structural components. G. The contractor shall provide, at the Owner's facility, the training to familiarize the Owner's personnel with the operation, use, adjustment, and problem - solving diagnosis of the lighting control equipment and systems. 3.02 TESTING • A. The lighting control equipment and systems shall be thoroughly tested to confirm proper operation. • END OF SECTION • • • 1 1 1 • - - - -- — 1 .1 i 02054 TIGARD HIGH SCHOOL ADDITION / REMODEL – T.I. PACKAGE - MUSIC JULY 04 TIGARD – TUALATIN SCHOOL DISTRICT 23J 16900 -5 • • Prised 07/27/04